Home

FANUC Robotics America GFK-1541B User's Manual

1. 4096 61825 62080 61825 62080 tin doewa enews Mapping Code 65535 65535 enson cstv aswea Table E 1 Modbus Register IC693CMM321 Reference Table Translation Note The Mapping Code is a read only address A client may read this address to determine the mapping in use without knowing what type of device this is The IC693CMM321 will return a 1 when this register is read indicating that the above mapping in is use GFK 1541B E 1 www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete www fadfamily com Eltaicadsev2h hoHnalC lGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 1 10Base2 1 4 Ethernet transceiver B 17 10Base2 port B 11 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 44 10Base5 1 5 10Base F 1 5 10Base T 1 4 Ethernet transceiver B 15 port information B 6 B 8 10Base T port Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 44 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 44 new style IC693CMM321 2 5 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 19 10Broad36 1 5 A AAUI connector on transceiver B 17 AAUI port 1 4 B 13 new style IC693CMM321 2 5 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 19 AAUI transceiver B 14 Abort Channel command 2001 3 28 Aborting a channel 3 9 Adapter RS 232 to RS 485 converter B 5 Adapter Names 5 21 Aliases 5 21 AUI port 1
2. The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete RS 232 RJ 11 Serial Port The 6 pin RJ 11 modular phone jack RS 232 port is used for the following purposes Products Purposes of Port 1C693CMM321 AAUI only Type 1C693CPU374 IC697CMM742 ONE Ne E Typs Local Station Manager connection AND IC693CPU364 Software Loader connection for updating firmware Local Station Manager connection only Port Settings The serial COM port of the terminal or PC that is connected to the Ethernet Interface must use the same communications parameters as the Ethernet Interface The default values for the Station Manager port are 9600 bps 8 bits no parity and stop bit If the Ethernet Interface is configured with default values for this port or the Ethernet Interface has not been configured use these default values If the Ethernet Interface is configured with non default values for this port use those values for the serial port settings of the terminal or PC The default values for the Software Loader port this connector is used as the Software Loader port only for those modules specified in the lowest row of the table above are 19 200 bps 8 bits Odd parity and stop bit If the Ethernet Interface is configured with default values for this port or the Ethernet Interface has not been configured use these default values If the Ethernet Interface is configur
3. later in this appendix for instructions to use the PC Software Loader program The program that you run on the PC is referred to as the Firmware Update Utility in the instructions that follow Note For the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 only it is not possible to perform a firmware load to this Ethernet Interface while it is operating with an IC697 PLC CPU running firmware Release 4 12 through 5 50 Do not attempt to do so the operation will fail Move the Interface to a IC697 PLC CPU system running firmware Release 6 00 or higher to perform the firmware load GFK 1541B ey www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Updating Firmware Under Windows You will need an IBM compatible PC running Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT 4 0 equipped with a 3 5 inch high density diskette drive and an RS 232 serial port The firmware update process requires 500 KB of hard drive space If you are using Windows 3 xx or Windows NT 3 51 follow the instructions in the Updating Firmware under DOS section To install the new firmware perform the following steps 1 Connect one of the serial ports on your PC to the Software Loader Port on your Ethernet Interface For the IC693CMM321 Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface AAUI only Type and for the 1C697CMM742 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 use cable assembly IC690ACC901 For
4. 01H to avoid confusion with the normal successful COMMREQ completion Call GE Fanuc Automation NA for assistance 11H SRTP Error Codes at server An error was detected at the SRTP server See the following table of Minor Error codes 82H Insufficient Privilege at client PLC For the Series 90 70 PLC the minor error code contains the privilege level required for the service request 84H Protocol Sequence Error The CPU has received a message that is out of order Call GE Fanuc Automation NA for assistance 85H Service Request Error at the client PLC The minor error code contains the specific error code See the following table of Minor Error codes 86H Illegal Mailbox Type Service request mailbox type is either undefined or unexpected Call GE Fanuc Automation NA for assistance 87H The client PLC CPU s Service Request Queue is full The client should retry later It is recommended that the client wait a minimum of 10 milliseconds before sending another service request 8BH Illegal Service Request The requested service is either not defined or not supported This value is returned in lieu of the actual service request error 01H to avoid confusion with the normal successful COMMREQ completion Call GE Fanuc Automation NA for assistance 90H Client API error See the following table of Minor Error codes wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 37 The document is for study only
5. GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products TCPAP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual GFK 1541B May 2002 www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Au
6. s IP address to a MAC address via ARP and communicate with C directly When host B communicates with host A it knows from A s IP address that A is on another network the netids are different In order to send data to A B must have the IP address of the gateway connecting the two networks In this example the gateway s IP address on Network 2 is 172 17 0 3 This address would be configured in the Ethernet Interface s module configuration for PLC B as its default gateway address Note that the gateway has two IP addresses 172 16 0 2 and 172 17 0 3 The first must be used by hosts on Network 1 and the second must be used by hosts on Network 2 To be usable a host s gateway must be addressed using an IP address with a netid matching its own www cadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete L Subnets and Multiple Gateways For a site requiring a large network such as a Class A network the number of entries in the routing tables of a site s internal gateways could number in the millions if no internal network structure is superimposed on the address definition The solution to this problem is subnetting Subnets allow a site s network administrators to divide a large network into several smaller networks while still presenting the overall network as one single entity to the outside world Each of
7. www gadfamily com Elancadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete LAN Interface Status LIS Bits The status bits normally occupy a single block of memory The location of this block is specified during configuration of the Ethernet Interface The first 16 bits of the block see Table 5 3 are the LAN Interface Status LIS bits The next 64 bits are the Channel Status bits 2 for each channel Status Bits Brief Description 1 Port 1 full duplex 2 Port 1 100Mbps 3 Port 2 full duplex 4 Port 2 100 Mbps 5 6 Reserved 7 RS 485 port fuse blown 8 AAUI 90 30 or AUI BNC 90 70 fuse blown 9 Any SRTP Channel Error error on any channel 10 12 Reserved 13 LAN OK 14 Resource problem 15 Reserved 16 LAN Interface OK 17 Data Transfer Channel 1 18 Channel Error Channel 1 47 Data Transfer Channel 16 48 Channel Error Channel 16 49 Data Transfer Channel 17 90 70 only 50 Channel Error Channel 17 90 70 only 79 Data Transfer Channel 32 90 70 only 80 Channel Error Channel 32 90 70 only For Series 90 30 PLCs bits 49 80 are reserved for future use Unless the LAN Interface OK bit is set Status Bit 16 the other status bits are invalid Status Bit 1 Port 1 Full Duplex This bit is set to 1 when Port 1 or the only port on a mod
8. wwwigadiamily com Ebaileadsen2t homail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 5 19 Consumed Exchanges Information EXAMPLE 3 Local Exchange Local Adapter Name Remote Group Consumer Update Status Time Producer ID ID Producer ID ID Period Timeout Word Stamp 0 0 01 2 Pricia 0 003 o 1000 2000 Stat2 n a 0 002 3 pec2 0001 0 1000 2000 Star3 ma 00 03 1 pecs 0 0 0 1 o 1000 2000 Stai ma Variable List for Consumed Exchanges EXAMPLE 3 Local Remote Exchange Var Name Address Length Type Description Producer ID Producer ID ID 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 2 1 Van R00150 10 WORD Vatl fromPLC3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 2 2 Va2 R00160 10 WORD Vat2 fromPLC3 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 Conveyor2 R00250 aS Conveyor2 from PLC1 osos oooi i i Conveyer eR00s30 3 WORD Conveyor fom PLET Ww en Note These tables contain definitions of ALL the exchanges in the entire EGD system The shaded columns identify the PLC in which a given exchange is to be configured and additionally for the variable list tables the exchange the variable is associated with Valid PLC Memory Types Used with EGD Type Value Description P Producer Decimal C Consumer TR 8 Register memory in word mode P C AI 10 Analog input
9. A default Producer ID value is provided You can change the value of the Producer ID from the default value to any number in dotted decimal form To ensure uniqueness on the network the default value is Series 90 70 PLCs The same as the IP address of the Ethernet Interface physically closest to the CPU in the rack Series 90 30 PLCs The same as the IP address of the Embedded Ethernet Interface Note When you configure the producer of Ethernet Global Data you must also supply the adapter name of the Ethernet Interface from which the exchange will flow This name is configured using the PLC programming software if supported You need to specify the adapter name because in Series 90 70 PLCs more than one Ethernet Interface that supports Ethernet Global Data can be installed For a Series 90 30 CPU374 the adapter name is specified as a rack and a slot rather than as a symbolic name Consumer The consumer is the PLC or other device that will update its local internal memory based on the data in an exchange The consumer is identified at the producer by a Group ID an IP address or a symbolic name These identifiers refer to the specific Ethernet Interface in the consumer For Series 90 70 PLCs there can be more than one Ethernet Interface that supports Ethernet Global Data installed in the PLC Group ID This method is typically used when you want more than one consumer to receive the same exchange from a producer See the topic
10. All LEDs are briefly turned ON whenever a restart is performed in the Operational state by pressing and releasing the Restart pushbutton described below This allows you to verify that all LEDs are operational See Verifying Proper Power Up of the Ethernet Interface for more LED information Ethernet Restart Pushbutton The Restart pushbutton serves four functions LED test Restart Restart and enter Software Load state and Restart and enter Maintenance state These four functions behave similarly in all states except for the Software Load state While in this state pressing the pushbutton will cause an immediate restart into the Operational state without performing the LED test if the software in the Ethernet Interface has not been corrupted or erased If the software has been corrupted or erased pressing the pushbutton will cause an immediate restart back into the Software Load state The following text describes Restart pushbutton behavior while not in the Software Load state Pressing the Restart pushbutton will disrupt Ethernet communications LED Test Any time the Restart pushbutton is released all the LEDs flash ON You should visually verify that all the LEDs go OFF and then ON at this time Then the Interface performs either a restart a restart and enter Software Load state or a restart and enter Maintenance state depending on the duration that you press the pushbutton Restart Pressing the Restart pushbutton momentari
11. Appendix Communications Port Characteristics B This appendix contains a description of each of the ports for the Ethernet Interfaces The ports for each Ethernet Interface are listed below from top to bottom as they appear on the module IC693CMM321 10Base T Type Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface Ports RS 232 RJ 11 Serial Port combined Station Manager and Software Loader Port 10Base T RJ 45 Port Network Port AAUI Port Network Port accessed from bottom of module IC693CPU364 Series 90 30 CPU364 Embedded Ethernet Interface Ports RS 232 RJ 11 Serial Port combined Station Manager and Software Loader Port AAUI Port Network Port 10Base T RJ 45 Port Network Port IC693CPU374 Series 90 30 CPU374 Embedded Ethernet Interface Ports RS 232 RJ 11 Serial Port Station Manager Port Two 10Base T 100Base Tx RJ 45 Ports Embedded Switch Ports Conn Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 Ports RS 232 RJ 11 Serial Port Station Manager Port RS 485 15 pin D type Serial Port Software Loader Port 10Base T RJ 45 Port Network Port AUI Port Network Port 10Base2 BNC Port Network Port IC693CMM321 AAUI only Type Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface Ports RS 232 RJ 11 Serial Port Station Manager Port RS 485 15 pin D type Serial Port Software Loader Port AAUI Port Network Port accessed from bottom of module GFK 1541B B 1 www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com
12. Communications Port Characteristics for more information A serial cable for the Station Manager port on the Ethernet Interface see Appendix B Optional A terminal or IBM compatible personal computer equipped with terminal emulation software Optional Note If your installation requires CE Mark compliance please refer to GFK 1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards for additional guidelines CPU364 Installation Use the following instructions as a guide when inserting a module into a slot in a baseplate These instructions assume that the power supply on the baseplate is to your left Do not insert or remove modules with power applied This could cause the PLC to Stop damage the module or result in personal injury Be sure the Series 90 30 PLC baseplate power is OFF Align the module with the CPU s base slot slot 1 and connector Tilt the module upwards so that the top rear hook of the module engages the slot on baseplate Swing the module downward until the connectors mate and the lock lever on the bottom of the module snaps into place engaging the baseplate notch Visually inspect the module to be sure that it is properly seated Connect one of the Ethernet ports on the Ethernet Interface to the network If you are using an external transceiver connect the transceiver cable to the 14 pin AAUI port of the Ethernet Interface Secure the cable The other end of the transceiver cable should be connected to
13. Group Usage for more information IP Address This method is used when you want to identify the consumer s Ethernet Interface using an IP address Symbolic Name This method is used when you want to use local table DDP or DNS name resolution to acquire the consumer s IP address See Name Resolution in the chapter Network Administration Support for more information wwweadiamily com Ebfaileadsenvd hotmail com 5 3 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Asynchronous Operation of EGD Producer period gt a Producer period www tadfamily com EMajhCRASRANRZANANAbEReries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 PLC Producing EGD EGD Production Is Initiated Producer period timer starts Exchange Status word is set to 0 First exchange data sample is sent onto the network EGD Production Repeats Producer period timer expires and is restarted Exchange data sample is sent onto the network Exchange Status Word set to 1 Producer period timer expires and is restarted Exchange data sample is sent onto the network Exchange Status Word set to 1 The production and consumption of EGD is asynchronous The period timers for the producer and consumer are independent of each other In addition the initiation of the production and consumption of EGD can occur at different times The figure below illustrates the as
14. Network Address name char 19 20 Remote Host Network Address name char 21 22 Remote Host Network Address name char 23 23 Remote Host Network Address name char 24 25 Remote Host Network Address name char 26 27 Remote Host Network Address name char 28 29 Remote Host Network Address name char 30 31 Reserved set to zero Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address wwwi gadfamily com Eltacadseve hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B Words 7 17 See the descriptions in Example 1 Word 18 Remote Host Network Address Type Word 18 specifies the format of the remote host s address Currently Word 18 must contain the value 1 or 3 A value of 1 indicates a dotted decimal IP address expressed using a separate register for each decimal digit A value of 3 indicates a Network Address name See Example 1 for information on using address type 1 Word 19 Remote Host Network Address Length Word 19 specifies the length in words of the remote host s Network Address name With an address type of 3 specified in Word 18 Word 19 must contain 32 decimal Words 20 35 Remote Host Network Address Name Words 20 35 specify the Network Address name of the remote host as an ASCII character string The Network Address n
15. Specifically if your ladder program for issuing COMMREQs is constructed so it does the following all available TCP connections can quickly be used up The number of repetitions Word 9 in an Establish Read or Write Channel COMMREQ is set to 1 and Anew COMMREQ is issued repeatedly and immediately upon completion of the prior one Use Channel Re Tasking To Avoid Using Up TCP Connections The most likely scenario for using up TCP connections is when each successive COMMREQ is directed to the same target device same IP address or Network Address name In this case it is better to establish a channel with the target device once leave it active then re task the channel even if data transfers take place infrequently This method will use only one TCP connection An additional advantage of re tasking is that the time and network traffic required to create a channel and its associated TCP connection are not incurred each time a data transfer is required The disadvantages to re tasking are While the TCP connection is open it is unavailable to the rest of your application and The active TCP connection uses up network bandwidth because the active TCP connection generates a small amount of ongoing periodic network traffic How To Re Task a Channel 1 For Establish Read Write Channel Commands set the number of repetitions COMMREQ Word 9 to 2 and set the read write period COMMREQ Words 10 and 11 to be longer than the exp
16. Status Bits 18 20 22 80 Channel Error Bit This bit is set to 1 when an error is detected on this channel It is set to 0 when the channel is initially established and if the channel resumes normal operation after a transient error condition subsides The Channel Error bit is also set to 0 when the channel is aborted by an Abort Channel command or when the PLC CPU transitions from RUN to STOP In the case of an Establish Channel command the CRS word is always updated before the Channel Error bit is set to 1 Note For Series 90 30 PLCs bits 49 80 are reserved for future use wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 35 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Communications Status Words The COMMREQ Status word CRS word and the first word of the two Detailed Channel Status words DCS words report status and errors in the same format as shown below The second word of the DCS words indicates when the channel is active The CRS word location is specified in Words 3 and 4 of the Command Block The DCS words location is specified in the Retrieve Detailed Channel Status Command The contents of these status words are defined below The initial value of the Detailed Channel Status words is all zeros DCS words are reset to zero when The Ethernet Interface is powered up or restarted The CPU transitions from STOP to RUN A channel abort COMMREQ aborts the channel Format of the C
17. Status bit for each of the Ethernet Interfaces performing EGD The Exchange Status word is invalid if the bit is 0 Refer to the topic Status Bits in the chapter Programming Communications Requests for more information wwweadiamily com Ebfailecadservd hetmail com 5 23 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Exchange Status Word Error Codes The following table shows the error codes that can be written to the Exchange Status word Value Produced inti Dec Consumed Error Description No new status Produced Initial value until the first producer period refresh occurs 0 PIC event has Consumed The data has not been refreshed since the previous occurred consumption scan and the consumer timeout has not expired No error 1 P currently exists The exchange is producing data 1 c No error data The data has been refreshed on schedule since the previous consumed consumption SNTP error The Ethernet Interface in the producer is configured for network time 3 C synchronization but is not synchronized to an SNTP server The data has been refreshed on schedule Specification Produced During exchange configuration an invalid configuration error parameter was received by the Ethernet Interface or an error occurred in 4 PIC communication with the PLC CPU Consumed Same as Produced or the size of a received packet for th
18. The Firmware Update Utility will always fail unless the Ethernet Interface s Software Loader port is configured for 8 data bits 7 From the Firmware Update Utility main menu press the F1 function key to attach to the Ethernet Interface The message lt lt Sending ATTACH try 1 gt gt will appear If all is well this message will blink off briefly and then reappear If the attach fails check the serial connection and the Ethernet Interface Software Loader port configuration and then carefully repeat steps 1 through 7 wwwigadiamily com EMaleeadseral hoatmail com C5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 8 When the gt gt BOOT MODE ACTIVE lt lt message appears you can press the F2 function key to change the baud rate on both ends of the connection Press the Tab key once to change from 19 200 to 38 400 baud Select a lower baud rate by holding the Shift key down while pressing Tab Press the Enter key to accept the new setting 9 Another gt gt BOOT MODE ACTIVE lt lt message will appear Press the F1 function key to update the firmware This message will appear THIS WILL ERASE ALL FIRMWARE ONCE STARTED YOU CANNOT ABORT ARE YOU SURE Y N WARNING Pressing the y or Y key at this point will commit you to completing the firmware load The Interface will not function again until the load completes successfully Press the y key to proceed The firm
19. There are only a few simple tasks required to get your Ethernet communications system working These tasks are addressed in detail later in this manual 1 Install the Ethernet Interface into the Series 90 rack or baseplate and connect it to the network 2 Power up the PLC 3 Configure the Ethernet Interface using the PLC programming software and store to the PLC 4 To add optional SRTP client capability refer to Chapter 3 Programming SRTP Channel Commands To add optional Modbus TCP client capability Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface IC693CMM321 FH or later only refer to Chapter 4 Programming Modbus TCP Channel Commands To configure or program Ethernet Global Data refer to Chapter 6 Ethernet Global Data wwwgadiamily com EMaikeadsemei hotmail com 1 7 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete wwweadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Chapter Installation Z This chapter contains installation instructions for each Series 90 module that includes an Ethernet Interface Section 1 IC693CMM321 Series 90 30 TCP IP Ethernet Interface 10Base T type Section 2 I1C693CPU364 Series 90 30 CPU with Embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface Section 3 IC693CPU374 Series 90 30 CPU with Embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface Section 4 IC697CMM
20. Valid values for Word 10 are listed on page 4 14 Word 11 Local PLC Memory Address Word 11 determines the starting address in the local PLC in which the data from the remote device is to be stored The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 10 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified Valid ranges of values depend on the PLC s memory ranges The user is responsible for assuring that this area is large enough to contain the requested data without overwriting other application data Word 12 Reserved Word 12 is reserved and must be set to zero Word 13 Data Size Word 13 is the data sizeand must be set to 1 Word 14 Unit Identifier Default is 1 This field is typically used by Ethernet to Serial bridges to specify the address of a Modbus Slave on a multidrop link The Modbus TCP Unit Identifier is a special control code used in a Modbus TCP message block This value is 1 for most Modbus TCP messages wwweasiamily com Elhaileagsenvehh MORNE Manne Commands 4 15 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Write Data to a Modbus TCP Device 3004 The Write Data to a Modbus TCP Device COMMREQ requests a data transfer from the PLC to a Modbus TCP server The Write Data COMMREQ must reference an active Modbus TCP channel previously established with the Open Modbus TCP Client
21. Word 19 Word 20 Word 21 Word 22 Word 23 Word 24 27 Word 28 31 Dec Hex 00017 0011 00000 0000 00008 0008 00009 0009 00000 0000 00000 0000 02003 07D3 00005 0005 00010 000A 00003 0003 00007 0007 00050 0032 00008 0008 00100 0064 00008 0008 00050 0032 00008 0008 00001 0001 00004 0004 00010 000A 00000 0000 00000 0000 00001 0001 Length of Channel command Data Block 17 25 words Always 0 no wait mode request Memory type of CRS word R CRS word address minus 1 R10 Reserved Reserved Establish Read Channel command number Channel number 5 Number of read repetitions read 10 times Time unit for read period 8 seconds Number of time units for read period every 7 seconds Timeout for each read 500 ms Local PLC Memory type at which to store data R Local PLC Starting address at which to store data R100 Remote PLC Memory type from which to read data R Remote PLC Starting address from which to read data R50 Remote PLC Number of memory units 8 registers Remote PLC Network Address type IP Address Remote PLC Network Address length in words 4 Remote PLC Register 1 of IP address 10 Remote PLC Register 2 of IP address 0 Remote PLC Register 3 of IP address 0 Remote PLC Register 4 of IP address 1 Remote PLC Program Name needed for access to remote P or L zero terminated and padded Remote PL
22. Words 13 14 specify the location in the local PLC where the Ethernet Interface will store data received from the remote PLC Valid values for Word 13 are listed below The amount of data to be transferred is specified by the number of memory units of the data read from the remote PLC Word 17 Value Type Decimal Description L 0 Program Block Local register memory word mode JoP 4 Program register memory word mode TR 8 Register memory word mode AI 10 Analog input memory word mode AQ 12 Analog output memory word mode l 16 Discrete input memory byte mode 70 Discrete input memory bit mode PQ 18 Discrete output memory byte mode 72 Discrete output memory bit mode T 20 Discrete temporary memory byte mode 74 Discrete temporary memory bit mode M 22 Discrete momentary internal memory byte mode 76 Discrete momentary internal memory bit mode PSA 24 Discrete system memory group A byte mode 78 Discrete system memory group A bit mode SB 26 Discrete system memory group B byte mode 80 Discrete system memory group B bit mode PSC 28 Discrete system memory group C byte mode 82 Discrete system memory group C bit mode S 30 Discrete system memory byte mode 84 Discrete system memory bit mode G 56 Discrete global data table byte mode 86 Discrete global data table bit mode Read only memory cannot be written to Can only be accessed in the R
23. button and select the matching serial port settings Then click OK to activate the new settings To prepare the Ethernet Interface to receive a firmware load follow the steps below With your Ethernet Interface installed in a PLC powered on and functioning press the restart button near the top of your Ethernet Interface and hold it down for five seconds When the button is first pressed all green LED indicators will go out After five seconds the bottom LED will go on indicating that your Interface will enter the load state when the button is released Release the button All LEDs will flash briefly and then begin to blink simultaneously At this point your Interface is ready to accept a firmware load Note If you hold the restart button down too long the Ethernet Interface will enter maintenance www cadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete mode rather than firmware load mode To return to operational mode press and hold the restart button briefly less than 5 seconds Then re execute the instructions in this step If all LEDs are not blinking after this step but your Interface seems to operate normally when first powered on there may be a hardware failure of the loader port Use the PLC programming software to check the PLC fault table for a Module hardware fault message from the rack and slo
24. update process If your previous attempt progressed beyond the FLASH memory erase step began loading data blocks and then displayed an error message or stalled try a lower baud rate If you were using an MS DOS box under Microsoft Windows exit from Windows and run the Firmware Update Utility directly from MS DOS wwwigadiamily com EMaleeadseral hoatmail com C3 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Updating Firmware Under DOS and Windows 3 xx You will need an IBM PC AT compatible PC running MS DOS Revision 3 3 or later Windows 3 11 or Windows NT 3 51 equipped with at least 640K free RAM a 3 5 inch high density diskette drive and an RS 232 serial port The firmware update process is faster when 1 MB of hard drive space is also available You may be able to run the Firmware Update Utility in an MS DOS box under Microsoft Windows if your PC has all of the following A 486 or higher microprocessor A high speed serial port L6550AF or equivalent UART and Microsoft Windows 3 11 including Windows for Workgroups 3 11 Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT If you are not sure your PC has all of these you will probably save time by exiting from Windows and running the Firmware Update Utility directly from MS DOS The upgrade will be faster and more reliable Under Windows run the loader in full screen mode for best performance To install the new firmware perform the f
25. 00050 00008 00000 00000 0000 00003 0003 00032 0020 19536 4C50 24387 5F43 24881 6131 00097 0061 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 Length of Send Information Report Data Block 45 words Always 0 no wait mode request Memory type of CRS word R CRS word address minus 1 R10 Reserved Reserved Send Information Report Channel command number Channel number 7 Number of repetitions send 10 times Time units for send period 8 seconds Minimum interval between host accesses every 7 seconds Timeout on each individual transfer response 500 ms Local PLC Memory type from which to send data R Local PLC Starting address from which to send data R50 Local PLC Number of memory units 8 registers Reserved Reserved Remote Host Network Address type 3 Symbolic Name Remote Host Network Address length in words 32 Remote Host Network Address name char 1 2 PL Remote Host Network Address name char 3 4 C_ Remote Host Network Address name char 5 6 1 Remote Host Network Address name char 7 8 a Remote Host Network Address name char 9 10 Remote Host Network Address name char 11 12 Remote Host Network Address name char 13 14 Remote Host Network Address name char 15 16 Remote Host Network Address name char 17 18 a Remote Host
26. 128 3 172 17 192 3 i H 172 17 128 1 172 17 128 2 472 147 192 1 172 17 192 2 Sub Network 2 2 Sub Network 2 3 A PLC on Network1 Subnet 2 2 and Subnet 2 3 can talk to a PLC on one of the other networks without configuring multiple gateways because there is only one gateway on these networks Gateway G1 would be configured as the default gateway for PLC A s Ethernet Interface Gateway G2 for PLC D s and E s Ethernet Interface and Gateway G3 for PLC F s and H s Ethernet Interface The default gateway is configured in the Ethernet Interface s module configuration For Local Subnet 2 1 however there are three gateways to choose from The Ethernet Interfaces in PLC B and C must decide where to send data in order for it to arrive at its destination If you have not configured these Ethernet Interfaces for multiple gateways and the data destination is not on Local Subnet 2 1 then the only gateway option for each Ethernet Interface is the one you configured as the default gateway in module configuration wwweadiamily com Ebfailcadsenred hoknaibegpr 6 7 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete However if you configure a routing table for PLCs B and C their data may be forwarded to other gateways If Gateway G1 has been configured as the default gateway the routing table could have an entry for Subnet 2 2 via Gateway G2 and Subnet 2 3 via Gateway
27. 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 is the command id for an Open Modbus TCP Client Connection COMMREQ If successful a TCP connection with the specified device is allocated wwwgadiamily com EbMaieadserved holmailQmmnnel Commands Word 8 Channel Number Word 8 specifies the channel number to allocate for the Modbus TCP Client connection Channels 1 16 can be used for Client communications Word 9 Address Type Word 9 specifies the type of IP Address specified for the remote device A value of one 1 is required in this word Word 10 Length of IP Address Word 10 specifies the length of the IP Address A value of four 4 is required in this word Word 11 IP Address 1s Octet Word 10 specifies the value of the first octet of the IP Address Word 12 IP Address 2 Octet Word 11 specifies the value of the second octet of the IP Address Word 13 IP Address 3rd Octet Word 12 specifies the value of the third octet of the IP Address Word 14 IP Address 4th Octet Word 13 specifies the value of the fourth octet of the IP Address 4 9 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Close a Modbus TCP Client Connection 3001 The application programcloses a Modbus TCP Client Connection by issuing the Close Modbus TCP Client Connection COMMREQ The Close COMMREQ closes the underlying TCP connection and frees the channel for other communication tasks An error response is returned if
28. Address name char 15 16 Remote PLC Network Address name char 17 18 Remote PLC Network Address name char 19 20 Remote PLC Network Address name char 21 22 Remote PLC Network Address name char 23 23 Remote PLC Network Address name char 24 25 Remote PLC Network Address name char 26 27 Remote PLC Network Address name char 28 29 Remote PLC Network Address name char 30 31 Reserved set to zero Remote PLC Program Name needed for access to remote P or L zero terminated and padded Remote PLC Program Block needed for access to remote L zero terminated and padded Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address wwwgadiamily com EbMaiheadsenvel aatmatsamthas 3 15 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Words 7 17 See the descriptions in Example 1 Word 18 Remote PLC Network Address Type Word 18 specifies the format of the remote PLC address Currently Word 18 must contain the value 1 or 3 A value of 1 indicates a dotted decimal IP address expressed using a separate register for each decimal digit A value of 3 indicates a Network Address name See Example 1 for information on using address type 1 Word 19 Remote PLC Network Address Length Word 19 specifies the length in words of the remote PLC Network Address name With an address type of 3 sp
29. Block The Channel Command Status Data COMMREQ Status word LAN Interface Statusand Channel Status bits The logic program controlling execution of the COMMREQ Function Block The figure below illustrates the relationship of these elements CONTROL COMMREQ a44916c LOGIC FUNCTION BLOCK INITIATES COMMREQ FUNCTION INPUTS BLOCK COMMREQ OUTPUTS COMMAND BLOCK FOR COMMREQ COMMREQ FUNCTION STATUS WORD COMMREQ STATUS COMMAND 7 WORD a a ODES BLOCK ADDRESS ADDRESS DETAILS STATUS BITS OF THE LAN INTERFACE STATUS CHANNEL COMMAND AND ala STATUS Location in PLC memory specified when configuring the Interface using Configuration Software COMMREQ Function Block The COMMREQ Function Block is the ladder instruction that triggers the execution of the Channel command In the COMMREQ Function Block you specify the rack and slot location of the Ethernet Interface a task value and the address of a location in memory that contains the Command Block There is also a fault output on the COMMREQ Function Block that indicates certain programming errors www cadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete COMMREQ Command Block The COMMREQ Command Block is a structure that contains information about the Channel command to be executed The Co
30. Clear faults and Restart Interface maximum of 2 minutes MODULE OK Slowblink D Interface s IP address has not Use PLC Programmer configuration O LAN ONL ON Traffic OFF ne ener i been aoe sic a configured as 0 0 0 0 z x paea ENIS Waiting for IP i Use a BOOTP server to provide SLAT ES S SWOI Address Interface with a non zero IP MODULE OK and STATUS blink in Address unison MODULE OK Slowblink E Restart pushbutton until Ifyou did not intend to enter O LAN ONL ON Traffic OFF bottom two LEDs turn ON Maintenance press the Restart Station Manager MAINT pushbutton for less than 5 seconds SERIAL ACT Slowblink o STATUS n aiii mig Maintenance command issued This clears the Maintenance request Internal System Error when Examine PLC Fault Table for MODULE OK and SERIAL ACTIVE Interface was Operational clues blink in unison caused a restart and Ifyou need to use the Station entrance into Maintenance Manager to troubleshoot a problem see GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual MODULE OK ON F If the LAN ONLINE LED is E O LAN ONL ON Traffic OFF OFF the problem may be Connect cable and transceiver O SERIAL ACTIVE OFF Operational Network cable not properly Replace transceiver O STATUS ON OFF connected or transceiver not connected to Interface or bad transceiver Network cable not terminated properly S
31. Connection COMMREQ Registers or Coils may be written to the remote Modbus TCP device The Modbus Function Code specifies the data type Valid Function Codes for the Write Data COMMREQ are presented in the following table Function Description Base Data Unit Size Maximum Data Code Address Units Preset Multiple Registers 40001 100 An Address Offset and Length specify the location in the Modbus TCP device and the number of data units to transfer The Address Offset is the offset from the Base Address The Length is the number of Registers or Coils to transfer A PLC data area is the source for the data written to the Modbus TCP device The source of data can be any of the PLC data areas see page 4 14 Function Code 5 Force Single Coil is the only coil operation supported by the Modbus TCP Client This function forces a Coil On or Off To force a coil off the value zero 0 is used as the COMMREQ data value To force a coil on the value one 1 is used as the COMMREQ data value The COMMREQ Status Word CSR indicates the success or failure of the Write Data COMMREQ If the COMMREQ specifies an invalid channel number or any other invalid field the COMMREQ fails and the CSR is set to a non zero value to identify the failure See the section Status Data later in this document for detailed CSR failure codes www gadfamily com Eltancadseve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study o
32. Description Decimal Hex JR 8 08H Register memory word mode AI 10 OAH Analog input memory word mode PAQ 12 OCH Analog output memory word mode l 16 10H Discrete input memory byte mode 70 46H Discrete input memory bit mode PQ 18 12H Discrete output memory byte mode 72 48H Discrete output memory bit mode T 20 14H Discrete temporary memory byte mode 74 4AH Discrete temporary memory bit mode M 22 16H Discrete momentary internal memory byte mode 76 4CH Discrete momentary internal memory bit mode G 56 38H Discrete global data table byte mode 86 56H Discrete global data table bit mode Word 4 COMMREQ Status Word Address Offset This word contains the offset within the memory type selected The status word address offset is a zero based number For example if you want R1 as the location of the CRS word you must specify a zero for the offset The offset for R100 would be 99 decimal Note however that this is the only zero based field in the Channel commands Word 5 Reserved Set to zero Word 6 Reserved Set to zero Words 7 and up Data Block The Data Block defines the Channel command to be performed For information on how to fill in the Channel command information see the next section wwweasiamily com Elhaileagsenvehh MORNE Manne Commands 4 7 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Modbus TCP Channel Commands This section describes the op
33. Ethernet Ports There are three Ethernet ports on the Ethernet Interface Only one Ethernet port may be used at a time The Ethernet Interface automatically detects the Ethernet port in use special configuration is not required See also the topic Disable Onboard 10Base2 Port Jumper below Do not connect or disconnect a transceiver or network cable to the AUI or BNC ports while power is applied to the PLC This may blow the port fuse and or cause permanent damage to the Ethernet Interface 10BaseT Port This 8 pin RJ 45 port provides a direct connection to a 10Base T twisted pair Ethernet network without an external transceiver AUI Port This 15 pin D type AUI port with slide lock provides the electrical and mechanical interface to the user provided IEEE 802 3 transceiver cable which connects the AUI Port to an external Ethernet compatible transceiver see Appendix B Communications Ports Characteristics for the characteristics of the AUI port The external transceiver is directly connected to the Ethernet cable 10Base2 BNC Port This BNC port provides a direct connection to a 10Base2 thin wire Ethernet network without an external transceiver CMM742 Labels Default Station Address Label The Default Station Address label lists the MAC address to be used by this Interface Disable Onboard 10Base2 Port Jumper This jumper JP7 must be in place to ensure proper network operation only when using an exter
34. IN7 Rung 7 When OPEN_SUCCESS is set it triggers READ_REQ which enables execution of the BLKMOV MOVE and COMMREQ functions for the Modbus TCP Read Commreq READ_REQ is a one shot Positive Transition coil activating once when OPEN_SUCCESS transitions from OFF to ON Rung 8 The MOVE WORD function moves a zero to the CRS word referenced in the Command Block see rung 9 This clears the CRS word This rung also resets the READ_FLT output coil of the COMMREQ Function Block in rung 10 Rung 9 The BLKMV INT functions set up the COMMREQ Command Block contents When this rung is activated the constant operands are moved into the memory beginning at the address indicated in the instruction The constant operands in this example are defined in the Modbus TCP Read Example in this chapter wwweasiamily com Elhaileagsenvehh MORNE Manne Commands 4 29 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 10 11 12 13 ETH_READY READ_REQ COMM REQ READ_FLT s 1 R00301 6RO0301 as ETH_READY READ_SUCCESS s 1 RO0011 R00011 ETH_READY READ_SUCCESS CLOSE_REQ 1 1 H 1 1 ETH_READY i CLOSE_REQ MOVE WORD CLOSE_FLT 1 H 1 R 1 o IN Qa R00012 R00012 Rung 10 The COMMREQ Function Block has three input parameters and one output parameter The IN field points to the starting location of the Command Block pa
35. IP network administrators are familiar with these parameters It is important that these parameters are correct otherwise the Ethernet Interface may be unable to communicate on the network and or network operation may be corrupted It is especially important that each node on the network is assigned a unique IP address However if you have no network administrator and are using a simple isolated network with no gateways you can use the following range of values for the assignment of local IP addresses 10 0 0 1 First PLC 10 0 0 2 Second PLC 10 0 0 3 Third PLC 10 0 0 255 PLC Programmer TCP or host Also in this case set the subnet mask gateway IP address and name server IP address to 0 0 0 0 Note If the isolated network is ever connected to another network the IP addresses 10 0 0 1 through 10 0 0 255 must not be used and the subnet mask gateway IP address and name server address must be assigned by the network administrator The IP addresses must be assigned so that they are compatible with the connected network Refer to Chapter 6 Network Administration Support for more information on addressing See also Determining If an IP Address Has Already Been Used Status Address The Status Reference Type is the location of the LAN Interface Status LIS bits 16 bits and the Channel Status bits 64 bits The Channel Status bits are always located immediately following the LAN Interface Status bits The Status address can
36. If a problem is detected during power up the Ethernet Interface may not transition directly to the Operational state If the Interface does not transition to Operational check the LED pattern on the Interface and refer to the following chart and table for corrective action wwwgadiamily com EMaieadsened hotmail com 2 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete States of the Series 90 70 CMM742 TCP IP Ethernet Interface 1 The Ethernet Interface is initialized by Powering up the PLC O Ethernet Interface Storing a new configuration to the PLC with changes for the Ethernet Interface QO Initializing 1 Pressing the Restart pushbutton Issuing a Station ManagerRESTART LOAD or MAINT command Q approx 10 20 seconds Internal System Error occurring when Interface is Operational A Hardware Failure Diagnostics Pass O000 Load Request or Software Corrupted Software Load 2 Software Load Caused by Restart pushbutton pushed until bottom LED turns ON Station ManagerL OAD command issued Detection of corrupt software Yes2 3 Waiting for IP Address Caused by Not configuring Interface using configuration software Configuring Interface with IP address 0 0 0 0 C New CPU with no configuration Waiting for CPU failure to communicate with Interface Configuration from 4 Continue to Maintenance or Operational Caused by PLC CP
37. Installing the Fuse 1 Be sure the Series 90 30 PLC baseplate power is OFF 2 Remove the CPU364 module from the baseplate Ww Remove the front shroud The CPU364 is a two board module the fuse is located between the AAUI port and the 10Base T port See Figure 3 1 Remove the blown fuse using a pair of small bent nose pliers Insert the new fuse Make sure the fuse is seated properly Replace the front shroud and re insert the CPU364 module a DY i Restore power to the baseplate www gadfamily com Eltacadsev2h hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Installing the CPU364 in the PLC For general information about module and system installation refer to GFK 0356 Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual Equipment Required to Perform the Installation Procedures Make sure you have the items listed below before you begin A Series 90 30 PLC CPU baseplate with power supply The Series 90 30 CPU364 requires PLC power supply IC693PWR321 Revision K or later I C693PWR322 or IC693PWR330 PLC programming software Logic Developer all versions Control Version 2 01 or higher VersaPro version 1 0 or higher or Logicmaster 90 30 version 6 01 or higher And a compatible PC compatible personal computer Ethernet cables and if using the AAUI port an Ethernet compatible AAUI transceiver See Appendix B
38. The 10Base T 100Base Tx twisted pair cables must meet the applicable IEEE 802 standards This section provides the information you need to specify the 10Base T 100Base Tx twisted pair cables including port pinouts and cable diagrams www cadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 10Base T 100Base Tx Port Pinouts The 10Base T 100Base Tx port is located on the front of the Ethernet Interface This port is an 8 pin RJ 45 modular phone jack connector It is used to connect the Ethernet Interface to a hub repeater switch or other Ethernet device PT Transmit Data O 9 ie en PT RD Receive Datas po aT NC Noconnection po 5 NC Noconnection Pp RD Receive Data e po NC Noconnection Note Pinouts are provided for troubleshooting purposes only 10Base T 100BaseTx cables are readily available from commercial distributors GE Fanuc recommends purchasing rather than making 10Base T 100Base Tx cables wwweasiamily com EMaileassermed MbatMabRoMeristics B 9 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Connection to a 10Base T 100Base Tx Network Connection of the Ethernet Interface to a 10Base T network is shown below Hub Switch Repeater ot So 3 5 So fal 10 100 Ethernet Interface 10BaseT 100Base Tx Twisted Pair
39. The AUP file is a text file created by any convenient text editor The file name must be AUP_0_1 APF The first line of the file must consist only of the text AUP_0_1 Subsequent lines in the file many contain assignments for Advanced User Parameter values using the syntax lt parameter name gt value There should be no space between the parameter name and the equal or between the equal and the value Parameter names are the same as described in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual in the description of the PARM command Parameter values are converted to lowercase unless enclosed in a pair of double quotes the parameter value data depends on the parameter Numeric parameters are entered in decimal or hexadecimal format hexadecimal values must be terminated with an h or H character IP address parameters must be entered in standard dotted decimal format Character string values are case sensitive as with Station Manager commands uppercase parameter values must be enclosed within a pair of double quotes The semicolon character delimits comments all characters in the line following a semicolon are ignored An entire line may be ignored by inserting a semicolon as the first character in the line A blank line is also ignored Caution The IEEE 802 3 standard strongly discourages the manal configuration of duplex mode for a port as would be possible using Advanced User Parameters Be
40. The SNTP error condition is considered the least important of all possible error codes Therefore if another error condition exists its status code will appear in the Status word instead of the SNTP error code Upon loss or absence of synchronization the Ethernet Interface s built in clock will operate as follows Ifthe Ethernet Interface after its last power up restart cycle has never received an SNTP server s timing message it will continue to use the PLC CPU s local clock value that it received at power up restart for its time base Ifthe Ethernet Interface has at some point been synchronized to an SNTP server but lost its signal it will use the most recently received SNTP time message as its time base The Ethernet Interface will continue supplying time values to the PLC CPU for timestamping while it listens for SNTP timing messages from the network If SNTP messages are received later the Ethernet Interface will then synchronize to them www gadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Chapter Network Administration Support 6 This chapter discusses information related to how host computers are identified on the network and how data is routed to a host computer The main topics covered are e IP Addressing e Gateways e Subnets and Multiple Gateways e Configuring Multiple Gateways
41. Twice the time required for a bit to travel between the two most distant nodes in a bus network NOTE In a network using carrier sense each frame must be long enough so that a collision or jam signal may be detected by the transmitting node while this frame is being transmitted Its minimum length is therefore determined by the round trip propagation time Router A device similar to a bridge that allows access to multiple LANs Also known as a gateway in Internet terminology A router connects network nodes at the Network Layer ISO layer 3 See also Gateway Server A network node that provides specific services to other network nodes clients See also Client EXAMPLE File server print server name server time server Service Request Transfer Protocol SRTP A proprietary protocol that encodes Series 90 Service Requests the native language of the Series 90 PLC CPUs to provide general purpose communications with a Series 90 PLC SRTP is presently available over 802 3 Ethernet networks SRTP is also used by the PLC programming software to communicate over an Ethernet network Signal Quality Error SQE An indication from the MAU transceiver to the Ethernet Interface to indicate any of three conditions 1 improper signals received from the medium 2 collision detected or 3 SQE message test Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP The Internet standard protocol used to synchronize the real time clocks of hosts over the netwo
42. a Station Manager RESTART command seconds Internal System Error occurring when Interface is operational o A Diagnostics o Hardware Pass Q Failure 2 Software Load caused by 7 Pressing the Restart pushbutton z Detection of corrupt software Load B Request or Xx Software X Software 3 Waiting for IP Address caused by Corrupted X Load m Not configuring Interface using configuration software Configuring Interface with IP Address 0 0 0 0 New CPU with no configuration 7 CPU failure to communication with Interface 4 Continue to Operational State caused by x wens for Configuration from Q PLC CPU max 2 seconds IP Address received over network Symbols The LEDs are labeled from top to bottom as follows EOK LAN D STAT O Waiting for xk IP Address IP address 0 0 0 0 The symbols use for the LEDS i the chart are OFF ON IP Address Received Slow Blink multiple slow blinking LEDS blink in unison Fast Blink Traffic blinks when there is traffic on the line E O Operational 0 The process symbols use in this chart are Temporary condition requires no intervention Decision point during powerup Operational as Interface State normally the Interface remains in a m Full support for client and server capanility state unless there is user intervention m Uses user defined Advanced Parameters wwwgadfamily com E
43. adapter name to each Ethernet Interface in the PLC that will be producing or consuming Ethernet Global Data If you are using Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP set the Network Time Sync parameter to SNTP 4 If you are using Aliases to identify the consumer assign them now Choose Rack Operations and select Name Resolution and Routing Table or click the right mouse button and choose Name Resolution and Routing from the pop up menu Click the Alias tab and assign Aliases 5 Choose Rack Operations and select Ethernet Global Data or click the right mouse button and choose Ethernet Global Data from the pop up menu 6 Inthe Ethernet Global Data dialog box configure the Producer ID in the Local Producer ID field and the produced and consumed exchanges for the PLC Use the information you have collected to fill in the parameters 7 Connect and store the new configuration to the PLC 8 Put the PLC in Run mode with I O enabled Note If you have configured a name server for an Ethernet Interface and the server is not online you may get periodic PLC Fault Table entries after storing the EGD configuration to the PLC www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Example 1 EGD Configuration Using IP Addresses to Identify Consumers There are two PLCs in this simple EGD system PLC1 is the producer and PLC2 is
44. an external IEEE 802 3 compatible transceiver which is attached to the Ethernet network SQE must be enabled on the transceiver Note The transceiver cable may be built in to the transceiver or removable Caution Do not connect or disconnect a transceiver cable to the AAUI port while power is applied to the PLC This may blow the AAUI port fuse and or cause permanent damage to the Ethernet Interface Restore power to the baseplate Use the PLC programming software or a Hand Held Programmer to make sure the PLC CPU is in Stop mode wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 21 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete CPU364 Configuration Before you can use the Ethernet Interface with the Series 90 30 PLC you must configure the Interface using the PLC programming software The PLC programming software allows you to specify the modules and I O that will reside in your Series 90 30 PLC rack s The Hand Held Programmer can not be used to configure the Ethernet Interface For the Ethernet Interface specifically the configuration software allows you to Define the Status address of the Ethernet Interface Assign the IP address for the Ethernet Interface and optionally the subnet mask the gateway address and the name server address Configure the serial ports optional Configuring the Interface Using Windows Based Programming Software To configure the Ethernet Interface using L
45. be assigned to l PQ WR WAI or WAQ memory The default value is the next available I address Note Do not use the 80 bits assigned to the LIS bits and Channel Status bits for other purposes or your data will be overwritten wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 49 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Status Length This is the sum of the LIS bits and the Channel Status bits This value is automatically set to either 80 bits for I and Q Status address locations or 5 words for R AI and AQ Status address locations Network Routing Pair 1 2 3 These parameters are used to define an IP routing partnership with another network adapter within the same PLC system Network routing pairs is an advanced feature that should be set only by individuals who have detailed knowledge of PLC communications Network Time Sync Selection of the method used to synchronize the real time clocks over the network Currently the choices are None for no network time synchronization and SNTP for synchronization to remote SNTP servers on the network Serial Port Parameters Data Rate bps Data rate bits per second for the port Choices are 300 600 1200 2400 4800 96004 or 19200 Parity Type of parity to be used for the port Choices are None Even or Odd Stop Bits Enter the number of stop bits Choices are 1 or 2 Flow Control This parameter is currently not used b
46. command See GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual The MAC address is a 48 bit binary number that identifies the station on the physical network The MAC address is typically expressed as a 12 digit hexadecimal number A typical MAC address is represented as follows Byte 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hex 0 8 0 0 1 9 0 1 5 3 1 2 Binary 0000 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0001 0101 0011 0001 0010 Another characteristic that is important especially for multi vendor networks is the order of address bit transmission on the physical medium MAC addresses are transmitted in ascending byte order with the least significant bit of each byte transmitted first The example above is shown including bit transmission order as follows Byte 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hex 0 8 0 0 1 9 0 1 5 3 1 2 Binary 0000 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0001 0101 0011 0001 0010 Bit Order 8765 4321 ere MSB of the MAC LSB of the MAC address first bit transmitted address last bit transmitted If you assign your own MAC addresses there are 2 bits of the 48 bit address that you must set according to the instructions that follow Bit 1 in Byte 1 must always be a 0 to indicate an individual station rather than a Group address Bit 2 in Byte must be a 1 to indicate that the address is locally administered In the typical default MAC address shown above bit 2 in Byte 1 is a 0 indicating that it is a globally administered address Al
47. could not be registered because the service request handler was not specified 4211H No dual port memory was allocated for the connection or block transfer area needed to process the request 4311H Failure to register with backplane driver because the requested task is already registered 4411H Request failed because an invalid field was identified in the request mailbox qualifier EC11H Unable to send request to the PLC because the internal message queue is not initialized FE11H Request failed due to mailbox error on remote device The remote device log will have more information Error codes specific to Series 90 30 CPU374 2911H The backplane driver is not initialized 2A11H The backplane driver could not access the PLC 2F11H Request failed due to an invalid parameter detected in the remote device The remote device log will have more information 3011H The specified task is not registered www gadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnaiC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Minor Error Codes for Major Error Code 11H at Remote Server PLC Continued 3111H Failure to register with backplane driver because the requested task is already registered Minor Error Codes for Major Error Code 90H at Client PLC Error Status Application Interface Erro
48. e Network Address Naming Architecture e MAC Addressing GFK 1541B www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete IP Addressing Each TCP IP node on a network must have a unique JP address The TCP IP Ethernet Interface is such a node as is a PC running TCP IP There may be other nodes on the network that are not involved with communications to the PLCs but no matter what their function each TCP IP node must have its own JP address It is the IP address that identifies each node on the IP network or system of connected networks The term host is often used to identify a node on a network IP Address Format for Network Classes A B C The IP address is 32 bits long and has a netid part and a hostid part Each network is a Class A Class B or Class C network The class of a network determines how an JP address is formatted and is based on the number of bits in the netid part of the IP address 01 8 16 24 31 Class A 0 netid hostid 01 8 16 24 31 Class B 1 ol netid hostid 012 8 16 24 31 Class C l 1o netid hostid In general the netid part is assigned by the Internet authorities and the hostid part is assigned by your local network administrator The class of network determines the number of hosts that can be supported A Class A network can support 2 2 16 777 214 hosts Class B 2 6 2 65 534 hosts and Class C
49. for communication with the remote Modbus TCP server Word 9 Modbus Function Code Word 9 specifies Modbus Function Code 4 Read Input Registers www gadfamily com Eltacadseve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B Word 10 Local PLC Memory Type Words 10 11 specify the location in the local PLC where the Ethernet Interface will store data received from the remote device Valid values for Word 10 are listed below Value Type Decimal Description PR 8 Register memory word mode AI 10 Analog input memory word mode AQ 12 Analog output memory word mode l 16 Discrete input memory byte mode 70 Discrete input memory bit mode PQ 18 Discrete output memory byte mode 72 Discrete output memory bit mode T 20 Discrete temporary memory byte mode 74 Discrete temporary memory bit mode PM 22 Discrete momentary internal memory byte mode 76 Discrete momentary internal memory bit mode PSA 24 Discrete system memory group A byte mode 78 Discrete system memory group A bit mode SB 26 Discrete system memory group B byte mode 80 Discrete system memory group B bit mode PSC 28 Discrete system memory group C byte mode 82 Discrete system memory group C bit mode S 30 Discrete system memory byte mode 84 Discrete system memory bit mode G 56 Discrete global data table
50. for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual EOK ON O LAN ON Traffic OFF O STAT ON OFF F Operational If the LAN LED is OFF the problem may be Network cable not connected or transceiver not connected to Interface or bad transceiver Network cable not terminated properly SQE not enabled on transceiver If the STAT LED is OFF an exception condition has occurred Connect cable and transceiver properly Replace transceiver Terminate network cable properly Set SQE ON on transceiver in accord with manufacturer s instructions Examine PLC Fault Table to find out why the STAT LED is OFF www gadfamily com Eltacadsev2h hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B Pinging TCP IP Ethernet Interfaces on the Network PING Packet InterNet Grouper is the name of a program used on TCP IP networks to test reachability of destinations by sending them an ICMP echo request message and waiting for a reply Most nodes on TCP IP networks including the Series 90 30 CPU364 implement a PING command You should ping each installed Ethernet Interface When the Ethernet Interface responds to the ping it verifies that the interface is operational and configured properly Specifically it verifies that acceptable TCP IP configuration information has been stored to the Interface Pinging t
51. if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Minor Error Codes The meaning of each Minor Error Code depends upon the Major Error Code for which it is defined Consult the appropriate Minor Error Code table for the indicated Major Error Code Minor Error Codes for Major Error Codes 05H at Remote Server PLC and 85H at Client PLC Error Status Service Request Error Description Hexadecimal C105H C185H_ Invalid block state transition C305H C385H_ Text length does not match traffic type C605H C685H_ Control Program CP tasks exist but requestor not logged into main CP C705H C785H_ Passwords are set to inactive and cannot be enabled or disabled C805H C885H_ Password s already enabled and cannot be forced inactive C905H C985H Login using non zero buffer size required for block commands CAOS5H CA85H Device is write protected CBO5H CB85H A comm or write verify error occurred during save or restore CCOS5H CC85H Data stored on device has been corrupted and is no longer reliable CD05H CD85H Attempt was made to read a device but no data has been stored on it CE05H CE85H Specified device has insufficient memory to handle request CFO5H CF85H Specified device is not available in the system not present D105H D185H Packet size or total program size does not match input D205H D285H Invalid write mode parameter D505H D585H Inv
52. is commonly called thick wire The maximum length of a cable segment is 500 meters The distance between any two stations must be a multiple of 2 5 meters A maximum of 100 stations is allowed on a 10Base5 Ethernet segment 10Base2 Coax 10Base2 is described above 10Base T 10Base T is described above 10Base F 10Base F has two variations that both use the same type of fiber optic cable 10Base FP can support up to 33 nodes at distances of up to 500 meters from a passive star 10Base FL supports up to 2000 meters between a node and a repeater a multi port repeater would thus constitute a star Additionally 10Base FB provides a means of interconnecting only repeaters by up to 2000 meters of the same fiber optic cable 10Broad36 10Broad36 uses 75 ohm coaxial cable and CATV like media components taps amplifiers headend translators etc to support hundreds of nodes at distances of up to 2800 meters Broadband cannot be connected to baseband via repeaters Broadband cable plant design and installation must be in accordance with IEEE 802 7 and requires special expertise GE Fanuc recommends you contract professional specialists for these services Consult your GE Fanuc sales representative or field service office for help in identifying local specialists wwwgadiamily com EMaikeadsemei hotmail com 1 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Special Considerations for Ethernet Interfaces
53. is down and possibly why it went down Keep in mind however that the status code may change from between the time the Channel Error bit indicates an error and the time the Retrieve Detailed Channel Status command retrieves the code The Channel Error bit for a channel is not meaningful until after the Ethernet Interface updates the CRS word confirming the Read or Write command for that channel In the case of an Establish Channel command the CRS word is updated before the Channel Error bit is set to 1 Monitoring the Data Transfer Bit Typically you will set up a channel to perform repetitive reads or writes The Data Transfer bit pulses 0 gt 1 0 each time there is a successful read or write This can be an indicator to the ladder program to move the most recent data to another location The Data Transfer bit for a channel is not meaningful until after the Ethernet Interface updates the CRS word confirming the Read or Write command for that channel Do not use data received from a server until the CRS word confirming the Read command for that channel is 1 or the Data Transfer bit goes to 1 Do not assume that when the Data Transfer bit goes to that a transfer has just completed during the last scan The Data Transfer bit is not closely synchronized in time with the transfer The bit only indicates that a transfer has occurred in a past scan A rising edge on the Data Transfer bit indicating that a transfer has completed successfu
54. is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete CSMA CD See Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection Data Communications Equipment DCE Examples Modems and transceivers Distinct from DTE Data Terminal Equipment Data Link Layer In Open Systems Interconnection architecture the layer Layer 2 that provides services to transfer data over a physical link between open systems Consists of the LLC and MAC sublayers Data Terminal Equipment Examples computers terminals printers Distinct from DCE Data Communications Equipment DCS Words See Detailed Channel Status Words Detailed Channel Status Words Two status words containing detailed information on a single Series 90 channel The DCS words are retrieved using the Retrieve Detailed Channel Status Command Directory Information Base DIB A collection of information used for directory services like name resolution In this document DIB refers to the DDP database which is actually distributed among all DDP devices instead of in a single name server See also Distributed Directory Protocol DDP Distributed Directory Protocol DDP The GE Fanuc proprietary protocol used to provide distributed name service on a TCP IP Ethernet network The distributed nature of DDP means that there is no centralized name server Domain Name System DNS The predominant name service protocol used by the Internet DNS is primarily used to resolve a name into a
55. is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Operation of the Communications Request The figure and text below explains how a Communications Request is executed The figure specifically illustrates the successful operation of an Establish Read Channel command Domain of a TCP connection Domain of a channel Domain of a remote server Client Client Series 90 70 PLC Ethernet Server PLC Server PLC CPU Backplane Interface LAN Ethernet Interface Backplane CPU Power flows to COMMREQ in ladder program Command Block sent to Interface Verify Command Block gt and set up channel to server PLC Read Request pe Read Request lt A Data A Data lt q lt A Data lt Data lt 4 Return COMMREQ Status CRS Word COMMREQ 4 to CPU Status Word lt Pulse Data Transfer bit Data Transfer 4 pulse received Read Request p gt Read Request Data 4 a 4 Data 4A Data Dat a aa lt 4 Pulse Data Transfer bit Data Transfer a pulse received eee Read Request gt A bata A Data Data Ea 4 Data lt lt Pulse Data Transfer bit Data Transfer 4 pulse received 1 A Communications Request begins when there is power flow to a COMMREQ function in the client PLC At this time the Command Block data is sent from the PLC CPU to the Ethernet Interface 2 For the Establish Read Channel command the COMMREQ Status word CRS word is returned immediately if the Command Blo
56. listed on page 4 14 The value 16 specifies Discrete Input Memory I byte mode Word 11 Local PLC Starting Address Word 11 determines the starting address in the local PLC from which the data is to be written The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 10 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified Valid ranges of values depend on the PLC s memory ranges Word 12 Remote Device Address Word 12 specifies the destination register in the remote Modbus TCP device Word 13 Number Registers in Remote Device Words 13 specifies the quantity of registers to write to the remote device Word 14 Unit Identifier Default is 1 This field is typically used by Ethernet to Serial bridges to specify the address of a Modbus Slave on a multidrop link The Modbus TCP Unit Identifier is a special control code used in a Modbus TCP message block This value is 1 for most Modbus TCP messages wwweasiamily com Elhaileagsenvehh MORNE Manne Commands 4 19 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Status Data This section describes all the status data that is available to the ladder program to determine the state of the Ethernet Interface and its Modbus TCP channels Types of Status Data There are three main types of status data available to your ladder program 1 FT Output of the COM
57. memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 15 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified for example if Word 15 16 and Word 16 9 then the starting address will be 165 Valid ranges of values depend on the remote PLC s memory ranges Word 17 Remote PLC Number of Memory Units Word 17 specifies the amount of data to be transferred The value entered is the number of memory units to be transferred where the size of a memory unit is either a bit byte or word as specified in Word 15 For example if Word 15 16 and Word 17 4 then 4 bytes 32 bits of I memory will be transferred For the Series 90 30 PLC a maximum of 8192 bits 1024 bytes or 512 words of data can be specified For the Series 90 70 PLC a maximum of 16384 bits 2048 bytes or 1024 words of data can be specified Word 18 Remote PLC Network Address Type Word 18 specifies the format of the remote PLC address Currently Word 18 must contain the value 1 or 3 A value of 1 indicates a dotted decimal IP address expressed using a separate register for each decimal digit A value of 3 indicates a Network Address name See Example 2 for information on using address type 3 Word 19 Remote PLC Network Address Length Word 19 specifies the length in words of the remote PLC IP address When an address type of 1 is specified in Word 18 Word 19 must contain 4 wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 13 The
58. more information The Ethernet and RS 232 tabs contain parameters directly related to the embedded Ethernet Interface s functionality Some fields in the Ethernet tab must be filled in The default settings for the RS 232 tabs can be used Refer to the topic Configuration Parameters that follows for information on these fields We recommend leaving the serial port parameters at default settings If you want to view the power consumption of this module click the Power Consumption tab After you have configured all of the module s applicable parameters click the OK button The module will now appear in the selected slot Store the configuration to the PLC so these settings can take effect For more information refer to Online Help in the PLC programming software wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 33 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete CPU374 Configuration Parameters Ethernet Parameters Configuration Mode This is fixed as TCP IP Adapter Name This field is set to 0 1 the rack and slot of the Ethernet Interface and cannot be changed Status Address The Status Reference Type is the location of the LAN Interface Status LIS bits 16 bits and the Channel Status bits 64 bits The Channel Status bits are always located immediately following the LAN Interface Status bits The Status address can be assigned to l PQ WR WAI or WAQ memory The default value is the ne
59. of module PLC Fault Table entry will 18 PIC also be present The error can also occur if the module in the given slot of the PLC rack does not match the module specified in the configuration configuration mismatch Ethernet Interface does 22 PIC not support The revision level of the Ethernet Interface does not support global data EGD No Response F A 26 PIC from Ethernet ne WCU ana or request This fault can only occur Interface unng 9 guration Failed to create An error occurred other than a resource error no response or loss of 28 PIC an exchange Ethernet Interface during exchange configuration A PLC Fault Table entry is provided for additional information about the fault Exchange configuration occurs when either 1 Hardware Configuration containing EGD is stored to the PLC 2 a PLC containing EGD configuration powers up or 3 an Ethernet Interface configured for EGD is restarted wwwigadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP is a method of synchronizing the internal clocks in a network s Ethernet Interfaces to an external source In an SNTP system a computer on the network called an SNTP server sends out a periodic timing message to all of the SNTP capable Ethernet Interfaces on the network which keep their internal clocks synchron
60. operable during the diagnostic phase of power up The Ethernet Interface is in diagnostic phase when the MODULE OK LED is BLINKING fast and other LEDs are OFF Service Option Connector If a problem occurs with the Ethernet Interface that requires continuous removal of power from the rack or its removal from the rack the on board log event data will automatically be preserved for 2 3 days The service option connector allows you to attach a standard battery 1C697ACC701 to save the log event data for longer periods Ports on the CMM742 There are two serial ports on the Ethernet Interface the Station Manager port RS 232 and the Software Loader port RS 485 RS 232 RJ 11 Port Station Manager Port The RS 232 6 pin RJ 11 phone jack port is used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface A cable is needed to connect the terminal or emulator to the Ethernet Interface see Appendix B Communications Ports Characteristics RS 485 D Type Port Software Loader Port The RS 485 15 pin D type port is used to connect to the PC Software Loader in case the communications software in the Ethernet Interface needs to be updated The characteristics of this port are given in Appendix B Communications Ports Characteristics wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 43 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete
61. optionally the subnet mask the gateway address and the name server address Configure the serial ports optional Configuring the Interface Using Windows Based Programming Software To configure the Ethernet Interface using Logic Developer Control or VersaPro programming software do the following 1 In Control and VersaPro from the Browser double click the 90 70 Rack System Local Rack icon The Local Rack Window will appear In Logic Developer expand the hardware configuration and the desired rack in the browser 2 In Control and VersaPro click the tab corresponding to the desired rack 3 Click the desired slot press the right mouse button and choose Add Module from the menu If the slot already contains a module choose Replace Module The Module Catalog dialog box will appear 4 Inthe Module Catalog dialog box click the Communications tab select IC697CMM742 Ethernet Controller Type 2 and then click the OK button The Parameters dialog box then will appear 5 This dialog box will allow you to edit the module s Ethernet parameters To edit a parameter value click in the appropriate Values field 6 Optionally after you have completed the Settings tab you can configure parameters for the Station Manager and Software Load ports by clicking the appropriate tab The default settings for the serial ports can then be changed optional Refer to the topic Configuration Parameters that follows for i
62. or Operational Caused by PLC CPU IP address received from network BOOTP server max 2 minutes IP address entered by BOOTP Station Manager command 5 Maintenance Request Caused by Done ox 4 o Waiting for Q IP Address Yes IP address 0 0 0 0 Restart pushbutton pushed until bottom two LEDs turn ON Station Manager MAINT command issued Fatal System Error while in Operational State forced a restart Symbols The LEDs are labeled from top to bottom as follows x OK IP Address q SEN Received yx Maintenance O x aintenance Request or Fatal System Error Yes O Maintenance Client and server capability disabled Uses default Advanced Parameters Permits changes to Advanced Parameters No Operational O eo Oo Operational Full support for client and server capability Uses user defined Advanced Parameters wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform STAT The symbols used for the LEDs are defined as follows Q OFF 0N Ww Slow Blink multiple slow blinking LEDs blink in unison K Fast Blink X Traffic blinks when there is traffic on the line The process symbols are defined as follows L Temporary condition requires no intervention lt gt Decision point during power up O Interface State normally the Interface remains in a S
63. periodic rate This exchange is uniquely distinguished by a set of identifiers the Producer ID and Exchange ID The Producer ID is assigned to uniquely identify the Ethernet Global Data device that produces the exchange on the network The Exchange ID is a value identifying a specific exchange within that producing device Ethernet Global Data is configured using Windows based PLC programming software if supported PLC1 Producer PLC2 Consumer Ethernet Network Ethernet Global Data is designed for simple efficient communication of sampled data between devices It is not intended for event notification where the possible loss of a sample of data would be significant For event notification it is recommended that an Establish Read Write Channel command be used See Chapter 3 Programming SRTP Channel Commands for more information Note A single Ethernet Interface can be configured to both produce and consume Ethernet Global Data at the same time using separate exchanges Exchange The exchange refers to a set of variables or memory locations that contain an internal snapshot of memory within the PLC or other device The Exchange ID is the value you assign to a particular exchange that identifies it uniquely within a particular producer You must configure an exchange in both the producer and the consumer Configuring the Exchange Exchanges are configured by filling out parameters in the Ethernet Global Data dialog bo
64. please inform us we will delete Ethernet Interface Operational Restrictions The Ethernet Interface Type 2 operates with some restrictions when used with IC697 PLC CPU versions 4 12 through 5 50 These Operational Restrictions together with differences in Startup Station Manager and Software Loader operation are described below COMMREQ operation is not supported Any COMMREQ issued to the Ethernet Interface is ignored a COMMREQ Status CRS word is not returned to the PLC Instead the Ethernet Interface generates an event in its internal exception log Event Ic Entry 2 11H indicating that the Channel API task is not active The Ethernet Interface also generates an entry in the PLC Fault Table LAN system software fault resuming The Ethernet Interface returns neither LAN Interface Status LIS nor Channel Status data to the PLC PLC CPU models IC697CPU73x and IC697CPU77x may limit the overall performance of a PLC used as a server device Under heavy load from other clients and hosts on the network the server PLC may generate errors with major error code 07 indicating that the volume of requests from the network have momentarily exceeded the processing capacity of the PLC CPU The request will need to be retried If possible try to reduce the volume of requests to the server PLC when this condition occurs If the system design requires data rates beyond the capacity of the server PLC CPU please consider upgrading to
65. referenced in the Command Block see rung 4 This clears the CRS word This rung also resets the FT output coil of the COMMREQ Function Block in rung 6 It is vital that the CRS Status Word be cleared and the COMMREQ fault output coil be cleared each time before initiating a COMMREQ function Rungs 4 5 The BLKMV INT functions set up the COMMREQ Command Block contents When these rungs are activated the constant operands are moved into the memory beginning at the address indicated in the instruction The constant operands in this example are defined in the Establish Read Channel Example in this chapter Rung 6 The COMMREQ Function Block has three input parameters and one output parameter two output parameters for Series 90 70 PLCs The IN field points to the starting location of the Command Block parameters RO00301 in this example The SYSID field of the COMMREQ Function Block defines the target rack and slot of the Ethernet Interface to receive the command data This is a hexadecimal word value that gives the rack high byte and slot low byte location of the Ethernet Interface module In the example ladder diagram shown which is taken from a VersaPro screen the first three number places from left to right are zeros and are not displayed only the last number 4 appears This indicates rack 0 slot 4 On a Logicmaster screen all four digits will appear 0004 For the Series 90 30 CPU364 this value should always be se
66. server can be resolved using DNS Name Resolution as described in a following section Please ask your network administrator for more information about the availability of a DNS name server on your network Name Resolution Name resolution involves resolving a symbolic name network address name to its necessary address information required for communication Without name resolution functionality a user is required to know this addressing information that is IP address to establish communication with a remote device Name resolution provides users a means to also use a symbolic name to reach the remote destination For the purposes of this description the client is the device which needs to resolve a symbolic name This symbolic name represents the IP address of the server Possible clients include a user of the Host Communications Drivers and users of the client capability on the Ethernet Interface for example Channel API Possible servers include the Ethernet Interface for example SRTP Server and the Host Communications Drivers for example unsolicited messages Name resolution of a symbolic name into an IP address follows a strict precedence rule as follows The precedence order is configurable as an advanced parameter using the Station Manager 1 Local Name Table 2 DDP 3 DNS Each of these is described in more detail in the following sections Local Name Table Name Resolution Local name table name resolution involv
67. that are 0 treat the corresponding bits as part of the hostid bits In effect two bits of the Class B hostid have been used to extend the netid creating an extended netid or subnetid Each unique combination of bits in the part of the hostid where subnet mask bits are specifies a different physical network wwweadiamily com Ebfailcadsenred hoknaibegpr 6 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Example Network Divided into Two Subnets The new network configuration dividing Network 2 into Subnets 2 1 and 2 2 is shown below A 172 16 0 1 Networki 172 16 0 2 G1 Gateway B Cc 172 17 64 3 172 17 64 1 172 17 64 2 Sub Network 2 1 G2 Sub Network 2 2 172 17 64 4 Gateway D E 172 17 128 3 172 17 128 1 172 17 128 2 Here a second network with Hosts D and E has been added Gateway G2 connects Subnet 2 1 with Subnet 2 2 Hosts D and E will use Gateway G2 to communicate with hosts not on Network 2 2 Hosts B and C will use Gateways G1 and G2 to communicate with hosts not on Network 2 1 When B is communicating with D G2 the configured Gateway for B will route the data from B to D through Gateway G2 Host A will use Gateway G1 to communicate with hosts not on Network 1 www cadfamily com Eltaicadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The docume
68. the Ethernet Interface will synchronize itself to an external SNTP time server Only EGD exchanges produced through an SNTP synchronized Ethernet Interface will carry network synchronized timestamps EGD exchanges produced through other Ethernet Interfaces in the same PLC that are not configured for network synchronization will use the PLC s timestamp information Exchange Variables A list of data elements making up the snapshot of internal memory that will be consumed from the network Each exchange has its own variable list which will be received from the producing device as a contiguous set of bytes The elements in the list are defined as variables A maximum of 100 variables can be defined in one exchange definition The data types BOOL and BOOL_STATE are not allowed for exchange variables and the total size of all variables cannot exceed 1400 bytes For consumed exchanges S memory types and override references are not allowed Valid memory types are listed in this chapter wwweadiamily com Ebfailecadservd hetmail com 5 15 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Configuring Ethernet Global Data Once you have collected all the essential information for your EGD system connect to each PLC and configure the exchanges For each PLC 1 With the PLC programming software open the Equipment folder for the PLC 2 Open Hardware Configuration 3 Choose Module Configuration and assign an
69. the channel number in the COMMREQ identifies a non Modbus TCP Client connection or an inactive channel Command 3001 Example Terminate the Modbus TCP Client connection established on Channel 5 Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Dec Hex Word 1 00002 0002 Length of Channel command Data Block Word 2 00000 0000 Always 0 no wait mode request Word 3 00008 0008 Memory type of CRS word R Word 4 00009 0009 CRS word address minus 1 R10 Word 5 00000 0000 Reserved Word 6 00000 0000 Reserved Word 7 03001 OBB9 Close Modbus TCP Client Connection Word 8 00005 0005 Channel number 5 Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting 1 from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 requests the Close channel service Word 8 Channel Command Number Word 8 identifies a channel previously opened with a Open Modbus TCP Client Connection request An unallocated channel results in an error response www gadfamily com Eltacadseve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Read Data from a Modbus TCP Device 3003 The Read Data from a Modbus TCP Device COMMREQ requests a data transfer from a Modbus TCP device to the PLC The Read Data COMMREQ must reference an active Modbus TCP channel previously established with the Open Modbus TCP Clie
70. the consumer of a single Ethernet Global Data exchange The consumer in this example is identified by IP address Network synchronized time stamping is not used The identification of the PLCs and the details of the exchange are shown in the tables below PLC1 Producer PLC2 Consumer N Producer Consumer Information for Entire EGD System EXAMPLE 1 Your Name for Ethernet Interface s the PLC Producer ID Network CCU Device IP Address Equipment Adapter Name Name Folder Name PLC2 ral 0 0 0 2 PLC2 PLC2 10 0 0 41 P Producer C Consumer Use your own IP addresses here Produced Exchange Information EXAMPLE 1 Local Exchange Local Adapter Name Consumer Consumer Send Producer Reply Status Producer ID ID Type Address Type Period Rate Word 0 0 0 1 PLCl IP Address 10 0 0 41 1000 Variable List for Produced Exchange EXAMPLE 1 Local Exchange Var Name Address Length Type Description Producer ID ID 0 0 0 1 R00100 WORD Conveyor 1 in PLC1 Consumed Exchange Information EXAMPLE 1 Local Exchange Local Adapter Name Remote Group Consumer Update Status Time Producer ID ID Producer ID ID Period Timeout Word Stamp 0 0 0 2 PLC2 0 0 0 1 0 1000 2000 Variable List for Consumed Exchange EXAMPLE 1 Local Remote Exchange Var Name Address Length Type Description Producer ID Producer ID ID Note These tables contain definitions of ALL the exchanges in the entire EGD system T
71. the producing device Identifies the adapter name of the Ethernet Interface within the producing PLC For the CPU374 this field is not editable and displays the rack and slot of the CPU Specifies whether the data s destination will be identified by an alias if aliases have been assigned IP address symbolic name or Group ID Identifies the data s consuming device based on the type selected Alias a name assigned in the Alias tab of the Name Resolution dialog box and selected from the drop down list for this field IP Address a dotted decimal IP address Broadcast Address Selecting this option causes the produced data to be sent to the subnet broadcast address Name an ASCII string of up to 31 characters This name must be a name that the Ethernet Interface will resolve into the needed IP address using available name resolution protocols Group ID the group s ID number 1 32 selected from the drop down list for this field Send Type Describes under what conditions data will be produced Currently fixed at always In the PLC production of EGD is controlled by the I O state when enabled EGD production is enabled and when disabled EGD production is disabled www egadfamily com Eltancadseveh hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Producer Period A value with the possible range of 10 3 600 000 10 millisecon
72. the site s interior gateways need only maintain the subnet numbers of other interior gateways instead of every single host on the entire network Subnet Addressing and Subnet Masks Subnet addressing is an extension of the IP address scheme that allows a site to use a single netid for multiple physical networks Routing outside the site continues as usual by dividing the IP address into a netid and a hostid via the class The standard format for the netid bits and hostid bits for an IP address in a Class B network is shown below 10000000 00000011 00000000 00000001 netid bits hostid bits binary Inside a site the subnet mask is used to re divide the IP address into a custom netid portion and hostid portion Consider adding another physical network to Network 2 a Class B network in the previous example see Figure 7 2 The result is shown in Figure 7 3 Selecting the subnet mask shown below would add two additional netid bits allowing for four physical networks addressed as 0 64 128 and 192 The added subnet bits are normally taken from the hostid bits adjacent to the netid and the subnet mask identifies these bits 11111111 11111111 77000000 00000000 255 255 192 0 netid bits hostid bits subnet mask binary dotted decimal The bits in the subnet mask correspond one to one with the Internet address The bits in the mask that are 1 treat the corresponding bits in the IP address as part of the netid bits The bits in the mask
73. to connect to the PC Software Loader when the communications firmware in the Ethernet Interface is to be updated The Series 90 30 CPU364 Embedded Ethernet Interface uses the RJ 11 port to connect to the Software Loader An RS 232 to RS 485 converter is required to interface to systems that provide RS 232 compatible interfaces Port Settings The serial port of the terminal or PC that is connected to the Ethernet Interface must use the same communications parameters as the Ethernet Interface The default values for the Software Loader port are 19 200 bps 8 bits Odd parity and 1 stop bit If the Ethernet Interface is configured with default values for this port or the Ethernet Interface has not been configured use these default values If the Ethernet Interface is configured with non default values for this port use those values for the serial port settings of the terminal or PC Software Loader Port Pinout Pin Number Signal Name Description 1 Shield 2 No Connection 3 No Connection 4 No Connection 5 5V 5V Power for RS 232 485 Converter 6 RTS A Request To Send 7 Signal Ground Signal Ground OV 8 CTS B Clear To Send 9 RT Terminating Resistor for RD 10 RD A Receive Data 11 RD B Receive Data 12 SD A Send Data 13 SD B Send Data 14 RTS B Request To Send 15 CTS A Clear To Send www cadfamily com Signals available at the Connector but are not included in the RS 485 specifi
74. up using the BLOCK MOVE programming instruction The Command Block has the following structure Word 1 Data Block Length words Word 2 WAIT NOWAIT Flag Word 3 CRS Word Memory Type Word 4 CRS Word Address Offset Word 5 Reserved Word 6 Reserved Words 7 and up Data Block Channel Command Details When entering information for the Command Block refer to these definitions Word 1 Data Block Length This is the length in words of the Data Block portion of the Command Block The Data Block portion starts at Word 7 of the Command Block The length is measured from the beginning of the Data Block at Word 7 not from the beginning of the Command Block The correct value for each command and the associated length of each command is specified in the next section Word 2 WAIT NOWAIT Flag This flag must be set to zero for TCP IP Ethernet Communications wwweadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete COMMREQ Status Word The Ethernet Interface updates the CRS word to show success or failure of the command Command words 3 and 4 specify the PLC memory location of the CRS word Word 3 COMMREQ Status Word Memory Type This word specifies the memory type for the CRS word The memory types are listed in the table below Type Value Value
75. with Embedded Switches Ethernet Interfaces that incorporate embedded switches only the Series 90 30 CPU374 provide some additional connection options and have some additional installation and operation considerations These Ethernet Interfaces provide two RJ 45 connectors on the front of the module It is important to realize that there is only one interface to the network only one Ethernet address and only one IP address provided by these Ethernet Interfaces The two connectors allow up to two Ethernet devices hubs switches other PLCs PCs to be connected to the Ethernet Interface This arrangement is diagrammed below 90 30 CPU374 Ethernet Processor Ethernet MAC 10 100 Network Switch For simple installations the embedded switch allows PLCs and other devices to be connected together without requiring any additional components Operator PLC PLC Personal Interface Computer Loo It is also possible to daisy chain PLCs together without additional components but that should be done with great care In designing a system remember that a loss of power or reset on any Ethernet Interface in a daisy chain will cause loss of communications with all devices downstream from the lost module The second port if left unused can be used to plug in a programmer over Ethernet Caution The two p
76. your Series 90 30 PLC rack s The Hand Held Programmer can not be used to configure the Ethernet Interface For the Ethernet Interface specifically the configuration software allows you to Define the Status address of the Ethernet Interface Assign the IP address for the Ethernet Interface and optionally the subnet mask the gateway address and the name server address Configure the serial ports optional Configuring the Interface Using Windows Based Programming Software To configure the Ethernet Interface using Logic Developer Control or VersaPro programming software do the following 1 8 In Control and VersaPro from the Browser double click Hardware Configuration icon The Local Rack Window will appear In Logic Developer expand the hardware configuration and the main rack in the browser In Control and VersaPro click the Main tab Click the CPU slot press the right mouse button and choose Replace Module The Module Catalog dialog box will appear In the Module Catalog dialog box select CPU model IC693CPU374 then click the OK button Follow the instructions on the screen until the Parameters dialog box appears The Parameters dialog box will allow you to edit the module s parameters To edit a parameter value click the desired tab then click in the appropriate Values field The Settings Scan and Memory tabs contain parameters that pertain directly to CPU operation Refer to Online Help for
77. 0 0064 00008 0008 00050 0032 00008 0008 00003 0003 00032 0020 19536 4C50 24387 5F43 24881 6131 00097 0061 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 Length of Channel command Data Block 45 53 words Always 0 no wait mode request Memory type of CRS word R CRS word address minus 1 R10 Reserved Reserved Establish Read Channel command number Channel number 5 Number of read repetitions read 10 times Time unit for read period 8 seconds Number of time units for read period every 7 seconds Timeout for each read 500 ms Local PLC Memory type at which to store data R Local PLC Starting address at which to store data R100 Remote PLC Memory type from which to read data R Remote PLC Starting address from which to read data R50 Remote PLC Number of memory units 8 registers Remote PLC Network Address type 3 Symbolic Name Remote PLC Network Address length in words 32 Remote PLC Network Address name char 1 2 PL Remote PLC Network Address name char 3 4 C_ Remote PLC Network Address name char 5 6 1a Remote PLC Network Address name char 7 8 a Remote PLC Network Address name char 9 10 Remote PLC Network Address name char 11 12 Remote PLC Network Address name char 13 14 Remote PLC Network
78. 0 or higher for full functionality CPU versions 5 03 to 6 04 permit Ethernet operation with only 1 SRTP server connection The CMM321 requires PLC power supply IC693PWR321 Revision K or later 1C693PWR322 or IC693PWR330 PLC programming software Logic Developer all versions Control Version 2 01 or higher VersaPro version 1 0 or higher or Logicmaster 90 30 version 6 01 or higher And a compatible PC compatible personal computer Ifyou are using the AAUI port instead of the 10Base T port you will need an Ethernet compatible AAUI transceiver and Ethernet cables See Appendix B for more information on the ports and transceivers Optional An IC693CBL316 serial cable for the Station Manager port on the Ethernet Interface see Appendix B Optional A terminal or IBM compatible personal computer equipped with terminal emulation software Optional Notes If your installation requires CE Mark compliance please refer to GFK 1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards shipped with the PLC programming software for additional guidelines A CMM321 can be mounted on a CPU baseplate an expansion baseplate or a remote baseplate However due to power requirements only two Ethernet Interface modules are permitted per baseplate using a standard power supply Up to four Ethernet Interface modules are permitted per baseplate using a high capacity power supply wwweadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC eGeries
79. 0032 Timeout on each individual transfer response 500 ms i Word 13 00008 0008 Local PLC Memory type from which to send data R used here to identify the Wworg44 00050 0032 Local PLC Starting address from which to send data R50 ne r DE PLC Word 15 00008 0008 Local PLC Number of memory units 8 registers A se E K Word 16 00000 0000 Reserved Word 17 00000 0000 Reserved request Word 18 00001 0001 Remote Network Address type IP Address The term SRTP Server Word 19 00004 0004 Remote Network Address length in words 4 is used here to identify Word 20 00010 000A Remote Host Register 1 of IP address 10 the Host server Word 21 00000 0000 Remote Host Register 2 of IP address 0 Word 22 00000 The term local PLC is Word 23 00001 0000 Remote Host Register 3 of IP address 0 Remote Host Register 4 of IP address 1 Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting 1 from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 requests that a Send Information Report channel be set up If the command is processed successfully it will result in attempting the specified number of transfers from the client to the server Word 8 Channel Number Word 8 specifies the channel to be used for the send This value must be in the range of 1 32 for Series 90 70 PLCs and 1 16 f
80. 1 Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface AAUI Transceiver Port 2 5 States 2 13 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Using with PLC CPUs Versions 4 12 5 50 D 1 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 10Base2 BNC Port 2 44 10Base T RJ 45 Port 2 44 AUI Transceiver Port 2 44 Board Indicators 2 41 Configuration Parameters 2 49 Ethernet Ports 2 44 Installing 2 45 Jumper 10Base2 Port 2 44 Requirements to Install 2 45 Restart Pushbutton 2 42 RS 232 RJ 11 Port 2 43 RS 485 D Type Port 2 43 Service Option Connetor 2 43 States 2 52 Station Address Label 2 44 Server Capability 1 2 Server PLC 3 10 3 15 3 17 4 9 4 10 4 12 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 Service Option Connector 2 43 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 43 GFK 1541B Simple isolated network configuration 2 24 2 34 2 49 Simple Network Time Protocol 5 25 SNTP 5 25 Software Loader 2 14 2 28 2 39 2 53 Software Loader Port RS 485 B 4 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 19 2 31 Series 90 30 CPU364 Ethernet Interface B 2 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 43 SQE 2 46 Ethernet products B 15 B 17 Station Address Label Series 90 30 CPU364 2 5 2 20 2 31 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 44 Station Manager Port B 2 1C693CMM321 2 5 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 19 2 31 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 43 Station Manager software 1 7 Status address location 2 23 2 34 Status bits 3 2 3 4 3 31 3 33 4 2 4
81. 10Base T hub or repeater PT Transmit Data PT RD Receive Data po a NC Noconnection PST NC Noconnection po RD Receive Data pT NC Noconnection Note Pinouts are provided for troubleshooting purposes only 10Base T cables are readily available from commercial distributors GE Fanuc recommends purchasing rather than making 10Base T cables www gadfamily com Eltacadseveh hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Connection to a 10Base T Network Connection of the Ethernet Interface to a 10Base T network is shown below a45628 10BaseT Hub Switch Router etc w CEI Ethernet Interface 10BaseT Twisted Pair Cable To Other Network Devices wwweasiamily com EMaibeasisened patraaibeemeristics B 7 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 10Base T 100Base Tx Port The Series 90 30 CPU374 Embedded Ethernet Interface has an embedded switch that provides two external ports each of which supports both 10Base T and 100Base Tx operation using either full duplex or half duplex operation Each switch port auto negotiates by default to the correct link speed and duplex mode for the device connected to the other end of the link Each port operates independently so devices at two different speeds and or duplex modes may be attached to the two ports Each port also automati
82. 192 0 255 255 192 0 172 17 64 5 1 www eadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete ee A Network Address Naming Architecture Naming architecture provides users the ability to refer to their Ethernet Interfaces in terms of a symbolic name rather than a numerical address This name commonly referred to as the network address name can be constructed from the following character set a z A Z 0 9 amp _4l H 01 73 lt gt Note The comma is not a supported character for network address names Note the Series 90 30 CPU374 does not support network address naming Name Assignment Name assignment associates a symbolic name to an IP address There are three aspects of name assignment The network may employ all or none of the name assignments described here The next section Name Resolution will describe the mechanisms to acquire the address information IP address from an assigned symbolic name DDP Name Assignment The first aspect of name assignment deals with the assignment of a network address name to an Ethernet Interface The Ethernet Interface will register this name with DDP a GE Fanuc naming protocol and can be resolved using DDP Name Resolution as described in a following section There are two methods to assign a DDP network address name to an Ethernet Interface Default DDP Networ
83. 19200 Parity Type of parity to be used for the port Choices are None Even or Odd Stop Bits Enter the number of stop bits Choices are 1 or 2 Flow Control This parameter is currently not used by the Ethernet Interface Changing this parameter has no effect Turnaround Delay Turnaround delay time in milliseconds to be used for the port Choices are None 10 ms 100 ms or 500 ms Timeout This parameter is currently not used by the Ethernet Interface Changing this parameter has no effect Default selection for the Software Loader Port Default selection for the Station Manager Port www gadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnaC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Configuring Full Duplex Operation Before setting the module to Full Duplex operation be certain that it is connected directly to a managed hub or switch that is manually configured for full duplex operation on the port connected to the IC693CMM321 The default setting for the module is Half Duplex The Full Duplex parameter is an advanced user parameter that can only be changed by using the CHPARM Change Parameter command in the Station Manager softwar Refer to GFK 1186 the TCP IP Ethernet Communications Station Manager Manual for additional information on using Station Manager Contrary to the recommendation of IEEE Std 802 3 this Ethernet Interfa
84. 3 4 20 4 21 Status data Channel Commands 3 4 4 3 Status on a channel 3 9 Subnet Addressing and Subnet Masks 6 5 Subnet mask 2 9 2 24 2 34 2 49 6 5 Subnets and Multiple Gateways 6 5 T Thick wire 1 5 Thin wire 1 4 Time units for command period 3 11 3 18 3 24 4 9 4 13 4 14 4 15 Timeout for Channel Commands 3 12 3 18 3 24 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 Timestamping Ethernet Global Data 5 25 Transceiver AAUI B 14 Transceiver Port Series 90 30 CPU364 2 19 Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface 2 5 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 44 Troubleshooting Ladder programs 3 45 4 33 Using PLC Fault Table 7 4 Using the Status bits and Communications Status words 3 32 4 21 Troubleshooting the Ethernet Interface 7 2 U Updating Ethernet Interface software 2 4 2 18 2 42 wwweadiamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Index Using the IC697CMM742 with PLC CPUs Versions 4 12 5 50 D 1 V VersaPro software 2 22 2 33 W Waiting for configuration from PLC 2 14 2 28 2 39 2 53 Waiting for IP address 2 14 2 28 2 39 2 53 Index 5
85. 32 as the producer of the exchange In the PLC programming software 1 Inthe producer definition choose Group ID as the Destination Type In the Consumer Address field select a value between 1 and 32 In the consumer definition s select the same value for Group ID that you entered in the producer definition s Consumer Address field The value 0 implies no group usage wwwi gadfamily com Eltancadsev2h hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Exchange Status Word The Exchange Status word allows an Ethernet Global Data user to obtain the operating status of a given exchange definition The PLC will write status codes into the Exchange Status word The Exchange Status word is changed upon exchange configuration and when a producer consumer period expires and the value will be set for the entire period Therefore it is possible for the Exchange Status word to always be set to 1 indicating that at the time the period expires there was no error condition The user program can monitor for error conditions reported in the Exchange Status word by setting it to 0 once a non zero value is written to it The first update of the Exchange Status word occurs the first time the producer consumer period timer expires In the CPU374 it occurs on the first data transfer Note The user program should also monitor the LAN Interface OK
86. 4 B 19 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 44 B Battery 2 43 Blown Fuse status bits 3 34 4 21 Board Indicators new style IC693CMM321 2 3 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 17 2 30 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 41 BOOTP 2 53 C Cable AUI transceiver B 20 Ethernet 1 5 IC690ACC901 B 5 IC693CBL316A B 3 Capabilities of the Ethernet Interface 1 3 wwwgagdtapmily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Index Channel Command 3 2 3 3 4 2 4 3 Channel Commands 3 9 4 8 Abort Channel 2001 3 28 Channel number 3 11 3 17 3 23 3 28 3 30 4 9 4 12 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 Command period 3 11 3 18 3 24 4 9 4 13 4 14 4 15 Establish Read Channel 2003 3 10 Establish Write Channel 2004 3 17 4 11 4 16 Local 3 28 3 30 Number of repetitions 3 11 3 18 3 23 4 9 4 12 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 Retrieve Detailed Channel Status 2002 3 29 Send Information Report 2010 3 23 Timeout 3 12 3 18 3 24 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 Channel Error bit 3 34 3 35 3 47 4 22 4 34 Channel Status bits 3 2 3 4 4 2 4 3 Channel Status words 3 29 Channels Aborting 3 9 Establishing 3 9 4 8 4 10 Maximum that can be established 3 3 Monitoring 3 46 4 34 Numbers assigned 3 11 3 17 3 23 3 28 3 30 4 9 4 12 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 Re tasking 3 9 Retrieving Detailed Status on 3 9 Clie
87. 742 Series 90 70 TCP IP Ethernet Interface Each section covers the basic features of the Ethernet Interface its installation configuration and a procedure for its initial checkout on your Ethernet cable Each section first provides a hardware overview of the Ethernet Interface and is then divided into four Installation Procedures each providing an overview of the procedure and then explaining the detailed steps to be performed The installation procedures described for each Ethernet Interface are Installing the Ethernet Interface in the PLC Required Configuring the Ethernet Interface Required Verifying Proper Power Up of the Ethernet Interface Required Pinging the Ethernet Interfaces on the Network Optional Some of the procedures require prior Ethernet cable plant design and installation GFK 1541B 2 1 www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Installing an IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module The IC693CMM321Ethernet Interface mounts in a Series 90 30 PLC baseplate It connects to an Ethernet network either directly through its 10Base T port 10Base T Type only or through its AAUI port which requires a user provided transceiver and cable If using the AAUI port you may order a transceiver from GE Fanuc see Appendix B for information or supply your own equivalent transceiver IC693CMM321 Series 90 30 TCP IP Ether
88. 790H Device unit length is too large 8890H Invalid channel number 8C90H Invalid client memory type 8D90H Invalid server host address type Must be 1 8E90H Invalid IP address integer type Must be 0 255 8F90H Invalid IP Address class Developer s note Something wrong with individual addresses 9090H Insufficient TCP connection resources to do request 9190H Zero local starting address is not allowed 9290H Address length value invalid Must be 4 for IP address type 9590H Internal API Error See PLC Fault Table or exception log for details This problem may occur due to the Ethernet Interface being asked to perform beyond its capacity 9690H Underlying TCP connection aborted reset by server end point 9790H Underlying TCP connection aborted reset by client end point 9D90H Data response had unexpected size 9E90H Unrecognized COMMREQ command code A190H Invalid CRS word memory type A290H Failed an attempt to update the CRS word B490H The channel the application is trying to open is already open by Modbus TCP B590H The channel the application is trying to access is owned by a different protocol wwwigadfamily com Eltapcadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B Minor
89. 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete CMM321 Installation Use the following instructions as a guide when inserting a module into a slot in a baseplate These instructions assume that the power supply on the baseplate is to your left Do not insert or remove modules with power applied This could cause the PLC to Stop damage the module or result in personal injury 1 Be sure the Series 90 30 PLC baseplate power is OFF 2 Align the module with the desired base slot and connector Tilt the module upwards so that the top rear hook of the module engages the slot on baseplate 3 Swing the module downward until the connectors mate and the lock lever on the bottom of the module snaps into place engaging the baseplate notch 4 Visually inspect the module to be sure that it is properly seated 5 Connect the cable using one of the two following methods e Ifusing a 10Base T connection plug the cable into the 10Base T port on the front of the module e Ifusing the AAUI connection connect the transceiver cable into the 14 pin AAUI port on the bottom of the module secure the cable and connect the other end of the cable to an external IEEE 802 3 compatible transceiver that is attached to the Ethernet network SQE must be enabled on the transceiver Note The transceiver cable may be either built in to the transceiver or removable Do not connect o
90. C Program Block needed for access to remote L zero terminated and padded Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting 1 from the intended address www gadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnalC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B A Channel command set up to issue a single read can have only one pending read transfer Word 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 requests that a read channel be set up If the command is processed successfully it will result in attempting the specified number of transfers from the server to the client Word 8 Channel Number Word 8 specifies the channel to be used for the read This value must be in the range of 1 32 for the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 and 1 16 for the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interfaces If the channel number is out of range a command error indication will be placed in the COMMREQ Status word If the channel number is the same as a channel already in use the channel will be retasked to perform this new command Word 9 Number of Read Repetitions Word 9 specifies the number of reads to be performed before automatically completing the communications request and closing the channel If this value is set to 1 only a single read will be issued If this value is set to 0 reads will be issued continuously on t
91. COMMREQ Function Block Series 90 70 PLCs only This output is set if the PLC CPU was successful in transferring the COMMREQ data from the reference table memory specified by the COMMREQ function block into the memory local to the Ethernet Interface This does not indicate that the Ethernet Interface has processed the COMMREQ only that it has been received by the Ethernet Interface Barring ladder programming errors the OK and FT outputs should not both be set in the same scan by the same COMMREQ 2 FT Output of the COMMREQ Function Block This output is set if there is a programming error in the COMMREQ Function Block itself if the rack and slot specified in the COMMREQ SYSID parameter is not configured to contain an Ethernet Interface or if the data block length specified in the Command Block is out of range This output also may indicate that no more COMMREQ functions can be initiated in the ladder program until the Ethernet Interface has time to process some of the pending COMMREQ functions If the FT Output is set the CPU does not transfer the Command Block to the Ethernet Interface In this case the other status indicators are not updated for this COMMREQ 3 Status Bits The status bits are updated in the CPU once each PLC scan by the Ethernet Interface These bits are generally used to prevent initiation of a COMMREQ function when certain errors occur or to signal a problem on an established channel The status bits include the LAN In
92. Cable To Other Network Devices Direct Connection to the CPU374 Ethernet Interface Connection of Ethernet devices directly to the Ethernet Interface is shown below 10BaseT 100Base Tx Twisted Pair Cable pes Other Ethernet devices such as PCs Ethernet Interfaces on other PLCs Operator Interfaces www gadfamily com Eltancadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 10Base2 Port The IC697CMM742 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 is equipped with a 10Base2 port for direct connection to a 10Base2 thin wire coaxial cable network without addition of an external transceiver The 10Base2 port on the Ethernet Interface is connected to the 10Base2 network cables by a BNC Adapter female male female in either T or F configurations Your 10Base2 network cables and connectors must meet the applicable IEEE 802 standards Information in this section includes 10Base2 port pinouts and cable diagrams 10Base2 Port Pinouts The 10Base2 port is located on the front of the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface This port is a female BNC coaxial connector It is used to connect the Ethernet Interface to the 10Base2 network TD RD Transmit and Receive Data Shield Ground Note Pinouts are provided for troubleshooting purposes only 10Base2 cables are readily available from commercial distributors GE Fanu
93. Codes 5H and 85H Continued Error Status Hexadecimal Service Request Error Description F705H F785H Required to log in to a task for service F805H F885H Invalid task name referenced F905H F985H Task address out of range FCOSH FC85H T O configuration is invalid FEO5H FE85H No privilege for attempted operation FFOSH FF85H Service request has been aborted Minor Error Codes for Major Error Code 11H at Remote Server PLC SRTP Error Description Error Status Hexadecimal Error codes common to all GE Fanuc PLCs Recognized but unsupported SRTP message received Lost transaction in server Error sending SRTP PDU to the client PLC Can someone explain the disclaimer below This manual describe those four products Error codes specific to IC697CMM742 IC693CMM321 IC693CPU364 and 2711H 2A11H 2B11H 2C11H 2D11H 1C693CPU374 Unable to allocate a text buffer from dual port memory Invalid text length detected in a mailbox message Invalid number of destinations detected in a mailbox message Invalid source detected in a mailbox message Invalid slot number detected in a mailbox message Invalid rack number detected in a mailbox message Bad text buffer address in dual port memory Unable to find control data required to send a mailbox message to the PLC Timed out waiting for availability of mail communications with the PLC Invalid task ID detected while
94. Communications Ports Characteristics for more information A serial cable for the Station Manager port on the Ethernet Interface see Appendix B Optional A terminal or IBM compatible personal computer equipped with terminal emulation software Optional A Phillips head screwdriver Note If your installation requires CE Mark compliance please refer to GFK 1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards shipped with the PLC programming software for additional guidelines wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 45 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete CMM742 Installation This section describes the physical mounting of the Ethernet Interface into the Series 90 70 PLC rack For information on the installation procedures for the rack Series 90 70 CPU Power Supply and other Series 90 70 modules refer to GFK 0262 Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Installation Manual Do not insert or remove modules with power applied This could cause the PLC to Stop damage the module or result in personal injury 1 Be sure the Series 90 70 PLC rack power is OFF 2 Slide the Ethernet Interface into the desired slot normally the first available slot to the right of the CPU Press firmly to seat the Interface but do not force the Interface Tighten the screws on the top and bottom tabs Note The Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 must be installed in the ma
95. Ds There are four LEDs on the CMM321 module Each of these LEDs can be ON OFF or BLINKING LED Indication Function OK State of the Ethernet Interface LAN Traffic on the network port FDX Configuration of Full Duplex mode STAT An exception event has occurred All LEDs are briefly turned ON whenever a restart is performed in the Operational state by pressing and releasing the Restart pushbutton described below This allows you to verify that all LEDs are operational On module versions EF or earlier the FDX LED is labeled SER Restart Pushbutton The Restart pushbutton serves four functions LED test Restart Restart and enter Software Load state and Restart and enter Maintenance state These four functions behave similarly in all states except for the Software Load state While in this state pressing the pushbutton will cause an immediate restart into the Operational state without performing the LED test if the software in the Ethernet Interface has not been corrupted or erased If the software has been corrupted or erased pressing the pushbutton will cause an immediate restart back into the Software Load state The following text describes Restart pushbutton behavior while not in the Software Load state Pressing the Restart pushbutton will disrupt Ethernet communications LED Test Any time the Restart pushbutton is released all the LEDs flash ON You should visually verify that all the LE
96. Ds go OFF and then ON at this time Then the Interface performs either a restart a restart and enter Software Load state or a restart and enter Maintenance state depending on the duration that you press the pushbutton Restart Pressing the Restart pushbutton momentarily less than 5 seconds requests a restart of the Ethernet Interface When the Restart pushbutton is pressed all LEDs go out When it is released all LEDs flash ON then power up diagnostics run and the software on the Interface is restarted into the Operational state wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 3 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Restart and Enter Software Load State Pressing and holding the Restart pushbutton until the bottom LED STAT turns ON between 5 and 10 seconds forces a restart and requests entrance to the Software Load state A reload is used to install a software update into the module and is not part of normal operation When the Restart pushbutton is pressed all LEDs go out After approximately 5 seconds have elapsed the STAT LED bottom LED comes ON to indicate that the Ethernet Interface will request a reload After the Restart pushbutton is released all LEDs flash ON then power up diagnostics run and the Ethernet Interface waits for the software load with all LEDs blinking in unison Notes Reloading the Ethernet Interface requires the attachment of the PC Software Loader to the So
97. E OEE E aeaa 4 20 Controlling Communications in the Ladder Program eeesseeeeseereereresrerrerrsrresreress 4 26 Ethernet Global Data sesesseseseseccesesorsesereeoesororseseseecesororsesereeoesosorseserocoesosoreeeeseseee 5 1 Oy ryiew of EGD rinsi niie en E EEE e a NEE EEEE SESS 5 2 On SUT EGD eriseeria EEEE E EEEE T E Ee e a T ENEE 5 12 Adapter Names Aliases and Groups sssssssssssesesssssssssesssssssesssessseesstesstesstesstesseessseese 5 21 Exchange Status Wordo sineiiiarcerieiiseiien nnii i aiet ioiei iieri 5 23 Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP sseesseesseesseessesssesssssssssssssessssrsssersssessseesssesses 5 25 Network Administration SUpport esseessoesssecssocesocesoosesoosssocsssecesocesooesoosesssessee 6 1 IP Addfiessihgoocciconsiariciaiiiiinseieiiiiiiiineiiiieairiiiiniiaieii iiid i iiaii 6 2 Gate Ways e tocar inn E det ieee 6 4 Subnets and Multiple Gateways ee eecsseceseessecssecsseceseceseceeeeseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaaeeaaees 6 5 Configuring Multiple Gateways es escesseeseeeseeessecssecssecssecsseeeaecsaeesaeesseeseeeeseeeeneeeaee 6 7 Network Address Naming Architecture eseesessseesseceneesscecscecsseceaeceaeeeseceseeeeeeeeeeeeaes 6 9 iii www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Contents Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ossisasssssscssssesssessenssveassesesesovees consessssnavevesenavesevensoessoneavensnoa
98. ESTART PUSHBUTTON RESTART stanon man 2 202 Suan coe PTS 232 N SERVICE J OPTION SERIAL NUMBER LABEL Va SOFTWARE LOAD RS 485 L POF 10BaseT NETWORK PORT AUI NETWORK PORT 0000000 00000000 S Eg Zo 4omzz00 4Amznmz4m FS See 10Base2 NETWORK N 0 PORT ease O ili DEFAULT STATION ADDRESS LABEL The CMM742 has several user accessible elements Four LEDs are located at the top of the board The Restart pushbutton is located immediately below the LEDs The RS 232 serial port with the RJ 11 connector similar to a modular telephone connector is the Station Manager port The RS 485 serial port with the 15 pin D connector located immediately below the Station Manager port is the module s Software Loader port Below these there are three ports any one of which can be used to connect to the Ethernet network the 10Base T RJ 45 port the AUI port and the 10Base2 BNC port LEDs There are four LEDs on the Ethernet Interface MODULE OK LAN ONLINE SERIAL ACTIVE and STATUS Each of these LEDs can be ON OFF BLINKING slow or BLINKING fast They indicate the state of the Interface traffic on the network port LAN ONLINE LED and that an exception event has occurred wwwgadiamily com EMaieadsened hotmail com 2 4 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete
99. Error Codes for Major Error Code 91H Remote Server Device Error Codes Error Status ae Hexadecimal Error Description 0191H Illegal Function The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the server This may be because the function code is only applicable to newer controllers and was not implemented in the unit selected It could also indicate that the server is in the wrong state to process a request of this type for example because it was un configured and is being asked to return register status 0291H Illegal Data Address The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for the server More specifically the combination of reference number and transfer length is invalid 0691H The server s Service Request Queue is full or the EEthernet Interface received a Modbus Exception Code 06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY 0791H An internal server error occurred while attempting to process a Modbus request This corresponds to the Modbus exception 07 NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE Note If using a Modbus TCP Server other than the IC693CMM321 and receive an error of the form xx91H that is not listed in this table please refer to the documetation provided with the specific server for details on the meaning of the error wwweasiamily com Elhaileagsenvah MORNE Mne Commands 4 25 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Controlling Communications in the Ladder Progra
100. Field That part of a protocol data unit PDU that contains commands as opposed to the address field and information field COMMREQ Function Block The COMMREQ Function Block is the Series 90 PLC ladder instruction used to initiate a communications request COMMREQ Status Word CRS Word The 16 bit CRS word receives the initial status of the Series 90 PLC communication request from the Series 90 module to which the communication request was addressed The location of the CRS word is assigned for each COMMREQ function in the common area of the COMMREQ Command Block Communication Configuration Utility A utility used by the Windows based PLC programming software and the Host Communications Toolkit to configure local communication parameters for connecting to PLCs Communications Window A part of the PLC scan that provides an opportunity for the LAN Interface to read and write PLC memory The window is executed automatically once per PLC scan Connection An association between a client and server on a network used to reliably transfer data between the two Here usually refers to a TCP or an SRTP connection where the client server or both are PLCs See also Channel Consumer In Ethernet Global Data a device such as a PLC that receives a data exchange from a Producer See also Producer Exchange CRS Word See COMMREQ Status Word www cadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnaC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document
101. G3 If the data is not destined for either remote Subnet 2 2 or Subnet 2 3 then the data would be routed to Gateway G1 the default gateway To configure a PLC on Subnet 2 1 to be able to communicate with Network 1 Subnet 2 2 and Subnet 2 3 you need to know the following information Address of Gateway G1 172 17 64 3 Default Gateway Subnet Mask for Subnet 2 1 255 255 192 0 Address of Gateway G2 172 17 64 4 Subnet Mask for Subnet 2 2 255 255 192 0 Subnet ID of Subnet 2 2 172 17 128 0 Address of Gateway G3 172 17 64 5 Subnet Mask for Subnet 2 3 255 255 192 0 Subnet ID of Subnet 2 3 172 17 192 0 The subnet ID is derived by ANDing the bits of the subnet mask and an IP address on the destination subnet Module Configuration for the Ethernet Interface in PLC B The IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP address are entered in the Ethernet Interface s module configuration IP Address 172 17 64 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 192 0 Default Gateway IP Address 172 17 64 3 PLC Routing Table to Configure Multiple Gateways for PLC B and PLC C The following routing table entries are entered into the PLC s Routing tab of the Name Resolution and Routing Tables Rack Operation via the Windows based PLC programming software if supported Destination Subnet ID Destination Subnet Mask Next Hop IP Address Cost Gateway IP Address 1 172 17 128 0 255 255 192 0 172 17 64 4 1 2 172 17
102. ICMP The Internet standard protocol that handles error and control messages www cadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP The Internet standard protocol that handles multicast group management messages Internet Protocol IP The Internet standard protocol that defines the Internet datagram and provides the basis for the Internet packet delivery service See also Transmission Control Protocol TCP Inter Repeater Link IRL A mechanism for interconnecting two and only two repeater units The Inter Repeater Link acts at the Physical Layer ISO layer 1 IP Address See Internet Address LAN Interface A term used in this manual to identify the GE Fanuc hardware module with or without software that connects a PLC or CNC to a network LAN Interface Status Bits LIS Bits The LIS bits comprise bits 1 16 of an 80 bit status bit area The location of this 80 bit status area is assigned using the PLC programming software in the Status Address field The LIS bits contain information on the status of the Local Area Network LAN and the Ethernet Interface itself Linear Topology A network topology in which nodes are each connected at a point along a common continuous cable which has no loops and only two endpoints Link Service Access Point LSAP A Data Link layer
103. Isolate and correct the cause of the problem then replace the fuse or the Ethernet Interface wwwigadiamily com Ebaileadssivail botmail com 7 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete PLC Fault Table Descriptions Continued LAN I F can t init check parms running soft Internal system error User Action If problem Sw utl persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA LAN I F capacity exceeded discarded request Verify that connection limits are not being exceeded LAN interface hardware failure switched off User Action Replace Ethernet Interface network LAN network problem exists performance Excessive backlog of transmission requests due to degraded excessive traffic on the network For a sustained period the MAC was unable to send frames as quickly as requested User Action If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA LAN severe network problem attempting External condition prevented transmission of frame in recovery specified timeframe Could be busy network or network problem User Action Check transceiver to make sure it is securely attached to the network Check for unterminated trunk cable LAN system software fault aborted Internal system error User Action If problem connection resuming persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA LAN system software fault restarted LAN I F Internal system error User Action If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Aut
104. MAHERAS RAN ANONAbEReries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete LED Pattern Where Stopped Possible Cause Corrective Actions O EOK OFF A Fatal Hardware Error Make sure the PLC has power O LAN OFF Examine PLC Fault Table for clues O STAT OFF Hardware Recheck PLC Programmer Failure configuration Power off baseplate inspect the Interface for loose components reseat the module and Restart If the problem persists replace the PLC hardware EOK Slowblink B Software corrupt Connect a PC Software Loader and load x LAN Slowblink new software See Appendix C STAT Slowblink Software Loader All LEDs blink in unison EOK Slowblink 0 Did not configure slot using the Use the PLC Programmer O LAN OFF PLC Programmer configuration software to configure oe CPU not communicating with the Interface then store the SD le TORR baag for Ethernet Interface configuration to the PLC CPU f o ee Condition can last a maximum of Power cycle the PLC rom 2 seconds a Clear faults and Restart Interface x EOK Slowblink D Interface s IP address has not been Use the PLC Programmer to 0 LAN ON Traffic OFF configured or has been configured configure the Interface with a non 0 0 0 0 zero IP address STAT Slowblink iti i i l Ar for IP Assign IP address over network ress EOK and STAT blink
105. MREQ Function Block This output is set if there is a programming error in the COMMREQ Function Block itself if the rack and slot specified in the COMMREQ SYSID parameter is not configured to contain an Ethernet Interface or if the data block length specified in the Command Block is out of range This output also may indicate that no more COMMREQ functions can be initiated in the ladder program until the Ethernet Interface has time to process some of the pending COMMREQ functions If the FT Output is set the CPU does not transfer the Command Block to the Ethernet Interface In this case the other status indicators are not updated for this COMMREQ 2 Status Bits The status bits are updated in the CPU once each PLC scan by the Ethernet Interface These bits are generally used to prevent initiation of a COMMREQ function when certain errors occur or to signal a problem on an established channel The status bits include the LAN Interface Status bits and the Channel Status bits The starting location of these bits is user configurable and is set in harware config when the module is configured The LAN Interface Status bits monitor the health of the Ethernet Interface itself such as the LAN Interface OK bit and the AAUI Fuse Blown bit The Channel Status bits monitor the health of a channel 3 Communications Status Word The COMMREQ Status word CRS word provides detailed information on the status of the COMMREQ request The communications status w
106. Manager prompt changes from gt to 8 Use the Modify level MAINT Station Manager command to restart the Ethernet Interface into the Maintenance state The MAINT command is shown below maint Restarting module into Maintenance state The Ethernet Interface is restarted into the Maintenance state After approximately 20 seconds another NODE output is automatically generated when the restart is complete The display will also indicate that the Ethernet Interface is in the Maintenance state the Station Manager prompt is Modify level login is not required in the Maintenance state wwwadiamily com EMaleadsenci pounei2QQ h PLC CPU Versions 4 12 5 50 D 3 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 9 Use the CHSOSW Station Manager commands to enter the configuration data for this Ethernet Interface The IP addressing parameters ip_address subnet_mask gateway and name_server must be set to values supplied by the person in charge of your network the network administrator TCP IP network administrators are familiar with these parameters It is important that these parameters are correct otherwise the Ethernet Interface may be unable to communicate on the network and or network operation may be corrupted It is especially important that each node on the network is assigned a unique IP address Enter the IP Address as follows chsosw ip address lt a b c d gt where lt a b c
107. Network Address type IP address The term remote PLC is Word 19 00004 0004 Remote PLC Network Address length in words 4 used here to identify the Word 20 00010 000A Remote PLC Register 1 of IP address 10 server PLC the PLC Word 21 00000 0000 Remote PLC Register 2 of IP address 0 that responds to the Word 22 00000 0000 Remote PLC Register 3 of IP address 0 c mmunicanorns Word 23 00001 0001 Remote PLC Register 4 of IP address 1 request Word 24 27 Remote PLC Program Name needed for access to remote P or L zero terminated and padded Word 28 31 Remote PLC Program Block needed for access to remote L zero terminated and padded Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting 1 from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 requests that a write channel be set up If the command is processed successfully it will result in attempting the specified number of transfers from the client to the server Word 8 Channel Number Word 8 specifies the channel to be used for the write This value must be in the range of 1 32 for Series 90 70 PLCs and 1 16 for Series 90 30 PLCs If the channel number is out of range a command error indication will be placed in the COMMREQ wwwgadiapily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete A Channel command set
108. OMMREQ Status Word CRS Word CRS Word in Hex Format High Low 00 00 Minor Error Codes high byte Success and Major Error Codes low byte Format of the Detailed Channel Status Words DCS Words DCS Word in Hex Format Word 2 Word 1 High Low 0000 00 00 Channel Active 0001 channel active 0000 channel not active Minor Error Codes high byte Success and Major Error Codes low byte There are several points to remember when interpreting the contents of the COMMREQ Status word and Word 1 of the Detailed Channel Status words 1 Display the Status Words in hexadecimal form to more easily differentiate the high and low bytes A good way to do this is to use a MOVE WORD function block to display the hexadecimal value within the ladder program 2 The Ethernet Interface will never send a zero for the COMMREQ Status word to the PLC CPU The user program should zero the COMMREQ Status word before issuing the COMMREQ function and then check for a non zero value indicating that the Ethernet Interface is responding to the COMMREQ A good way to do this is to use a MOVE WORD function block to zero the CRS word wwwigadfamily com Eltacadseveh hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 3 A status code of 1 in the low byte and 0 in the high byte indicates that the request was successful All other non zero values indicate e
109. Operational Restrictions eccceessceesceceeeeeeeeaeceeaeecceeeeenaeeeeaaeceeaees D 6 Appendix E Translating PLC CPU Reference Addresses to Modbus Register Addresses for the IC6O9SCMM321 ictsnssecssisesssescascucesscensenichssesenstescocen coadedaesssaocescsesessveancecusivs E 1 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Contents www cadianulecom EWMaileadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Chapter Introduction l This manual describes the following Ethernet Interfaces for the Series 90 PLC Series 90 30 PLC TCP IP Ethernet Interface IC693CMM321 Series 90 30 PLC CPU364 with embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface IC693CPU364 Series 90 30 PLC CPU374 with embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface IC693CPU374 Series 90 70 PLC TCP IP Ethernet Interface Type 2 IC697CMM742 The general term Ethernet Interface will be used in this manual except when differences in the Interfaces require the more specific terms The Series 90 30 PLC CPU 364 and CPU374 are both modules that contain a PLC CPU and an embedded Ethernet Interface The general term Embedded Ethernet Interface will be used in this manual to refer to these modules This chapter provides an overview of the Ethernet Int
110. PD 254 hosts The minus 2 refers to host numbers reserved for the network itself and the local broadcast Each node on the same physical network must have an JP address of the same class and must have the same netid Each node on the same physical network must have a different hostid thus giving it a unique JP address IP addresses are written in dotted decimal format as four decimal integers 0 255 separated by periods where each integer gives the value of one byte of the IP address For example the 32 bit IP address 00001010 00000000 00000000 00000001 is written as 10 0 0 1 One can determine the class of an IP address by examining the first integer in its dotted decimal IP address and comparing with the range of values in the following table Range of first integer Class 0 127 A 128 191 B 192 223 C 224 239 D Reserved for Multicast Use 240 255 E Reserved for Experimental Use www cadfamily com Elajcadse ve hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete L IP Addresses Reserved for Private Networks RFC 1918 reserves IP addresses in the following ranges to be used for private networks 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 Class A 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 Class B 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 Class C Multicast IP Addresses Multicast IP Addresses are used in multicasting a tec
111. QE not enabled on transceiver If the STATUS LED is OFF an exception condition has occurred Terminate network cable properly Set SQE ON on transceiver in accord with manufacturer s instructions Examine PLC Fault Table to find out why the STATUS LED is OFF wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 2 53 Pinging TCP IP Ethernet Interfaces on the Network PING Packet InterNet Grouper is the name of a program used on TCP IP networks to test reachability of destinations by sending them an ICMP echo request message and waiting for a reply Most nodes on TCP IP networks including the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 implement a PING command The user should ping each installed Ethernet Interface When the Ethernet Interface responds to the ping it verifies that the interface is operational and configured properly Specifically it verifies that acceptable TCP IP configuration information has been stored to the Interface Pinging the Interface from a UNIX Host or a PC Running TCP IP Software A ping command can be executed from a UNIX host or PC running TCP IP since most TCP IP communications software provides a ping command or from another Ethernet Interface When using a PC or UNIX host the user can refer to the documentation for the ping command but in general all that is required is the IP address of the remote host
112. QE option Enabled Caution PLC power must be OFF when connecting or disconnecting the transceiver GE Fanuc Transceivers EF tal Cl Panny Catalog Network Connection Comments Number IC649AEA102 10Base T RJ 45 connector Connects AAUI port to 10Base T network IC649AEA103 10Base2 BNC connector Connects AAUI port to 10Base2 network Replaces obsolete IC649AEA101 transceiver www cadfamily com Eltancadsenv2 hatnalbCangeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10Base T Transceiver e Compliant with the IEEE 802 3 Ethernet specification for 1OBASE T e Connector on transceiver body is standard RJ 45 type for connection to unshielded twisted pair UTP Ethernet cable e This unit has an attached 40 1 meter cable with standard 14 pin AAUI connector for connecting to a Series 90 30 Ethernet module IC693CMM321 or CPU with Ethernet interface IC693CPU364 e SQE option is enabled e Power and Link Integrity LED indicator lights 1 25mm 3 5 89 mm 40 inches 1 meter i 8 pal a mm Pi ii 14 Pin AAUI Fia Connector Power Requirement This unit draws 60 mA 5Vdc from the Ethernet interface via the AAUI connector LED Indicator Lights These are located on the end of the unit next to the RJ 45 connector The one labeled LI stays on
113. REQ Status word to R10 Use channel 6 a channel previously opened with the Open Modbus TCP Client Connection COMMREQ Dec Hex Word 1 00008 0008 Length of Channel command Data Block Word 2 00000 0000 Always 0 no wait mode request Word 3 00008 0008 Memory type of CRS word R Word 4 00009 0009 CRS word address minus 1 R10 Word 5 00000 0000 Reserved Word 6 00000 0000 Reserved Word 7 03004 OBBC Write to a Modbus TCP Device Word 8 00006 0006 Channel number 6 Word 9 00016 0010 Modbus Function Code Preset Multiple Registers Word 10 00016 0010 PLC Memory Type Word 11 00040 0028 PLC Starting Address Word 12 00200 00C8 Address in the Remote Device Word 13 00004 0004 Number of Registers in the Remote Device Word 14 00001 0001 Unit Identifier Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 identifies the COMMREQ as a Write Data to Modbus TCP device Word 8 Channel Number Word 8 identifies the channel number previously allocated for communication with the remote Modbus TCP server Word 9 Modbus Function Code Word 9 specifies Modbus Function Code 6 Preset Single Register Word 10 Local PLC Memory Type Words 10 11 specify the location in the local PLC from where the Ethernet Interface will get the data to be written to the remote PLC Valid values for Word 10 are
114. Requests If the Ethernet Interface receives Command Blocks from the PLC CPU faster than the Interface can process them the Interface will log an exception event 08 Entry 2 0024H and will log the PLC Fault Table entry Backplane Communications with PLC Fault Lost Request Only one COMMREQ function per channel can be pending at one time A COMMREQ function is pending from the time it is initiated in the ladder program until its CRS word has been updated to a non zero value by the Ethernet Interface www gadfamily com Eltancadse veh hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Chapter Ethernet Global Data 5 This chapter discusses how to plan and configure an Ethernet Global Data EGD system Overview of EGD Configuring EGD Adapter Names Aliases and Groups Exchange Status Word Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP GFK 1541B www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Overview of EGD This section describes Ethernet Global Data in general terms It also provides key information you need to plan and configure your Ethernet Global Data system Ethernet Global Data allows one device the producer to share a portion of its internal memory the exchange with one or more other devices the consumers at a regularly scheduled
115. S name server must be supplied to the Ethernet Interface in the PLC configuration The symbolic name must be defined at the DNS name server Name Usage Various areas of the PLC system support the use of this naming architecture They can be broken into three categories Channel API commands Ethernet Global Data EGD and Station Manager commands Some Channel API commands allow the use of symbolic names in the remote node addressing fields of the COMMREQ Function Block In the configuration of an EGD exchange the local Ethernet Interface that is responsible for producing consuming the EGD is identified by its network address name adapter name Also in the configuration of a produced exchange the consumer address may be identified as a symbolic name For more information refer to the chapter Ethernet Global Data The following Station Manager commands pertain to symbolic names MYNAME NAMETBL BROWSEDDP PING REM and RESOLVE These commands are described in detail in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual wwweadiamily com Ebfailcadsenred hoknaibegpr 6 11 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete MAC Addresses Note It is highly recommended that you use the unique default MAC supplied within the Ethernet Interface However you may override that default with a MAC address of your own choosing with the Station Manager CHPARM MACADDR
116. SAP A single byte that identifies the routing of data received by the network node LIS Bits See LAN Interface Status Bits Local Address Administration Address administration in which all LAN individual addresses are unique within the same Local Area Network See also Global Address Administration Local Area Network LAN A computer network located on a user s premises within a limited geographical area Local Broadcast A transmission which is directed to every available receiver in the local IP subnet of the transmitter A local broadcast is never routed to LANs outside of the local IP subnet Local Station The station at your immediate location i e here See also Remote Station Log Events Events recorded in the system exception log for the LAN Interface The maximum number of events in the exception log is 16 Logical Link Control LLC Protocol In a Local Area Network the protocol that governs the exchange of frames between network nodes independently of how the transmission medium is shared MAC Address The Medium Access Control MAC address is a 12 digit hexadecimal number that identifies a node on a local network Each Ethernet Interface has its own unique MAC address Medium Access Control MAC Ina Local Area Network LAN the part of the protocol that governs write or transmission access to the transmission medium independently of the physical characteristics of the medium but taking into account the
117. See Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for further information In addition you can use the Station Manager STAT B and LOG commands to further understand the problem See the Station Manager Manual GFK 1186 for more information Status Bit 16 LAN Interface OK Bit This input is set to 1 by the Ethernet Interface each PLC scan If the Ethernet Interface cannot access the PLC the CPU will set this bit to 0 When this bit is 0 all other Ethernet Interface Status bits are invalid www gadfamily com Elacadseveh hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Each SRTP channel has a dedicated pair of bits as follows Status Bits 17 19 21 79 Data Transfer Bit This bit is normally set to 0 It is pulsed to 1 and back to 0 on successive PLC scans each time a transfer completes successfully Do not assume that when the Data Transfer bit goes to 1 that a transfer has just completed during the last scan The Data Transfer bit is not closely synchronized in time with the transfer The bit only indicates that a transfer has occurred during the preceding read or write period A rising edge on the Data Transfer bit indicating that a transfer has completed successfully does not guarantee that the next transfer has not begun or completed In the case of an Establish Channel command the CRS word is always updated before the Data Transfer bit is set to 1
118. U IP address received from network BOOTP server max 2 minutes IP address entered by BOOTP Station Manager command 5 Maintenance Request Caused by Restart pushbutton pushed until bottom two LEDs turn ON Station ManagerMAINT command issued Fatal System Error while in Operational State forced a restart ok D O Waiting for O IP Address Xx IP address 0 0 0 0 Symbols The LEDs are labeled from top to bottom as follows MODULE OK LAN ONLINE SERIAL ACTIVE STATUS IP Address Received 4 The symbols used for the LEDs are defined as follows Maintenance i E Request or e 0 oa Maintenance Fatal System ve on 9 wk Slow Blink multiple slow blining LEDs blink in unison K Fast Blink Error N Maintenance y 0 Client and server capability disabled Uses default Advanced Parameters Permits changes to Advanced Parameters X Traffic blinks when there is traffic on the line The process symbols are defined as follows e Q F L Temporary condition requires no intervention Operational 9 93 O Decision point during power up O Interface State normally the Interface remains in a State unless there is user intervention Operational Full support for client and server capability Uses user defined Advanced Parameters www gadfamily com EMajheRaASRANRZAONANAbEReries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The documen
119. Words 7 17 See the descriptions in Example 1 Word 18 Remote PLC Network Address Type Word 18 specifies the format of the remote PLC address Currently Word 18 must contain the value 1 or 3 A value of 1 indicates a dotted decimal IP address expressed using a separate register for each decimal digit A value of 3 indicates a Network Address name See Example 1 for information on using address type 1 Word 19 Remote PLC Network Address Length Word 19 specifies the length in words of the remote PLC Network Address name With an address type of 3 specified in Word 18 Word 19 must contain 32 decimal Words 20 35 Remote PLC Network Address Name Words 20 35 specify the Network Address name of the remote PLC as an ASCII character string The Network Address name may contain up to 31 characters is case sensitive and must be terminated with a null character zero An error will result if the Network Address name is empty or if the name could not be resolved into the address of an actual device The Network Address name must have each pair of ASCII characters reversed within the PLC memory For example the name PLC_laa P 50H L 4CH C 43H _ SFH 1 31H a 61H a 61H would have 4C50H in Word 20 5F43H in Word 21 6131H in Word 22 and 0061H in Word 23 Words 24 35 all contain OOOOH Note The Network Address name of the remote PLC must be defined in the Name Table in
120. a more powerful CPU model Startup Upon each powerup or restart of the Ethernet Interface or configuration store to the PLC the following entry will be generated in the PLC Fault Table for the slot containing the Ethernet Interface Reset of addition of or extra option module When operating with PLC CPU versions prior to 6 00 the Ethernet Interface does not generate the exceptions or PLC Faults that normally occur when Ethernet Interface does not receive module configuration from the PLC CPU Each powerup and restart of the Ethernet Interface takes approximately 20 seconds This is roughly 10 seconds longer than required when the Ethernet Interface is used with PLC CPU versions 6 00 and later Station Manager The STAT C command PLC Driver status does not display the current PLC CPU state RUN STOP and I O ENABLED I O DISABLED In the TALLY C command output PLC Driver tallies the PlcSweep tally does not count the number of PLC sweeps This tally should be ignored The STAT H command Channel API status always indicates Channel API task not initialized As detailed in Ethernet Interface Installation and Configuration special restricted operation notification is displayed with the startup message and by the NODE command Software Loader It is not possible to perform a fimware load to this Ethernet Interface while it is operating with a Series 90 70 PLC CPU running firmware Release 4 12
121. a parameter to the ping command For example at the command prompt type ping 10 0 0 1 Determining If an IP Address Has Already Been Used It is very important not to duplicate IP addresses To determine if you have configured your Ethernet Interface with the same IP address as another node 1 Disconnect your Interface from the LAN 3 Ping the disconnected Interface s IP address If you get an answer to the ping then the chosen IP address is already in use by another node You must correct this situation by assigning unique IP addresses To use another GE Fanuc Ethernet Interface refer to the PING command in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual UNIX is a registered trademark exclusively licensed through X Open Company LTD www gadfamily com Eltancadse v2 hoHnaC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Installing the IC697CMM742 Ethernet Interface The IC697CMM742 Ethernet Interface is mounted in a Series 90 70 PLC rack It is connected to an Ethernet network via a 10Base T port a 10Base2 port or a user provided transceiver cable and transceiver via an AUI port 1C697CMM742 Ethernet Interface 045598 T DISABLE ONBOARD u 10Base2 PORT JUMPER Sect ACeAste fuse im i 3 g O monuLe ox O LAN ONLINE LEDS O SERIAL ACTIVE OJ status R
122. a write channel Channel 6 to a remote PLC at IP address 10 0 0 1 Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Write local PLC registers R50 R57 to remote PLC registers R100 R107 Repeat the write indefinitely once every 7 seconds with a timeout of 500 ms for each write Dec Hex Word 1 00017 0011 Length of Channel command Data Block 17 25 words Word 2 00000 0000 Always 0 no wait mode request Word 3 00008 0008 Memory type of CRS word R Word 4 00009 0009 CRS word address minus 1 R10 Word 5 00000 0000 Reserved Word 6 00000 0000 Reserved Word 7 02004 07D4 Establish Write Channel command number Word 8 00006 0006 Channel number 6 Word 9 00000 0000 Number of write repetitions write indefinitely Word 10 00003 0003 Time unit for write period 3 seconds Word 11 00007 0007 Number of time units for write period every 7 seconds Word 12 00050 0032 Timeout for each write 500 ms The term local PLC is Word 13 00008 0008 Local PLC Memory type from which to write data R used here to identify the Word 14 00050 0032 Local PLC Starting address from which to write data R50 client PLC the PLC Word 15 00008 0008 Remote PLC Memory type at which to store data R that initiates the Word 16 00100 0064 Remote PLC Starting address at which to store data communications R100 request Word 17 00008 0008 Remote PLC Number of memory units 8 registers Word 18 00001 0001 Remote PLC
123. ace software is able to communicate on the network If the network should become inaccessible from this Interface due either to local or network problems this bit will be set to 0 If LAN communication becomes possible it is set to 1 Status Bit 14 Resource Problem This input is set to 1 whenever the Ethernet Interface software experiences a resource problem i e lack of data memory The bit is reset to 0 ona subsequent PLC sweep The Ethernet Interface may or may not be able to continue functioning depending on the severity of the problem Use the PLC Fault Table to understand the problem See Troubleshooting for further information In addition you can use the Station Manager STAT B and LOG commands to further understand the problem Status Bit 16 LAN Interface OK Bit This input is set to 1 by the Ethernet Interface each PLC scan If the Ethernet Interface cannot access the PLC the CPU will set this bit to 0 When this bit is 0 all other Ethernet Interface Status bits are invalid Each Modbus channel has a dedicated status bit Status Bits 17 19 21 79 Connection Open Bit This bit is 1 when a TCP connection exists for the associated channel The bit is O when the connection does not exist either never created or has disconnected for some reason The bit is also set to zero when the PLC goes to STOP because all connections are automatically closed upon STOP transition Status Bits 18 20 22 80 Reserved Whe
124. adecimal word value that gives the rack high byte and slot low byte location of the Ethernet Interface Note that if using GE Fanuc s VersaPro PLC software the leading zeros in this hexadecimal word value are not displayed on screen for example 0004 will appear as 4 Examples H l Hex Word Value Ex Word Value Rack Slot LM90 VersaPro CIMPLICITY ME 0 0004H 16 0004 3 0304H 16 0304 2 10 020AH 16 020A 4 2 0402H 16 0402 wwwgadiamily com EbMaieadserved holmailQmmnnel Commands 4 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete TASK For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface this must always be set to zero Entering an incorrect TASK value may cause the Ethernet Interface to fail FT Output The FT output is set if the PLC CPU rather than the Ethernet Interface detects that the COMMREQ fails In this case the other status indicators are not updated for this COMMREQ The COMMREQ Command Block When the COMMREQ function is initiated the Command Block is sent from the PLC CPU to the Ethernet Interface The Command Block contains the details of a command to be performed by the Interface The address in CPU memory of the Command Block is specified by the IN input of the COMMREQ Function Block This address can be any valid address within a word oriented area of memory R AI or AQ for the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface The Command Block is usually set
125. alid block name specified in datagram D605H D685H Total datagram connection memory exceeded D705H D785H Invalid datagram type specified D805H D885H Point length not allowed D905H D985H Transfer type invalid for this Memory Type selector DAOSH DA85H Null pointer to data in Memory Type selector DBOSH DB85H Invalid Memory Type selector in datagram DCO5H DC85H Unable to find connection address DDO5H DD85H Unable to locate given datagram connection ID DEOSH DE85H Size of datagram connection invalid DFOSH DF85H_ Invalid datagram connection address E005H E085H_ Service in process cannot login E405H E485H Memory Type for this selector does not exist E905H E985H Memory Type selector not valid in context EAOSH EA85H Not logged in to process service request EEOSH EE85H_ Could not return block sizes EFOS5H EF85H_ Programmer is already attached F005H F085H_ Request only valid in stop mode F105H F185H_ Request only valid from programmer F205H F285H__ Invalid program cannot log in F405H F485H__ Invalid input parameter in request F505H F585H_ Invalid password F605H F685H_ Invalid sweep state to set wwwi gadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B Minor Error Codes for Major Error
126. alk off local Error in configuration Verify IP address Subnetwork Mask and default Gateway IP address are correct Connection to remote node failed resuming Underlying communications software detects error without it transferring data resuming If persistent error check connection to LAN and operation of remote node LAN controller fault restart LAN I F User Action HW fault perform power cycle If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA LAN controller Tx underflow attempt Internal system error User Action If problem recovery persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA LAN controller underrun overrun resuming Internal system error User Action If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA LAN data memory exhausted check parms The Ethernet Interface does not have free memory resuming to process communications User Action If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA LAN duplicate MAC Address resuming A frame was received in which the source MAC Address was the same as this station s MAC Address All stations on a network must have a unique MAC address Immediately isolate the offending station it may be necessary to turn it off or disconnect it from the network This station remains Online unless you intervene to take it Offline LAN controller fuse blown off network Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 and Series 90 30 CPU364 The network port fuse is blown port is unusable
127. ame may contain up to 31 characters is case sensitive and must be terminated with a null character zero An error will result if the Network Address name is empty or if the name could not be resolved into the address of an actual device The Network Address name must have each pair of ASCII characters reversed within the PLC memory For example the name PLC_laa P 50H L 4CH C 43H _ SFH 1 31H a 61H a 61H would have 4C50H in Word 20 5F43H in Word 21 6131H in Word 22 and 0061H in Word 23 Words 24 35 all contain OOOOH Note The Network Address name of the remote host must be defined in the Name Table in this Ethernet Interface or be defined at a reachable DNS Name Server See the chapter Network Administration Support for more information Words 36 51 Reserved set to 0 wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 27 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Abort Channel 2001 The Abort Channel command immediately disconnects an active channel from its remote PLC and renders the channel idle The Channel Transfer bit the Channel Error bit and the Detailed Channel Status words for the channel are set to zero Example Command Block Abort Channel 5 Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Dec Hex Word 1 00002 0002 Length of Channel command Data Block 2 words Word 2 00000 0000 Always 0 no wait m
128. ance state depending on the duration that you press the pushbutton Restart Pressing the Ethernet Restart pushbutton momentarily less than 5 seconds requests a restart of the Ethernet Interface When the Restart pushbutton is pressed the three Ethernet LEDs go out When it is released the three Ethernet LEDs flash ON then power up diagnostics run and the software on the Interface is restarted into the Operational state wwwgadiamily com EMaieadsened hotmail com 2 17 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Restart and Enter Software Load State Pressing and holding the Restart pushbutton until the bottom LED STAT turns ON between 5 and 10 seconds forces a restart and requests entrance to the Software Load state A reload is used to install a software update into the module and is not part of normal operation When the Restart pushbutton is pressed all LEDs go out After approximately 5 seconds have elapsed the STAT LED bottom LED comes ON to indicate that the Ethernet Interface will request a reload After the Restart pushbutton is released the three Ethernet LEDs flash ON then power up diagnostics run and the Ethernet Interface waits for the software load with the three Ethernet LEDs blinking in unison Notes Reloading the Ethernet Interface requires the attachment of the PC Software Loader to the RS 232 RJ 11 port and initiating a load with the PC Software Loader The PC Software L
129. and IC693CPU364 see figure below Power LED indicator light 0 9 T 2 inches 51 mm Ln 3 2 inches 81 mm 10 inches 254mm i witch in this Direction to Enable oo s BNC Connector Power Requirement This unit draws 400 mA 5Vdc from the Ethernet Interface via the AAUI connector LED Indicator Light Located on the side of the unit as shown above This green LED turns on to indicate the presence of 5Vdc power to the unit wwweadiamily com EMaileadsemed batmaikeoMeristics ao SQE Slide Switch recessed in 14 Pin AAUI Connector Green LED Power 8 9 10111213 14 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete IC649AEA103 Transceiver Connection Note Transceivers must be compatible with the IEEE 802 3 standard and must have the SQE option Enabled Caution PLC power must be OFF when connecting or disconnecting the transceiver BNC T 45488 BNC erminator or to 10 Z Connector Ta devices Cable Transceiver Cable to thernet Interface oon f AAUI ogo Ethernet Interface www gadfamily com Eltacadseve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete AUI Port The IC697CMM742 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 is equipped with an AUI port for connecting to the network The IEEE 802 3 AUI Attachme
130. and the Series 90 30 CPU364 R AI AQ P or L for the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 SYSID A hexadecimal word value that gives the rack high byte and slot low byte location of the Ethernet Interface For the Series 90 30 CPU364 this must always be set to 0001 to specify rack 0 slot 1 Note that if using GE Fanuc s VersaPro PLC software the leading zeros in this hexadecimal word value are not displayed on screen for example 0004 will appear as 4 Examples Rack Slot Hex Word Value 0 4 0004H 3 4 0304H 2 9 0209H 4 2 0402H Note The Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 is supported only in the main PLC rack rack number 0 wwwieadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete TASK For the Series 90 30 CPU364 this must always be set to 21 decimal 0015H For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface and the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type2 this must always be set to zero Caution Entering an incorrect TASK value may cause the Ethernet Interface to fail OK Output Series 90 70 PLC only The OK output is set if the PLC CPU has successfully delivered the COMMREQ to the Ethernet Interface FT Output The FT output is set if the PLC CPU rather than the Ethernet Interface detects that the COMMREQ fails In this case the other status indicators
131. ant to use to refer to the remote network adapter 5 Click the IP Address field and type the IP address of the remote network adapter then click the OK button wwweadiamily com Ebfaileadservd hotmail com 5 21 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Group Usage The group concept in Ethernet Global Data exchanges allows many EGD devices to simultaneously consume the same data produced by one producing EGD device This capability is valuable for efficient bandwidth utilization in systems where data may be shared among multiple devices This capability is made available by a technique called Multicasting For more information on Multicasting see the topic Multicast IP Addresses in the chapter Network Administration Support Ethernet Global Data supports the use of 32 separate groups each identified by a Group ID 1 32 The EGD Group ID corresponds to a Multicast Class D IP address reserved by the Internet authorities IP addresses 224 0 0 0 through 239 255 255 255 The default Multicast IP addresses used by EGD are Group ID IP Address 1 224 0 7 1 2 224 0 7 2 32 224 0 7 32 These addresses are configurable within the Ethernet Interface using Station Manager but are considered Advanced User Parameters and should only be changed if necessary to avoid a network conflict To enable group usage configure the consumer exchanges to use the same Group ID 1
132. antageous for troubleshooting purposes to know the order in which the alarms were generated Using SNTP the data s synchronized timestamps could help you determine this Notes With SNTP operation the time value passed from the Ethernet Interface to the PLC CPU is used in the PLC only for timestamping EGD exchanges It does not affect the time of the CPU s internal time clock SNTP server dates before January 1 1989 are not supported by the Ethernet Interface Configuring an Ethernet Interface for SNTP SNTP operation must be configured for each Ethernet Interface individually For more information for your particular Ethernet Interface refer to the installation chapter Normal SNTP Operation The Ethernet Interface will synchronize to a remote SNTP time server after receiving two broadcast clock values within a 150 second period The Station Manager can be used to view server status information wwweadiamily com Ebfaileadsenvd hotmail com 5 25 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Multiple SNTP Servers To guard against loss of SNTP timing messages multiple SNTP time servers can be tracked on a network An Ethernet Interface can maintain timing information from up to four total SNTP time servers at a time Each server assigns a stratum number that determines its priority The message from the server with the lowest stratum number is used by the Ethernet Interface until communication w
133. anual wwweadiamily com Ebfailcadsenred hoknaibegpr 6 9 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Local Name Table Name Assignment The second aspect involves building a name table that contains a mapping of symbolic names to associated IP addresses A name assigned in this table is also known as an alias A network address name assigned in the local name table can be resolved by Local Name Table Name Resolution as described in a following section This table may be created as follows For the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 and Series 90 30 CPU364 a name table can only be created using the Windows based PLC programming software if supported For more information refer to the chapter Ethernet Global Data For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface a name table can only be added edited and deleted with the Station Manager command CHNAMETBL This command is documented in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual DNS Name Assignment The third aspect involves connecting and configuring a DNS Domain Name System name server to the network This DNS name server contains a database of name assignments and the corresponding address information IP address for each of these names This DNS name server can be queried to acquire the IP address of a symbolic name known to that DNS name server A network address name assigned in a DNS name
134. any case any data being transferred by the Ethernet Interface at the time of the Restart will be lost The Restart pushbutton is not operable during the diagnostic phase of power up The Ethernet Interface is in diagnostic phase when the EOK LED is BLINKING fast and the other Ethernet LEDs are OFF www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 h hoHnalC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Ports on the CPU364 RS 232 RJ 11 Port Station Manager Port The Station Manager port uses a 6 pin RJ 11 phone jack connector This port is used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface It is also used to connect to the PC Software Loader in case the communications software in the Ethernet Interface needs to be updated An IC693CBL316 cable or equivalent is needed to connect the terminal emulator or Software Loader to the Ethernet Interface see Appendix B Communications Ports Characteristics On earlier versions of the CPU364 module this port was labeled Port 1 RS 232 Ethernet Ports There are two Ethernet ports on the CPU364 Only one port can be used at a time The Ethernet Interface automatically detects the Ethernet port in use special configuration is not required AAUI Transceiver Port The 14 pin AAUI port provides the electrical and mechanical interface to a user pr
135. are not updated for this COMMREQ The COMMREQ Command Block When the COMMREQ function is initiated the Command Block is sent from the PLC CPU to the Ethernet Interface The Command Block contains the details of a Channel command to be performed by the Interface The address in CPU memory of the Command Block is specified by the IN input of the COMMREQ Function Block This address can be any valid address within a word oriented area of memory R AI or AQ for the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface and the Series 90 30 CPU364 R AI AQ P or L for the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 The Command Block is set up using an appropriate programming instruction the BLOCK MOVE or DATA_INIT Series 90 70 PLC only Function Blocks are recommended The Command Block has the following structure Word 1 Data Block Length words Word 2 WAIT NOWAIT Flag Word 3 CRS Word Memory Type Word 4 CRS Word Address Offset Word 5 Reserved Word 6 Reserved Words 7 and up Data Block Channel Command Details When entering information for the Command Block refer to these definitions Word 1 Data Block Length This is the length in words of the Data Block portion of the Command Block The Data Block portion starts at Word 7 of the Command Block The length is measured from the beginning of the Data Block at Word 7 not from the beginning of the Command Block The correct value for each command and the asso
136. as a parameter to the ping command For example at the command prompt type ping 10 0 0 1 Determining if an IP Address Has Already Been Used It is very important not to duplicate IP addresses To determine if you have configured your Ethernet Interface with the same IP address as another node 1 Disconnect your Interface from the LAN 2 Ping the disconnected Interface s IP address If you get an answer to the ping then the chosen IP address is already in use by another node You must correct this situation by assigning unique IP addresses To use another GE Fanuc Ethernet Interface refer to the PING command in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual UNIX is a registered trademark exclusively licensed through X Open Company LTD www gadfamily com Eltacadsev2h hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Chapter Programming SRTP Channel Commands 3 This chapter describes how to program PLC to PLC communications over the Ethernet network using SRTP Channel commands To program Modbus TCP Channel commands see chapter 4 The Communications Request The COMMREQ Function Block and Command Block SRTP Channel Commands Status Data Controlling Communications in the Ladder Program which includes an example Note This chapter applies only to PLCs being used as clien
137. as long as Link Integrity is maintained The one marked with a jagged arrow symbol indicates the presence of 5Vdc power to the unit wwweasiamily com EMaileassermed MbatMabRoMeristics B 15 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete IC649AEA102 Transceiver Connection Note Transceivers must be compatible with the IEEE 802 3 standard and must have the SQE option Enabled Caution PLC power must be OFF when connecting or disconnecting the transceiver a45490 EN 10 Base T RJ 45 Cable Connector Transceiver Cable to Ethernet Interface a o0 i AAUI oso Ethernet Interface www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10Base2 Transceiver Note This transceiver replaces catalog number IC649AEA101 Compliant with the IEEE 802 3 Ethernet specification for 10Base2 A standard BNC connector is mounted on the body of the transceiver for connection to thin coaxial Ethernet cable This unit has an attached 10 254 mm cable with standard 14 pin AAUI connector for connecting to a Series 90 30 Ethernet module IC693CMM321 or CPU with Ethernet interface IC693CPU364 SQE slide switch is set to enabled position at the factory It must be in this position for proper operation with GE Fanuc Ethernet products IC693CMM321
138. atch up with the fields in the Ethernet Global Data dialog box These tables contain a definition of ALL the exchanges in the entire EGD system The Local Producer ID column indicates in which PLC a given exchange is to be configured Record Your Produced Exchange Information The first two rows of data in the Produced Exchanges table indicate that there are two produced exchanges for the PLC identified as 0 0 0 1 The third row of data indicates another exchange produced by the PLC identified as 0 0 0 3 Produced Exchanges Information EXAMPLE Local Exchange Local Adapter Consumer Consume Send Producer Reply Status Producer ID Name Type r Address Type Period Rate Word ID 0 0 0 1 1 PICIA IP Address 10 0 0 50 Always 1000 O Stn 0 0 0 1 3 PLCIB IP Address 10 0 0 41 Always 1000 O S3 0 0 0 3 2 Prc3 IPAddress 10 0 0 23 Always 1000 0 Stat2_ Record Your Consumed Exchange Information The first row of data in the Consumed Exchanges table indicates that there is one consumed exchange for the PLC identified as 0 0 0 1 and that the remote producer is PLC 0 0 0 3 The other two rows indicate consumed exchanges in PLCs 0 0 0 2 and 0 0 0 3 each with the remote producer PLC 0 0 0 1 Consumed Exchanges Information EXAMPLE Local Exchange Group Consumer Update Status Time Producer ID ID ID Period Timeout Word Stamp 2 0 0 3 a Ti i wwweadiamily com Eb
139. ations Request begins when there is power flow to a COMMREQ function in the client PLC At this time the Command Block data is sent from the PLC CPU to the Ethernet Interface The COMMREQ Status word CRS word is returned immediately if the Command Block is invalid If the syntax is correct then the CRS word is returned after the transfer of data GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete COMMREO Function Block and Command Block This section describes the programming structures common to all Communications Requests the COMMREQ Function Block and the Command Block The COMMREQ Function Block The Communications Request is triggered when the logic program passes power to the COMMREQ Function Block Enable COMM REQ Command Block address IN FT Function Faulted logic Rack Slot Location of SYSID the Ethernet Interface Task value TASK Each of the inputs and outputs are discussed in detail below It is important to understand that the Command Block address points to the location in memory you have setup as the Command Block Enable Control logic for activating the COMMREQ Function Block See Section 5 for tips on developing your program IN The location of the Command Block It can be any valid address within a word oriented area of memory R AI or AQ for the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface SYSID A hex
140. attempting to send a mailbox message to the PLC Unable to send mailbox message to PLC because the mail queue is full Unable to communicate with PLC Backplane driver not initialized or unable to acquire a dual port memory semaphore The backplane driver could not access the PLC Invalid binding on the message sent to the backplane driver The message could not be sent to its destination because the mailbox was not open The maximum number of transfers to the destination is already taking place wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 39 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Minor Error Codes for Major Error Code 11H at Remote Server PLC Continued 2E11H The maximum number of transfers of this transfer type is already taking place 2F 1H 3711H The backplane task could not be registered because the message response handler was not specified 3811H The backplane task could not be registered because the unsolicited mailbox message handler was not specified 3911H The backplane task could not be registered because a required parameter was not specified 3E11H Request failed because the PLC s Service Request Processor is not initialized 3F11H Request failed due to an error in the remote device most likely running out of Dual Port RAM text buffers 4011H Unable to free dual port memory that was allocated for a connection or block transfer area 4111H The backplane task
141. ay share some or all of the same variables even if the exchanges are produced and or consumed at different rates It is possible to configure more EGD than a PLC can transfer either due to processing limitations in the Ethernet Interface or in the underlying network especially in 1OMbit networks If you configure too much EGD you will experience high levels of consumer timeouts in some or all of your consumed exchanges In this case you must reduce the EGD load Possible approaches to reducing the load include Increase the production period especially if the period is more frequent than 2x the minimum time in which the data is needed Redefine the exchanges to use fewer exchanges each with more data This can often be achieved by making use of EGD groups rather than producing a directed exchange to several destinations a single exchange produced to the group can contain all the data and each consumer can transfer the data of interest from the exchange For Series 90 70 PLCs consider adding an addition Ethernet Interface to the rack and spreading the EGD exchanges www eadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Allowable Data Types in Exchanges Boolean type variables are not allowed neither are Boolean Array variables If discrete point references such as I or Q are used to define a variable yo
142. below for a complete listing of major and minor error codes Major Error Codes The following tables list the error codes that are reported in the COMMREQ Status word after the execution of aCOMMREQ function Error Status Major Error Description Hexadecimal 01H Successful Completion 87H The client PLC CPU s Service Request Queue is full 8BH Illegal Service Request The requested service is either not defined or not supported This value is returned in lieu of the actual service request error 01H to avoid confusion with the normal successful COMMREQ completion 90H Client API Error See the following table of Minor Error codes 91H Modbus TCP Error Codes at server An error was detected at the Modbus TCP server See the following table for the Minor Error codes wwweasiamily com Elhaileagsenvehh MORNE Manne Commands 4 23 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Minor Error Codes The meaning of each Minor Error Code depends upon the Major Error Code for which it is defined Consult the appropriate Minor Error Code table for the indicated Major Error Code Minor Error Codes for Major Error Codes 90H Client API Error Error Status Hexadecimal Service Request Error Description 8190H COMMREQ data block too short for the command 8390H Invalid server memory type 8690H Zero server unit length is not allowed 8
143. bit CRS word will receive the initial status of the communication request The location of the CRS word is assigned for each COMMREQ function in the COMMREQ Command Block Detailed Channel Status Words DCS Words This detailed status data is retrieved for a particular channel using the Retrieve Detailed Channel Status Command FT Output of the COMMREQ Function Block This output indicates that the PLC CPU detected errors in the COMMREQ Function Block and or Command Block and did not pass the Command Block to the Ethernet Interface The Logic Program Controlling Execution of the COMMREQ Function Block Care must be taken in developing the logic that controls the execution of the COMMREQ function The COMMREQ function must be initiated by a one shot to prevent the COMMREQ from being executed repeatedly each CPU scan as this will overrun the capability of the Ethernet Interface and possibly require a manual restart Checking certain status bits before initiating a COMMREQ function is also important In particular the LAN Interface OK bit should be used as an interlock to prevent execution of the COMMREQ function when the Ethernet Interface is not operational Following initiation of aCOMMREQ on a channel no further COMMREQs should be issued to that channel until a non zero CRS word has been returned to the program from the Ethernet Interface www tadfamily com Eltacadse ved hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document
144. bits as zero 0 For further information refer to Chapter 5 Network Administration Support Tally Counters kept by the LAN Interface to indicate load and performance information TCP IP Commonly refers to the entire suite of protocols that run over IP Includes but is not limited to IP TCP ARP UDP ICMP and IGMP Time Synchronization The ability to synchronize the internal time clock of an Ethernet Interface to time signals from a remote time server on the network Time synchronization is useful in conjunction with Ethernet Global Data Topology The pattern formed by the physical medium interconnecting the nodes of a network Transceiver See Medium Attachment Unit MAU Transceiver Cable See Attachment Unit Interface AUT Transmission Control Protocol TCP The Internet standard connection oriented transport level protocol See also Internet Protocol IP Transmission Path Delay The time required for a bit to travel between the two most distant network nodes in a bus network Unicast The transmission scheme in which exactly one receiver is specified as the target of a transmission Universal Address Administration See Global Address Administration User Datagram Protocol UDP The Internet standard connectionless transport level protocol www gadfamily com Eltacadse veh hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete
145. byte mode 86 Discrete global data table bit mode Read only memory cannot be written to Word 11 Local PLC Memory Address Word 11 determines the starting address in the local PLC in which the data from the remote device is to be stored The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 10 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified Valid ranges of values depend on the PLC s memory ranges The user is responsible for assuring that this area is large enough to contain the requested data without overwriting other application data Word 12 Remote Device Address Word 12 specifies the address in the remote Modbus TCP device Note The function code determines the Modbus address area 3xxxx or 4xxxx Word 12 is the address within this area eg you enter 200 not 30200 in this example Word 13 Number Registers in Remote Device Words 13 specifies the quantity of registers 16bit words to read from the remote device Word 14 Unit Identifier Word 14 is the Modbus TCP Unit Identifier a special control code used in a Modbus TCP message The default is 1 This value is 1 for most Modbus TCP devices except if a Ethernet to Serial bridge is used to multidrop to Modbus RTU devices wwweasiamily com Elhaileagsenvehh MORNE Manne Commands 4 13 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we w
146. c recommends purchasing rather than making 10Base2 cables wwweasiamily com EMaileassermed MbatMabRoMeristics B 11 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete www eadfamily com Eltacadseveh hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 Connecting the CMM742 Ethernet Interface to a 10Base2 Network with T Connector a45629 To Other Network Devices 10Base2 Connector Ethernet Interface Terminator or to Other Network Devices Connecting the CMM742 Ethernet Interface to a 10Base2 Network with F Connector a45630 10Base2 Connector 10Base2 Cable 10Base2 Ethernet Interface Terminator or to Other Network Devices Devices To Other Network The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B AAUI Port The IC693CMM321 Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface and the Series 90 30 CPU364 Embedded Ethernet Interface are equipped with an Apple Attachment Unit Interface AAUI port for connecting to the network Compatible transceivers can be purchased that support 10Base5 and 10Base2 coaxial cables as well as twisted pair and fiber optic cables The AAUI standard makes your selection of transceiver and trunk cable medium transparent to the Ethernet Interface Your network cables must meet the applicable IEEE 802 3 standards This section presents the information you need to specify the cables and related compon
147. cally detects the attached cable and will work properly with either straight through or crossover cables by default Caution The two Ethernet ports on the Ethernet Interface must not be connected directly or indirectly to the same device The connections in an Ethernet network based on twisted pair cabling must form a tree and not a ring otherwise duplication of packets and network overload may occur Caution The IEEE 802 3 standard strongly discourages the manual configuration of duplex mode for a port as would be possible using Advanced User Parameters Before manually configuring duplex mode for a CPU374 port using advanced user parameters AUP be sure that you know the characteristics of the link partner and are aware of the consequences of your selection Setting both the speed and duplex AUP s on a CPU374 port will disable the port s auto negotiation function If its link partner is not similarly manually configured this can result in the link partner concluding an incorrect duplex mode In the words of the IEEE standard Connecting incompatible DTE MAU combinations such as full duplex mode DTE to a half duplex mode MAU or a full duplex station DTE or MAU to a repeater or other half duplex network can lead to severe network performance degradation increased collisions late collisions CRC errors and undetected data corruption The switch ports support both shielded and unshielded cables
148. can be established by a Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Up to 16 channels numbered 1 16 can be established by a Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface If the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface supports Modbus TCP Channels the 16 available channels are shared between SRTP and Modbus TCP The channel number is specified in the Command Block for the Channel command The channel can be monitored using the Channel Status bits and the Detailed Channel Status words wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 3 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Status Data There are several types of status data available to the client PLC logic program LAN Interface Status Bits LIS Bits The LIS bits comprise bits 1 16 of the 80 bit status area The location of this 80 bit status area is assigned using the Configuration software in the Status Address field The LIS bits contain information on the status of the Local Area Network LAN and the Ethernet Interface itself Channel Status Bits The Channel Status bits comprise bits 17 80 64 bits of the 80 bit status area When used for SRTP channels these bits consist of an error bit and a data transfer bit for each of the channels that can be established 32 channels for the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface 16 channels for the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interfaces Status bits for unused channels are always set to zero COMMREQ Status Word CRS Word The 16
149. cape key to return to the I O Configuration screen The slot containing the Ethernet Interface will be displayed as JUMPER 3 Press the Escape key to save the PLC configuration to disk 4 Use of the dummy module type above will always result in a Configuration Mismatch error at each power up configuration store or Ethernet Interface restart To prevent this error from putting the PLC into STOP FAULT state change the severity of this error as follows From the main PLC Configurator screen press the cpu soft key F2 to display the CPU configuration then press the fltcfg key F5 to display the Fault Categories Press the down arrow key repeatedly until Fault Type is System Config Mismatch then press the Tab key to change the Fault Category from F Fatal to D Diagnostic Press the Escape key twice to store the fault categories to the PLC CPU and return to the main PLC Configurator screen 5 Store the PLC configuration to the PLC Now configure the Ethernet Interface Type 2 locally using its onboard Station Manager Refer to GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual for complete information on Station Manager operation www cadfamily com Eltaicadseveh hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 2 6 Connect a standard ASCII terminal or PC based terminal e
150. cation SD Send Data and RD Receive Data are the same as TxD and RXD used in the Series Six PLC A and B are the same as and A and B denote outputs and A and B denote inputs Termination resistance for the Receive Data RD signal needs to be connected only on units at the end of multidrop lines This termination is made by connecting a jumper between pins 9 and 10 inside the 15 pin D shell the termination is provided in the adapters and cables specified in the next table EMA CARSRINALMRQUNALL AMG cries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Part Numbers for GE Fanuc Cables and Converters It is recommended that you use cables available from GE Fanuc Automation to connect your PC to this port Refer to the table below for part numbers Cables for Connecting the 15 Pin D Type RS 485 Port to the RS 232 Port on a PC Part Number Description IC690ACC901 GE Fanuc Horner Mini Converter with Cable see the following figure or IC690ACC900 GE Fanuc Converter only requires cable IC690CBL303 and either IC690CBL702 or IC690CBL705 below IC690CBL303 15 pin RS 422 Serial Cable IC690CBL702 _ 9 pin RS 232 Serial Cable IC690CBL705 _ 25 pin RS 232 Serial Cable Cable Assembly IC690ACC901 Cable assembly IC690ACC901 is needed to connect the 9 pin or 25 pin serial port on a personal computer to the 15 pin D ty
151. ce module does NOT support autonegotiation of half full duplex Attempting full duplex operation of this interface with a repeater or half duplex network including auto negotiating hubs and switches can cause severe network performance degradation increased collisions late collisions CRC errors and undetected data corruption If the module is configured in the Full Duplex mode see above you can change it back to its default value of Half Duplex by using the Station Manager CHPARM command wwwgadiamily com EMaieadsened hotmail com 2 11 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Verifying Proper Power Up of the CMM321 Powering up the Ethernet Interface After configuring the CMM321 follow the procedure below to be sure it is operating correctly 1 Turn power OFF to the PLC for 3 5 seconds then turn the power back ON This will initiate a series of diagnostic tests The OK LED will blink indicating the progress of power up 2 The LEDs will have the following pattern upon successful power up At this time the Ethernet Interface is fully operational and on line LED Ethernet Interface Online OK ON LAN ON or blinking FDX ON Solid if Full Duplex mode is active OFF if Full Duplex mode is not active STAT ON If STAT LED is OFF check the PLC Fault Table Alternatively use the Station Manager LOG command as explained in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications
152. ciated length of each command is specified in the next section Word 2 WAIT NOWAIT Flag This flag must be set to zero for TCP IP Ethernet Communications wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 7 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete COMMREQ Status Word The Ethernet Interface updates the CRS word to show success or failure of the command Command words 3 and 4 specify the PLC memory location of the CRS word Word 3 COMMREQ Status Word Memory Type This word specifies the memory type for the CRS word The memory types are listed in the table below Type Value Value Description Decimal Hex JR 8 08H Register memory word mode AI 10 OAH Analog input memory word mode PAQ 12 OCH Analog output memory word mode l 16 10H Discrete input memory byte mode 70 46H Discrete input memory bit mode PQ 18 12H Discrete output memory byte mode 72 48H Discrete output memory bit mode T 20 14H Discrete temporary memory byte mode 74 4AH Discrete temporary memory bit mode M 22 16H Discrete momentary internal memory byte mode 76 4CH Discrete momentary internal memory bit mode G 56 38H Discrete global data table byte mode 86 56H Discrete global data table bit mode Word 4 COMMREQ Status Word Address Offset This word contains the offset within the memory type selected The status word address offset is a zero based number F
153. ck is invalid If the syntax is correct then the CRS word is returned after the first significant event upon failure to establish a channel correctly and in a timely manner or upon the first successful transfer of data Once the channel is successfully set up to the server PLC the Ethernet Interface performs the periodic reads as specified in the Command Block wwwisasiamily com EtMailecadsanvan ONAE as 3 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete COMMREO Function Block and Command Block This section describes the programming structures common to all Communications Requests the COMMREQ Function Block and the Command Block The COMMREQ Function Block The Communications Request is triggered when the logic program passes power to the COMMREQ Function Block Enable gt gt 7 gt 77777 COMM OK Series 90 70 PLCs only REQ Command Block address IN FT Function Faulted logic Rack Slot Location of SYSID the Ethernet Interface Task value TASK Each of the inputs and outputs are discussed in detail below Remember that the Command Block address points to a location in memory that has been set up as the Command Block Enable Control logic for activating the COMMREQ Function Block IN The location of the Command Block It can be any valid address within a word oriented area of memory R AI or AQ for the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface
154. d 7 02002 07D2 Retrieve Detailed Channel Status Command number client PLC the PLC Word 8 00005 0005 gt Channel number 5 that initiates the Word 9 00008 0008 Local PLC Memory type to store Detailed Chan Stat R communications Word 10 00100 0064 Local PLC Starting address R100 request Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number The command parameter in Word 7 requests that Detailed Channel Status words be returned If the command is processed successfully the Detailed Channel Status words will be written to the location specified in Words 9 and 10 Then the CRS word will indicate successful completion of the command If the specified channel is not currently in use the latest status will be returned wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 29 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Word 8 Channel Number The channel number in Word 8 specifies the channel whose status is to be read This value must be a channel number in the range of 1 32 for Series 90 70 PLCs and 1 16 for Series 90 30 PLCs Word 9 Local PLC Memory Type Words 9 and 10 specify the starting point in the client CPU memory where the Detailed Channel Status words are to be written The length of the transfer is implied and is equal to 2 words Word 10 L
155. d by retransmission Channel An association in a client PLC between the PLC application program and an Ethernet Interface in that same PLC The ladder program initiates the channel when it issues a Communications Request COMMREQ to its local Ethernet Interface In turn this local Ethernet Interface initiates a connection to a remote server and then makes periodic data transfers between the client and server PLCs See also Connection Channel Status Bits The Channel Status bits comprise bits 17 80 64 bits of the status indication area For SRTP Channels these bits consist of an error bit and a data transfer bit for each of the channels that can be established For Modbus TCP Channels there is a Connection Open bit and one reserved bit for each possible channel Status bits for unused channels are always set to zero Client A node that requests network services from a server A client PLC initiates a communications request See also Server Collision A condition that results from concurrent transmissions by two or more nodes on the transmission medium Collision Domain A single CSMA CD network If two or more nodes are within the same collision domain and both transmit at the same time a collision will occur Nodes separated by a repeater are within the same collision domain Nodes separated by a bridge are within different collision domains Command Dictionary Provides an alphabetical listing of the LAN Interface commands Command
156. d displays detailed information about a specified SRTP communication channel The STAT command provides the current status on the operation of the Interface Refer to GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual for information on how to access and use the Station Manager software www cadfamily com Eltaicadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete What to do if you Cannot Solve the Problem If after using the troubleshooting guide you still cannot solve your problem call GE Fanuc Automation NA Please have the following information available when you call The Name and Catalog Number marked on the product Description of symptoms of problem Depending on the problem you may also be asked for the following information The ladder logic application program and the PLC sweep time at the time the problem occurred A listing of the configuration parameters for the Ethernet Interface that failed A description of the network configuration This should include the number of PLCs and host computers accessing the network the type of network cable used e g twisted pair fiber optic etc length of network cable and the number and manufacturer of transceivers hubs and network switches used wwwigadiamily com Ebailecadssivail botmail com 7 3 The document is for study only if t
157. d gt _ is the unique dotted decimal IP address for this node Enter the Subnet Mask as follows chsosw subnet_mask lt a b c d gt where lt a b c d gt is the dotted decimal subnet mask for this network segment Enter the Gateway IP Address as follows chsosw gateway lt a b c d gt where lt a b c d gt is the unique dotted decimal IP address of the gateway device Enter the Name Server IP Address as follows chsosw name_server lt a b c d gt where lt a b c d gt is the unique dotted decimal IP address of the name server device The CHSOSW command may also be used to change the parameters for either serial port on the Ethernet Interface in cases where the default serial port configuration values are not used Refer to GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual for further information A typical CHSOSW command is shown below chsosw ip address 10 0 0 1 Once entered the configuration parameters are retained in non volatile flash memory for use each time the Ethernet Interface is powered up or restarted Configuration needs to be re entered only when changing one or more configuration parameters www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hOHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 2 10 Use the SOSW Station Manager command to verify that all configuration parameters have been set to t
158. ddress and name server IP address to 0 0 0 0 Note If the isolated network is ever connected to another network the IP addresses 10 0 0 1 through 10 0 0 255 must not be used and the subnet mask gateway IP address and name server IP address must be assigned by the network administrator The IP addresses must be assigned so that they are compatible with the connected network Refer to Chapter 6 Network Administration Support for more information on addressing See also Determining If an IP Address Has Already Been Used in this section Network Time Sync Selection of the method used to synchronize the real time clocks over the network Currently the choices are None DISABLED for no network time synchronization and SNTP ENABLED for synchronization to remote SNTP servers on the network AAUI Transceiver Power Watts Allows you to account for the power consumption added by the AAUI Transceiver attached to the Ethernet module measured in Watts The valid range is 0 0 to 2 00 The default value is 0 0 www gadfamily com Eltapcadse v2 hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Serial Port Parameters These parameters are for the RS 232 RJ 11 serial port on the CPU364 module This port is used for both the Station Manager connection and for connecting to the Software Loader The Software Loader settings take effect automa
159. der program The use of the LAN Interface OK bit in the LAN Interface Status Word was described in the ladder program fragment above Some of the status data can be used to troubleshoot your program in its developmental stage The two primary sources of this data are the FT Output on the COMMREQ Function Block and the COMMREQ Status word CRS word FT Output is ON If after executing a COMMREQ Function the FT Output is ON then there is a programming error in one or more of the following areas Invalid rack slot specified The module at this rack slot is unable to receive a COMMREQ Command Block Invalid Task ID For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface this value should always be zero Invalid Data Block length 0 or greater than 128 COMMREQ Status Word is Zero 0 and FT Output is OFF If after executing a COMMREQ function the CRS word is zero 0 and the FT Output is OFF then the Command Block has been sent to the Ethernet Interface but no status has been returned yet If this condition persists check the PLC Fault Table for information COMMREQ Status Word is Not One 1 If after executing a COMMREQ function the CRS word is not one 1 indicating success then there were Errors in the Command Block the Channel command code or parameters or The command parameters were valid but there was an error in completing the request If the CRS word does not contain a 1 indicating success then it contains either a 0 or a c
160. document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Words 20 23 Remote PLC IP Address Words 20 23 specify the four integers one integer per word of the dotted decimal IP address of the remote PLC to be accessed Words 24 27 Remote PLC Program Name Words 24 27 specify the case sensitive zero terminated and padded program name also called task name which can be found through the PROG Station Manager command on the server Ethernet Interface to be used with access to remote P or L memory These words are required only for access to such memory and will be ignored if the Memory Type field is not P or L See Note below Words 28 31 Remote PLC Program Block Name Words 28 31 specify the case sensitive zero terminated and padded program block name which can be found in the program block declaration in the server ladder program to be used with access to remote L memory These words are required only for access to such memory and will be ignored if the Memory Type field is not P or L Note The Program Name Words 24 27 and Program Block Name Words 28 31 must have each pair of ASCII characters reversed within the PLC memory For example the name MARY M 4DH A 41H R 52H Y 59H would have 414DH in the first word and 5952H in the second word www gadfamily com Eltapcadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document
161. dotted decimal IP address of the remote host to be accessed wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 25 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Example 2 Command Block Example using a Network Address name This example is the same as Example except that the Network Address name of the remote host PLC_1aa is used instead of its IP address For more information on Network Address names see the chapter Network Administration Support Establish a channel Channel 7 to a remote host application server with a Network Address name of PLC_laa Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Send local PLC registers RS0 RS7 to remote host Repeat the send 10 times once every 7 seconds with a timeout of 500 ms for each transfer The term local PLC is used here to identify the client PLC the PLC that initiates the communications request The term SRTP Server is used here to identify the Host server Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4 Word 5 Word 6 Word 7 Word 8 Word 9 Word 10 Word 11 Word 12 Word 13 Word 14 Word 15 Word 16 Word 17 Word 18 Word 19 Word 20 Word 21 Word 22 Word 23 Word 24 Word 25 Word 26 Word 27 Word 28 Word 29 Word 30 Word 31 Word 32 Word 33 Word 34 Word 35 Word 36 51 Dec 00045 00000 00008 00009 00000 00000 02010 00007 00010 000A Hex 00003 00007 00050 00008
162. ds 3 28 3 30 Local PLC 3 10 3 15 3 17 4 9 4 10 4 12 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 Local Table Name Resolution 6 10 Logic program controlling execution of the COMMREQ 3 4 4 3 MAC Addresses 6 12 Machine Edition software 2 22 2 33 Maintenance state 2 14 2 18 2 28 2 43 2 53 new style IC693CMM321 2 4 Media 1 5 Modbus tables E 1 Monitoring the communications channel 3 46 4 34 Multicast IP Addresses 6 3 Multiple Gateways and Subnets 6 5 Multiple Gateways Configuring 6 7 wwweadiamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Index N Name Assignment 6 9 Name Resolution 6 10 Name Server IP address 2 9 2 24 2 34 2 49 Name Usage 6 11 Naming Conventions 5 9 Network Address 3 9 3 13 3 16 3 22 3 25 3 27 Network Address Naming Architecture 6 9 Network Administration Support 6 1 New style Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface Board Indicators 2 3 Configuration Parameters 2 9 Configuring 2 8 Installing 2 6 Powering up 2 12 Requirements to Install 2 6 Restart Pushbutton 2 3 Serial Ports 2 5 Number of repetitions for a Channel Command 3 11 3 18 3 23 4 9 4 12 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 O OK Output of the COMMREQ Function Block 3 32 Older Series 90 70 PLC CPUs Using 1C697CMM742 with D 1 Operational state 2 14 2 28 2 39 2 53 P Part numbers for the Ethernet Interfaces 1 1 PC Softwar
163. ds to 1 hour representing the scheduled repetition period at which the data is to be produced on the network In the PLC the Ethernet Interface will produce the data at this interval independent of when the CPU updates the data sample The default is 200 milliseconds For the CPU374 the range is 2 milliseconds to 1 hour The CPU374 also allows a zero producer period which indicates producing as fast as possible Round this value to the nearest 10 milliseconds 2 milliseconds for the CPU374 before you enter it The producer period has a resolution of 10 milliseconds 2 milliseconds for the CPU374 If you enter a value such as 12 milliseconds the actual producer period will be rounded up to 20 milliseconds not rounded for the CPU374 Reply Rate Currently not used Status Word A variable that identifies the memory location where the status value for the produced exchange will be placed Valid memory types are listed later in this chapter Exchange Variables A list of data elements making up the snapshot of internal memory that will be produced on the network Each exchange has one variable list which will be transmitted to the consuming device as a contiguous set of bytes A maximum of 100 variables can be defined in one exchange definition and the size of all combined elements cannot exceed 1400 bytes The data types BOOL and BOOL_STATE are not allowed for exchange variables wwweadiamily com Ebfailecadservd hetmail com 5 13 T
164. ducer period and the consumer period to the same value This makes the system easier to troubleshoot and makes network resource usage more efficient Do not produce and consume data faster than is required by your application This reduces the load on the network and on the devices providing capacity for other transfers For example an exchange intended for an HMI host usually does not need to be produced any faster than 500 milliseconds or so In fact a 1 to 3 second producer period may be sufficient for this case Exchange Limitations and Recommendations The limitations and recommendations for consumer and producer exchanges are as follows Maximum Number of Exchanges The maximum number of exchanges can be divided up into any combination of producer and consumer exchanges For a single Series 90 70 PLC system which may contain multiple Ethernet Interfaces the maximum combined number of exchanges that can be configured is 255 For the Series 90 30 CPU364 and the Series 90 30 CPU374 the maximum number of exchanges that can be configured is 128 Maximum Data Size of an Exchange The total data size of a single exchange cannot exceed 1400 bytes The total size is defined to be the sum of the data lengths of all of the variables within the list Number of Variables Up to 100 variables can be configured per exchange The minimum is one variable per exchange Different exchanges may have different variables and they m
165. dule s applicable parameters click the OK button The module will now appear in the selected slot Store the configuration to the PLC so these settings can take effect For more information refer to Online Help in the PLC programming software www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC lGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Configuring the Interface Using the Logicmaster 90 30 Configuration Software To configure the Ethernet Interface access the I O Configuration rack screen in the Logicmaster 90 30 Configuration Package and do the following 1 Move the cursor to the CPU slot slot1 and press Zoom F10 to access the CPU configuration screen 2 Ifthe current CPU is the CPU364 continue to step 3 Otherwise press CPU F1 to access the CPU selection menu Use the arrow keys to highlight the CPU364 IC693CPU364 press Enter to select it and then press Y to replace the module 3 The initial configuration screen contains the actual CPU configuration parameters Press Page Down to access the configuration screens for the Ethernet Interface Ethernet parameters and RS 232 serial port parameters 4 Configure the Ethernet parameters Refer to the topic Configuration Parameters that follows for more information on these fields 5 Optionally after you have assigned the Ethernet parameters press Page Down to display the serial p
166. e For example the normal PLC mode for EGD operation is RUN with Outputs enabled In this PLC mode EGD remains configured and exchanges are both produced and consumed If the PLC mode is set to STOP with I O disabled the Producer ID remains configured but production and consumption stop When configuration is lost the EGD configuration must be stored again Producer ID remains Configuration Based Exchanges configured if continue to be PLC Mode or Action Configured Produced Consumed PLC Mode RUN Outputs Enabled RUN Outputs Disabled RUN SUSPEND I O STOP I O Enabled STOP I O Disabled PLC Action RUN Store Logic YES YES STOP Store Logic YES YES STOP Clear Logic YES YES STOP Config Store Replaced Replaced STOP Clear Config NO NO PLC Power Cycle YES YES Ethernet Interface YES YES Restart RUN SUSPEND I O refers to the SUSIO logic function Producer ID and exchange definitions are replaced Producer ID and exchanges continue to be configured or not depending on the PLC mode prior to the action Note The DOIO logic function does not affect EGD production or consumption wwweadiamily com Ebfaileadsenvd hotmail com 5 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Configuration Planning Producer and Consumer Periods for PLCs Follow these guidelines for the producer and consumer periods Set the pro
167. e Loader 1 7 Period for Channel Commands 3 11 3 18 3 24 4 9 4 13 4 14 4 15 PING Station Manager command 2 15 2 29 2 40 2 54 Pinging the TCP IP Interfaces on the Network 2 15 2 29 2 40 2 54 PLC Fault Table 7 4 Ports 10Base2 B 11 10Base T B 6 B 8 AAUI B 13 AUI B 19 Characteristics B 1 RS 232 B 2 RS 485 B 4 Ports Ethernet Series 90 30 CPU364 2 19 2 31 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 44 Ports Serial Index 3 new style Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface 2 5 Series 90 30 CPU364 with Embedded Ethernet Interface 2 19 Powering up new style IC693CMM321 2 12 Power up problems 2 12 2 26 2 37 2 51 Power up states new style IC693CMM321 2 13 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 27 2 38 Series 90 70 TCP IP Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 52 Private Networks IP addresses 6 3 Problems During Power up 2 12 2 26 2 37 2 51 Produced Data Exchange Definition 5 12 Producer 5 3 Producer ID 5 3 R Reference assignments for Modbus E 1 Reloading Ethernet Interface software 2 4 2 18 2 42 Remote PLC 3 10 3 15 3 17 4 9 4 10 4 12 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 Repetitions number of for Channel Commands 3 11 3 18 3 23 4 9 4 12 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 Resource problem bit 3 34 4 22 Restart 2 17 2 31 2 42 Restart Pushbutton new style Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface 2 3 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 17 2 31 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 42 Re tasking a channel 3 9 Retrieve D
168. e below to verify that the Ethernet Interface is operating correctly 1 Turn power OFF to the PLC for 3 5 seconds then turn the power back ON This will initiate a series of diagnostic tests The EOK LED will blink indicating the progress of power up 2 The Ethernet LEDs will have the following pattern upon successful power up At this time the Ethernet Interface is fully operational and on line LED Ethernet Interface Online EOK ON LAN ON Traffic STAT ON If STAT LED is OFF check the PLC Fault Table Alternatively use the Station Manager LOG command as explained in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual Problems During Power up If a problem is detected during power up the Ethernet Interface may not transition directly to the Operational State If the Interface does not transition to Operational check the LED pattern on the Interface and refer to the following chart and table for corrective action wwwgadiamily com EMaieadsened hotmail com 2 37 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete States of the Series 90 30 CPU374 with Embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface 1 The Ethernet Interface is initialized by 7 Powering up the PLC Ethernet Interface m Storing a new configuration to the PLC with changes for the Ethernet Interface Initializing Pressing the Restart pushbutton Q approx 2 6 z Issuing
169. e configured by the 1C641 PLC Configuration software Instead a dummy module must be configured in place of the Ethernet Interface the Station Manager software within the Ethernet Interface is then used to enter configuration data directly at the module First create a dummy entry in the PLC Configuration for the rack and slot where the Ethernet Interface is installed 1 Connect a PC running the IC641 PLC Configuration software to the PLC via the built in serial port on the PLC CPU module Then access the I O Configuration screen of the IC641 PLC Configuration software 2 Move the cursor to the rack and slot where the Ethernet Interface Type 2 is installed This slot must be configured as a 3rd Party VME module as follows From the I O Configuration screen press the vme soft key F7 From the next screen press the vme soft key F1 then move the cursor to the 3RD PARTY VME MODULE selection and press the Enter key to select Press the Escape key to return to the I O Configuration screen The slot containing the Ethernet Interface will be displayed as 3PY VME If there is no vme soft key in the I O Configuration screen configure the rack and slot where the Ethernet Interface Type 2 is installed as a Blank jumper as follows Press the m70_ io soft key F1 From the next screen press the other soft key F7 then move the cursor to the BLANK SLOT INTERRUPT JUMPER selection and press the Enter key to select Press the Es
170. e tables on the next sweep wwwieadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Naming Conventions If you follow consistent naming conventions for your Ethernet Global Data system it will be much easier to configure EGD These naming conventions include the following items Equipment Folder Name This is the name of the program folder that you assign when creating a hardware configuration and program for a PLC It can represent the name of a PLC Producer ID This identifies the EGD producer and is configured in the Ethernet Global Data dialog box Adapter Name The adapter name is configured in the Module Parameters dialog box for the Ethernet Interface This name is also referenced in the Ethernet Global Data dialog box of the PLC programming software Note that for the CPU374 this field is not editable and displays the rack and slot of the CPU Alias Configured in the Name Resolution and Routing Table Rack Operation in the PLC programming software if you have decided to use local name table name resolution to connect to consumers CCU Device Name This is the name used by the Communication Configuration Utility CCU which is part of the Windows based PLC programming software and Host Communication Toolkit to identify an Ethernet Interface within a PLC to which you want to connect W
171. ecified in Word 18 Word 19 must contain 32 decimal Words 20 35 Remote PLC Network Address Name Words 20 35 specify the Network Address name of the remote PLC as an ASCII character string The Network Address name may contain up to 31 characters is case sensitive and must be terminated with a null character zero An error will result if the Network Address name is empty or if the name could not be resolved into the address of an actual device The Network Address name must have each pair of ASCII characters reversed within the PLC memory For example the name PLC_laa P 50H L 4CH C 43H _ SFH 1 31H a 61H a 61H would have 4CS50H in Word 20 5F43H in Word 21 6131H in Word 22 and 0061H in Word 23 Words 24 35 all contain OOOOH Note The Network Address name of the remote PLC must be defined in the Name Table in this Ethernet Interface or be defined as the Network Address name of the remote PLC or else be defined at a reachable DNS Name Server See the chapter Network Administration Support for more information Words 36 51 Reserved set to 0 Words 52 55 Remote PLC Program Name Words 52 55 specify the case sensitive zero terminated and padded program name also called task name which can be found through the PROG Station Manager command on the server Ethernet Interface to be used with access to remote P or L memory These words are required on
172. ected time between transfers For example if you expect to transfer data about once per minute set the read write period to about two minutes This will cause a TCP connection to be created and held open for two minutes 2 Set up the ladder program to A Issue the first COMMREQ and wait for the first transfer to complete which will be indicated when the COMMREQ Status CRS word is changed to 1 B Then before the read write period expires at which time the second and final transfer is sent and the TCP connection is dropped issue the next COMMREQ with the same parameters as specified in step 1 This will re task the channel to use the existing TCP connection instead of opening a new one and will send another data transfer restarting the timer for the read write period Repeat step 2B for each successive data transfer desired www gadfamily com Eltacadseveh hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Chapter Programming Modbus TCP Channel Commands 4 This chapter describes how to program communications over the Ethernet network using Modbus TCP Channel commands Details of the Communications Request COMMREQ function and the Modbus TCP Channel commands are presented here To program SRTP Channel commands see chapter 3 To use the Modbus TCP Server capability within the Ethernet Interfact consult Appendix E about translatin
173. ed between the PLCs Note For this discussion of the Command Blocks assume that the operator programmer is local to the client PLC and the server is remote from this operator programmer The Ethernet Interface automatically manages the establishment of communications and the periodic data transfer Parameters in the Command Block specify the frequency and direction of the transfer and the memory locations in the client and server to be used in the transfer Aborting and Re tasking a Channel There are four ways a channel can be aborted 1 When the PLC CPU is stopped all channels in use are aborted automatically 2 A channel or all channels can be aborted by issuing an Abort Channel command 3 A channel in use can be re tasked by issuing an establish command for its channel number This aborts the previous channel operation and then performs the new channel operation 4 A channel is also automatically aborted if a fatal error occurs Retrieving Detailed Status on the Channel There are several forms of status available to the ladder program One form of status is obtained through the Retrieve Detailed Channel Status RDCS command described later in this section Specifying a Network Address All establish commands must identify the remote server device with which data will be transferred The remote device may be specified in two ways By IP address or by a name previously defined with the proper IP address Examples of each Networ
174. ed during the write period the Channel Error bit and Detailed Channel Status words will be set to indicate a non fatal period error The pending transfer can still complete after the period error occurs For Channel commands set up to issue multiple writes the next write transfer will be issued only after the pending write transfer completes If the Number of Time Units is zero a subsequent transfer will be issued as soon as the previous transfer completes In this case no period errors are reported by the Channel Error bit Word 12 Timeout for Each Write Word 12 specifies the time in hundredths of a second the Ethernet Interface will wait for a write transfer to complete before setting the Channel Error bit and Detailed Channel Status bits to indicate a non fatal timeout error The transfer can still complete even after a timeout occurs As a result an application can choose what to do if one occurs If the timeout value is specified as zero no timeout errors will be reported For most applications a timeout need not be specified because the write period in effect acts as a timeout Word 12 should be zero for no timeout However there are two special circumstances in which specifying a timeout is recommended When the number of time units Word 11 is zero so that a subsequent transfer will be issued as soon as the previous transfer completes and no period errors are reported In this case a timeout value can be specified so that t
175. ed with non default values for this port use those values for the serial port settings of the terminal or PC Port Pinout a45696 Station Manager Serial Port Pinout RJ 11 Port Signal Description Pin Number 1 CTS Clear To Send input 2 TD Transmit Data output 3 SG Signal Ground 4 SG Signal Ground 5 RD Receive Data input 6 RTS Request to Send output wwy gadfamily com EM ajheRaASRAN ANANA eries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Station Manager Serial Cable IC693CBL316A Use the serial cable IC693CBL316A to connect your PC to the Station Manager port a45485 RJ 11 CONNECTOR 9 PIN FEMALE CONNECTOR If your terminal or PC is unable to communicate with the Ethernet Interface through the RS 232 port consult the documentation for your terminal or PC to verify that your connection is wired correctly Serial Cable IC693CBL316A Connector Pinouts 9 Pin Connector RJ 11 Connector Pin Number Pin Number 7 1 2 2 5 3 5 4 3 5 8 6 wwweasiamily com EMaibeasisened patraaibeemeristics B 3 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete RS 485 15 Pin D Type Port The 15 pin D type RS 485 port is used on the IC693CMM321 AAUI only Type of the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface and on the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface module CMM742 It is used
176. emote Modbus TCP device The figure specifically illustrates the successful operation of a data read Domain of a channel Domain of a TCP connection Domain of a remote server ON Client Client Series 90 30 PLC Ethernet Server Server Server PLC CPU Backplane Interface LAN Ethernet Interface Interface CPU Power flows to Open ConnectionCOMMREQ in ladder program Command Block sent to Verify Command Interface Block andsetup gt Accept channel to server connection Send connection lt Return COMMREQ Status CRS Word acknowlegement COMMREQ ug to CPU Status Word Set Channel Open Bit Channel Open Bitis s set to 1 ae ees Peer EEE ae Power flows to COMMRE Q in ladder program Command Block sent to Interface Verify Command Block gt and set up channel to server This sequence must Read Request be repeated for each q gt gt Read Request read or write request lt Data lt Data a lt bata lt Data lt 4 Return COMMREQ Status CRS Word COMMREQ to CPU Status Word NB M O MM Power flows to Connection COMMREQ in ladder program Command Block sent to Verify i Command Block gt Receive Interface and close channel Disconnect to server Send disconnect 4 Return COMMREQ acknowlegement Status CRS Word COMMREQ 4g to CPU Status Word Channel Open Bit is Clear Channel Open Bit set to 0 www cadfamily com Eltaicadsen2h natmalC Beries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 A Communic
177. emote PLC L and P are available in Series 90 70 PLCs only www gadfamily com Eltacadseve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Word 14 Local PLC Memory Starting Address Word 14 determines the starting address in the local PLC in which the data from the remote PLC is to be stored The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 13 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified for example if Word 13 16 and Word 14 2 then the starting address will be 19 Valid ranges of values depend on the PLC s memory ranges The user is responsible for assuring that this area is large enough to contain the requested data without overwriting other application data Word 15 Remote PLC Memory Type Words 15 16 specify the memory type and starting address in the remote PLC from which the data is to be read Valid values for Word 15 are listed above If P memory is used you must specify a Program name in Words 24 27 If L memory is used you must specify a Program name in Words 24 27 and a Program Block name in Words 28 31 Word 16 Remote PLC Memory Starting Address Word 16 determines the starting address in the remote PLC from which the data is to be read The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC
178. en Modbus TCP Client Connection COMMREQ If the COMMREQ requests an invalid channel number or an already allocated channel the COMMREQ fails and the CSR is set to a non zero value to identify the failure See the section Status Data later in this document for detailed CSR failure codes www eadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Command 3000 Example Establish a channel Channel 5 to a remote Modbus TCP device at IP address 10 0 0 1 Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Dec Hex Word 1 00008 0008 Word 2 00000 0000 Word 3 00008 0008 Word 4 00009 0009 Word 5 00000 0000 Word 6 00000 0000 Word 7 03000 OBB8 Word 8 00005 0005 Word 9 00001 0001 Word 10 00004 0004 Word 11 00010 0010 Word 12 00000 0000 Word 13 00000 0000 Word 14 00001 0001 Length of Channel command Data Block Always 0 no wait mode request Memory type of CRS word R CRS word address minus 1 R10 Reserved Reserved Open Modbus TCP Client Connection Channel number 5 Remote Device Address Type Length of Remote Device Address Numeric value of 1 Octet Numeric value of 2 Octet Numeric value of 3 Octet Numeric value of 4 Octet Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address Word
179. end Example Send Period Calculation If Word 10 contains a value of 3 specifying seconds as the time unit and Word 11 contains a value of 20 then the send period is 20 seconds A send will normally be issued at the start of each send period If the pending transfer has not completed during the send period the Channel Error bit and Detailed Channel Status words will be set to indicate a non fatal period error The pending transfer can still complete after the period error occurs For Channel commands set up to issue multiple sends the next transfer will be issued only after the pending transfer completes If the Number of Time Units is zero a subsequent transfer will be issued as soon as the previous transfer completes In this case no period errors are reported by the Channel Error bit Word 12 Timeout for Each Send Word 12 specifies the time in hundredths of a second the Ethernet Interface will wait for a send transfer to complete before setting the Channel Error bit and Detailed Channel Status bits to indicate a non fatal timeout error The transfer can still complete even after a timeout occurs As a result an application can choose what to do if one occurs If the timeout value is specified as zero no timeout errors will be reported For most applications a timeout need not be specified because the send period in effect acts as a timeout Word 12 should be zero for no timeout However there are two special circumstances in whic
180. enesiadssndansassneasssioncanievesesens 2 1 Installing an IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 2 Installing an IC693CPU364 with Embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface ee 2 16 Installing an IC693 CPU374 with Embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface 0 0 0 0 2 30 Installing the IC697CMM742 Ethernet Interface 00 0 eee ceeeccsseceneceseceeecesecnseenseeees 2 41 Programming SRTP Channel Commannds cccssccssssccssssccsssccssesscssesscesences 3 1 The Communications Request cceeceeceesseesseeeseeeseecaecsaecsaecsseesseeseesseesseeeeaeseneeeaaeenaes 3 2 COMMREQ Function Block and Command Block 0 ce ccecscceessceeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeenaees 3 6 Channel Commands asc s si30s cate itiids ede cistiied whee es Tee eee 3 9 LACUS Data ossining erea ee get aceuuaastiensd oy E E A EOE EN EERE NE 3 31 Controlling Communications in the Ladder Program cecscceesscceeseeceeeeeeeneceenaeeeees 3 43 Programming Modbus TCP Channel Commands ssesssesssocesooessoesecssssscessee 4 1 The Communications Request ccecesssseseeesceeseeescecaecaecsaecesecsseeseesseeseneseneeeaeeeaaeenaes 4 2 COMMREQ Function Block and Command Block 0 cc eccecsccessscecesseeeeeeesteaeeeeeenaees 4 5 Modbus TCP Channel Commands cecccecccecesccesseceeseeceeeeeeaeeeeaaeceeneeceaeeeesaeceeaaeceeeeees 4 8 Status Data ce acascevsesnecensheccdienneasteessnes ccuesabsdesconagededenasusies EEEE EEE
181. ents required for Ethernet Communications including AAUI port pinouts and cable diagrams Ethernet AAUI Port Pinouts The AAUI port is a 14 pin D type female connector It is used to connect the Ethernet Interface to an external transceiver Pin Number Signal Description 1 FN Pwr 5V 1 9W 2 DI A Data In circuit A 3 DI B Data In circuit B 4 Ve Voltage common 5 CI A Control In circuit A 6 CI B Control In circuit B 7 5V 5V from host 8 5V Secondary 5V from host 9 DO A Data Out circuit A 10 DO B Data Out circuit B 11 Ve Secondary Voltage Common 12 nc Reserved 13 nc Reserved 14 FN Pwr Secondary 5V SHELL PG Protective Ground Conductive shell and shield Pinouts are provided for troubleshooting purposes only Cables are readily available from commercial distributors GE Fanuc recommends purchasing rather than making transceiver cables wwweadiamily com EMaileadsemed batmaikeoMeristics Note The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete AAUI Transceiver Information Depending on your particular application any of several types of user supplied transceivers may be used Information on GE Fanuc transceivers as well as typical connection drawings for 10Base2 thin wire and 10Base T twisted pair networks are shown in this section Note Transceivers must be compatible with the IEEE 802 3 standard and must have the S
182. er NODE command for a Power up diagnostics result message about the Software Loader port See TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual GFK 1186 for details The Firmware Update Utility will not function if there is a hardware failure of Ethernet Interface Software Loader port The Interface will be inoperative until it is power cycled It should be replaced 6 Ifthe configuration data stored in your PLC for the Software Loader port of your Ethernet Interface is identical to the default values 19 200 baud ODD parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 0 modem turnaround time skip the rest of this step The Firmware Update Utility will be unable to communicate with your Ethernet Interface unless both use the same serial port settings If your Ethernet Interface s Software Loader port configuration is different from the defaults for Ethernet Interface modules you must set the Firmware Update Utility to use the same serial configuration as your Interface each time you run the Firmware Update Utility program Press the F2 function key from the Firmware Update Utility main menu to select the Loader Baud Rate menu Use the Up Down Cursor and Tab keys to select serial port settings that are identical to the Logicmaster configuration of your Interface Then type Enter to accept the new settings WARNING The Firmware Update Utility communicates using 8 data bits This item is not configurable from the Loader Baud Rate menu
183. eration of the Channel commands A detailed description and example of each Channel command is included There are four Channel commands Open a Modbus TCP Connection Close a Modbus TCP Connection ReadData from a Modbus TCP Device to the PLC Write Data from the PLC to a Modbus TCP Device Open a Modbus TCP Client Connection 3000 The Modbus TCP Ethernet Interface transfers data to or from another Modbus TCP device using a channel Up to sixteen 16 channels are available for Modbus TCP client communications The number of channels currently allocated to SRTP communications can limit the number of channels available for client connections in a particular application The Open Modbus TCP COMMREQ requests the communication subsystem to associate a channel with a remote Modbus TCP device Using the COMMREQs defined later in this document the PLC may transfer data to and from a remote device Once a channel is allocated for Modbus TCP Client communications the channel remains allocated The channel connection is released only when the application program closes the channel the channel is automatically closed because the PLC transitions to STOP or the underlying TCP connection is terminated The IP address of the remote Modbus TCP device is specified in the Open Modbus TCP COMMREQ using the standard dotted decimal format No other IP address format is accepted The COMMREQ Status Word CSR indicates the success or failure of the Op
184. erface and covers the following topics The Ethernet Interface How to Make the System Work Quick Guide to the Manual GFK 1541B 1 1 www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete The Ethernet Interface The Ethernet Interface enables Series 90 PLCs to communicate with other Series 90 PLCs with with GE Fanuc PLC programming software and with applications developed using the SRTP protocol such as CIMPLICITY HMI The Ethernet Interfaces described in this manual have client server capability As a client the Interfaces can initiate communications with other Series 90 PLCs containing Ethernet Interfaces This is done from the PLC ladder program using the COMMREQ function As a server the Interfaces respond to requests from other devices such as PLC programming software a Host computer running an SRTP application or another Series 90 PLC acting as a client No PLC programming is required for server operation Ethernet Communications System The diagram below represents a basic Ethernet Communications system Ethernet Cable Transceiver m Transceiver Transceiver Transceiver m T
185. es a simple table lookup to see if a mapping of the symbolic name to its IP address information exists Configuration of this table is described in the topic Local Name Table Name Assignment earlier in this chapter www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete L DDP Name Resolution If local name table name resolution fails DDP a GE Fanuc naming protocol is used to dynamically resolve the symbolic name DDP name resolution involves the client node broadcasting a message on the network asking if any node recognizes the symbolic name If a node does recognize the name it responds and supplies the associated IP address The client can then proceed with communication directly to that IP address DDP uses broadcast traffic to perform name resolution Certain routing configurations do not support routing of broadcast traffic which implies that DDP name resolution will not work over such routers DNS Name Resolution If both local name table and DDP name resolution fail DNS is then attempted This protocol is an industry standard for resolving symbolic names to IP addresses with the assistance of a remote DNS name server The format of DNS usage is defined by RFCs 1034 and 1035 A separate DNS name server on the network is required for DNS operation To use DNS name resolution the IP address of the remote DN
186. es supporting TCP IP Ethernet communications Diagnose and maintain your system using diagnostic and station management tools You can find problems before they become serious In the event that communications software upgrades are needed you can use a built in serial port to download the software to the Ethernet Interface Indirectly attach to other Local Area Networks and or wide area networks via third party IP routers When configured to use an IP gateway router the Ethernet Interface can communicate with remote PLCs and other nodes reachable through the router Communicate with remote computers via Serial Line Protocol SLIP using modems and or serial lines Using third party SLIP software a remote host computer can be attached to a TCP IP network Communicate with other Series 90 PLCs using symbolic names as well as IP addresses COMMREQs can be programmed to communicate with PLCs using IP addresses or Network Address names Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface Series 90 30 CPU364 Embedded Ethernet Interface and Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation wwwgadiamily com EMMaieadsemei hotmail com 13 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Ethernet Interface Ports The Ethernet Interfaces provide ports for connection to the Ethernet network as listed below 1C693CMM3721 Series 90 30 TCP IP AAUI Port Ethern
187. et Interface 10Base T Port RJ 45 Module version FG or later 1C693CPU364 Series 90 30 CPU with MAUI Port Embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface 10Base T Port RJ 45 1C693CPU374 Series 90 30 CPU with Auto sensing 10Base T Port RJ 45 Embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface 1C697CMM722 Series 90 70 TCP IP 10Base T Port RJ 45 Ethernet Interface Type 2 AUI Port 10Base2 Port BNC Port Descriptions 10Base T RJ 45 port Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface 10Base T Type Series 90 30 CPU364 and Series 90 70 IC697CMM742 Ethernet Interface Type 2 The 10Base T port uses a twisted pair cable of up to 100 meters in length between each node and a hub or repeater Typical hubs or repeaters support 6 to 12 nodes connected in a star wiring topology Auto sensing 10 Base T 100 Base TX RJ 45 Port Series 90 30 CPU374 only The auto sensing 10 Base T 100Base TX ports are connected to a switch device embedded in the Ethernet Interface They use a twisted pair cable unshielded or shielded of up to 100 meters in length between the node and another node a hub a repeater or a switch The port automatically senses the speed 1OMbps or 100Mbps duplex mode half duplex or full duplex and cable straight through or crossover attached to it with no intervention required 10Base2 BNC port Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 The 10Base2 port uses a 0 2 inch diameter 50 ohm coaxial cable and i
188. et to a non zero value to identify the failure See the section Status Data later in this document for detailed CSR failure codes wwweasiamily com Elhaileagsenvehh MORNE Manne Commands 4 11 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Command 3003 Example 1 Read four Input Registers from Address 30200 in the remote Modbus TCP device Store the registers at location R20 Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Dec Hex Word 1 00008 0008 Length of Channel command Data Block Word 2 00000 0000 Always 0 no wait mode request Word 3 00008 0008 Memory type of CRS word R Word 4 00009 0009 CRS word address minus 1 R10 Word 5 00000 0000 Reserved Word 6 00000 0000 Reserved Word 7 03003 OBBB Read from a Modbus TCP Device Word 8 00006 0006 Channel number 6 Word 9 00004 0004 Modbus Function Code Word 10 00008 0008 Local PLC Memory Type Word 11 00020 0014 Local PLC Starting Address Word 12 00200 00C8 Address in the Remote Server Word 13 00004 0004 Number of Registers in the Remote Device Word 14 00001 0001 Unit Identifier Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 identifies the COMMREQ as a Read Data from Modbus TCP Device command block Word 8 Channel Number Word 8 identifies the channel number previously allocated
189. etailed Channel Status command 2002 3 29 RJ11 Serial Port B 2 RS 232 RJ11 port B 2 RS 232 RJ 11 port Series 90 30 CPU364 2 19 2 31 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 43 RS 485 port B 4 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 43 Cables and Converters B 5 S Sample ladder program 3 43 4 26 Send Information Report command 2010 3 23 Sequencing communications requests 3 47 4 34 Serial Number Label wWwWWeagfamily com Ehltacadse v2 hQnnalC nBeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Series 90 30 CPU364 2 5 2 20 2 31 Serial port configuration data rate 2 10 Data rate 2 25 2 35 2 50 Flow control 2 10 2 25 2 35 2 50 Parity 2 10 2 25 2 35 2 50 Stop bits 2 10 2 25 2 50 Timeout 2 10 2 25 2 50 Turnaround delay 2 10 2 25 2 50 Serial Ports 1C693CPU364 2 25 2 35 new style IC693CMM321 2 5 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 19 Series 90 30 CPU364 with Embedded Ethernet Interface 10Base T Port 2 19 AAUI Transceiver Port 2 19 Board Indicators 2 17 2 30 Configuration Parameters 2 23 2 34 Configuring 2 22 2 33 2 47 Ethernet Ports 2 19 2 31 Installing 2 21 2 32 Replaceable Fuse 2 5 2 20 Requirements to Install 2 21 2 32 Restart Pushbutton 2 17 2 31 RS 232 RJ 11 port 2 19 2 31 Serial Number Label 2 5 2 20 2 31 Serial Ports 2 19 States 2 27 2 38 Station Address Label 2 5 2 20 2 3
190. f the following areas Invalid rack slot specified The module at this rack slot is unable to receive a COMMREQ Command Block Invalid Task ID For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface and the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 this value should always be zero For the Series 90 30 CPU364 this value should always be 21 decimal 0015H Invalid Data Block length 0 or greater than 128 COMMREQ Status Word is Zero 0 and FT Output is OFF If after executing a COMMREQ function the CRS word is zero 0 and the FT Output is OFF then the Command Block has been sent to the Ethernet Interface but no status has been returned yet If this condition persists check the PLC Fault Table for information COMMREQ Status Word is Not One 1 If after executing a COMMREQ function the CRS word is not one 1 indicating success then there were Errors in the Command Block the Channel command code or parameters or For an establish command Establish Read Channel Establish Write Channel or Send Information Report the command parameters were valid but there was an error in establishing a channel If the CRS word does not contain a 1 indicating success then it contains either a 0 or a code indicating what error occurred Monitoring the Communications Channel Once you have a working ladder program you can use the status data to monitor your communications activity and take the desired action upon certain events The primary i
191. face RESTART PUSHBUTTON ETHERNET RESTART STATION MGR RS 232 DEFAULT STATION SERIAL ADDRESS The Series 90 30 CPU364 has several user accessible elements only the Ethernet Interface elements are discussed here Three Ethernet LEDs are located at the top left of the board The Ethernet Restart pushbutton is located below the LEDs The RS 232 serial port with the RJ 11 connector similar to a modular telephone connector is used to connect to Station Manager and to load software updates Below the serial port are two ports either one of which can be used to connect to the Ethernet network the 14 pin AAUI connector Transceiver port and the 10Base T RJ 45 network port The default station address MAC address label serial number label and replaceable AAUI port fuse are concealed by the front cover The front cover must be removed to access these items www gadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete LEDs There are four LEDs on the CPU364 EOK LAN STAT and PS PORT on some early models of the CPU364 the PS PORT LED is labeled SNP The PS Power Supply PORT LED is not Ethernet related it indicates the presence of serial traffic through the serial port of the PLC s power supply Each of the three Ethernet LEDs EOK LAN and STAT can be ON OFF BLINKING slow or BLINKING fas
192. faileadservd t hoimail com 5 11 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Configuring EGD This section describes how to configure EGD using the Ethernet Global Data rack operation in the Windows based PLC programming software if supported The main topics covered are Exchange Definitions Configuring Ethernet Global Data with examples Exchange Definitions The produced and consumed data exchange definitions that follow describe the fields to be filled in via the Ethernet Global Data rack operation in the PLC programming software Produced Data Exchange Definition The information to be sent by the producer and the exchange details are defined in the Produced Exchanges tab of the Ethernet Global Data dialog box The produced data exchange definition contains the following information Field Local Producer ID Exchange ID Adapter Name Consumer Type Consumer Address Details A value in the form of a dotted decimal IP address that uniquely identifies the Ethernet Global Data device across the network For Series 90 70 PLCs the default is the same as the IP address of the Ethernet Interface closest to the CPU in the main rack For Series 90 30 PLCs the default is the same as the IP address of the CPU364 or CPU374 with Embedded Ethernet Interface The default value can be changed A numerical value assigned by the user to identify a specific exchange to be sent by
193. for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual Problems During Power up If a problem is detected during power up the CMM321 may not transition directly to the Operational State If the Interface does not transition to Operational check the LED pattern on the Interface and refer to the following diagram and table for suggestions www gadfamily com Eltacadseve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete States of the Series 90 30 CMM321 Ethernet Interface 1 The Ethernet Interface is initialized by Powering up the PLC Storing a new configuration to the PLC with changes for the Ethernet Interface Pressing the Restart pushbutton Issuing a Station Manager RESTART LOAD or MAINT command Internal System Error occurring when Interface is Operational Ethernet Interface Initializing 1 approx 2 10 seconds A Hardware Failure Load B Request or Software Load Caused by q Software Restart pushbutton pushed until bottom LED turns ON Software Station Manager LOAD command issued Corrupted Load Detection of corrupt software Waiting for IP Address Caused by No Not configuring Interface using configuration software Configuring Interface with IP address 0 0 0 0 C New CPU with no configuration ai CPU failure to communicate with Interface Waiting for Configuration from 4 Continue to Maintenance
194. fore manually configuring duplex mode for a port using AUP be sure that you know the characteristics of the link partner and are aware of the consequences of your selection In the words of the IEEE standard Connecting incompatible DTE MAU combinations such as full duplex mode DTE to a half duplex MAU or a full duplex station DTE or MAU to a repeater or other half duplex network can lead to severe network performance degradation increased collisions ate collisions CRC errors and undetected data corruption Note If speed and duplex mode of a port is forced using AUP the switch will no longer perform automatic cable detection This means that if you have the switch port connected to a switch or hub port you must use a crossover cable If you have the switch port connected to the uplink port on a switch or hub or if you have the switch port connected to another Ethernet device you must use a normal cable An example AUP file for the CPU374 to set the IP Time to Live TTL parameter to the value 5 is shown below This text would appear in a file named AUP_0_1 AUP in the directory of the folder for the PLC AUP_0 1 Set IP TTL to 5 ittl 5 www gadfamily com Eltapcadse ve hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Verifying Proper Power Up of the CPU374 Ethernet Interface After configuring the Interface follow the procedur
195. ftware This section does not apply to the Series 90 30 CPU374 because it uses the rack and slot as its adapter name and does not support aliases for remote network adapters Configuring the Ethernet Interface Adapter Name If an Ethernet Interface will be used in Ethernet Global Data exchanges you must specify an adapter name for the Interface When you define an Ethernet Global Data exchange you will use the adapter name to specify which Ethernet Interface will produce the exchange Refer to the installation chapter for details on how to configure the adapter name for your particular Ethernet Interface Setting Aliases for Remote Network Adapters If a remote network adapter such as an Ethernet Interface or a device running the Host Communications Drivers will be used in Ethernet Global Data exchanges and you want to use local name table name resolution you must locally associate an alias with the remote network adapter s IP address When you define an Ethernet Global Data exchange you will use this alias to specify which network adapter will consume the exchange To assign an alias for a remote network adapter 1 From Hardware Configuration go to the Edit menu choose Rack Operations and select Name Resolution or click the right mouse button and choose Name Resolution from the pop up menu 2 Inthe Name Resolution Table dialog box click the Aliases tab 3 Click the Add Entry button 4 Inthe Alias field type the name you w
196. ftware Loader port and initiating a load with the PC Software Loader The PC Software Loader is a separate software utility that updates the communications software in the Ethernet Interface This utility is supplied with any updates to the Ethernet Interface software At any time before you initiate a load with the PC Software Loader when the Ethernet Interface is in the Software Load State you can restart the Ethernet Interface by pressing the Restart pushbutton Pressing this pushbutton will immediately cause the board to restart If the reload has been initiated see Appendix C Upgrading the Ethernet Interface Firmware for more information Restart and Enter Maintenance State Pressing and holding the Restart pushbutton until the bottom two LEDs turn ON approximately 10 seconds forces a restart and requests entrance to the Maintenance state Maintenance state must be invoked to change Advanced Parameters While in Maintenance state all Advanced Parameters revert to their default value When the Restart pushbutton is pressed all LEDs go out After approximately 5 seconds the STAT LED comes ON then after approximately a total of 10 seconds have elapsed the FDX LED also comes ON to indicate that the Ethernet Interface will request entry to the Maintenance state After the Restart pushbutton is released all LEDs flash ON then power up diagnostics run and the Ethernet Interface enters the Maintenance state Notes If a Restart is pe
197. g PLC reference memory addresses to Modbus Register addresses GFK 1541B The Communications Request The COMMREQ Function Block and Command Block Modbus TCP Channel Commands Status Data Controlling Communications in the Ladder Program which includes an example Note This chapter applies only to Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface IC693CMM321 FH or later This chapter applies only to PLCs being used as client PLCs to initiate Modbus TCP communications No programming is required for Modbus TCP server operations however it is necessary to use the Modbus Register to 1C693CMM3721 Reference Table Translation provided in Appendix E to correctly address PLC reference memory using Modbus TCP to a 1C693CMM321 www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete The Communications Request Communications Request is a term used to describe all the user elements required for correctly initiating Channel commands from a Series 90 PLC This section describes the elements of the Communications Request No programming of Communications Requests is required for PLCs acting as servers which are merely targets of other systems requests but do not themselves initiate requests Structure of the Communications Request The Communications Request is made up of the following elements The COMMREQ Function Block ladder instruction The COMMREQ Command
198. g a simple isolated network with no gateways you can use the following range of values for the assignment of local IP addresses wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 9 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 10 0 0 1 First PLC 10 0 0 2 Second PLC 10 0 0 3 Third PLC 10 0 0 255 PLC Programmer TCP or host Also in this case set the subnet mask gateway IP address and name server IP address to 0 0 0 0 Note If the isolated network is ever connected to another network the IP addresses 10 0 0 1 through 10 0 0 255 must not be used and the subnet mask gateway IP address and name server IP address must be assigned by the network administrator The IP addresses must be assigned so that they are compatible with the connected network Refer to Chapter 6 Network Administration Support for more information on addressing See also Determining If an IP Address Has Already Been Used Converter Allows you to account for the power consumption added by a serial port converter measured in Watts Choices are 0 0 50 and 0 60 AAUI Transceiver Watts If you use an AAUI transceiver allows you to account for the power that the transceiver draws from the port measured in Watts The valid range is 0 25 to 2 00 The default value is 0 50 Station Manager PortParameters Data Rate bps Data rate bits per second for the port Choices are 300 600 1200 2400 4800 96004 or
199. gain for less than 5 seconds to restart the Interface and clear the load request EOK Slowblink O LAN OFF O STAT OFF C Waiting for Configuration from PLC Did not configure slot using the PLC Programmer CPU not communicating with Ethernet Interface Condition can last a maximum of 2 seconds Use the PLC Programmer configuration software to configure the Interface then store the configuration to the PLC CPU Power cycle the PLC Clear faults and Restart Interface EOK Slowblink O LAN ON Traffic OFF STAT Slowblink EOK and STAT blink in unison D Waiting for IP Address Interface s IP address has not been configured or has been configured as 0 0 0 0 Use the PLC Programmer to configure the Interface with a non zero IP address Use a BOOTP server to provide Interface with a non zero IP address EOK Slowblink O LAN ON Traffic OFF O STAT ON OFF E Maintenance Restart pushbutton until the bottom two LEDs turn ON Station Manager MAINT command issued Internal System Error when Interface was Operational caused a restart and entrance into Maintenance If you did not intend to enter Maintenance press the Restart pushbutton for less than 5 seconds This clears the Maintenance request Examine PLC Fault Table for clues If you need to use the Station Manager to troubleshoot a problem see GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications
200. h 1C697 PLC CPUs running firmware versions 4 12 through 5 50 These notes describe the necessary Ethernet Interface configuration and restricted operation with these PLC CPUs The Ethernet Interface Type 2 cannot be used with PLC CPU firmware versions prior to 4 12 Ethernet Interface Installation and Configuration The Ethernet Interface Type 2 is installed in the main PLC rack as described in the Installation chapter 1C697 PLC CPU firmware versions 4 12 though 5 50 do not accept PLC configuration data for the Ethernet Interface Type 2 Thus this Ethernet Interface cannot be configured as described in the Installation chapter An alternative method is provided below this procedure uses a user supplied computer terminal or equivalent plus the Station Manager software within the Ethernet Interface to enter the necessary configuration data The Station Manager is completely described in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual Please refer to this manual for complete details GFK 1541B D 1 www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Alternate Procedure for Configuring the Ethernet Interface with PLC CPU versions 4 12 through 5 50 1C697 PLC CPU firmware versions prior to version 6 00 do not accept configuration data for the Ethernet Interface Type 2 Thus the Ethernet Interface Type 2 cannot b
201. h is taken from a VersaPro screen the first three number places from left to right are zeros and are not displayed only the last number 4 appears This indicates rack 0 slot 4 On a Logicmaster screen all four digits will appear 0004 The TASK field of the COMMREQ Function Block indicates which mailbox task ID to use for the specified rack and slot For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface this value should always be zero The FT output energizes the OPEN_FLT coil in this example is turned ON set to 1 if there were problems preventing the delivery of the Command Block to the Ethernet Interface In this case the other status indicators are not updated for this COMMREQ Rung 6 When ETH_READY is set the CRS word for the Open Modbus TCP Connection commreq is monitored for a status of 1 indicating that the Open commreq completed successfully The CRS word change to sets coil OPEN_SUCCESS wwwigadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalc rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete ETH_READY OPEN_SUCCESS READ_REQ 7 T T 4 ETH_READY i READ_REQ MOVE WORD i g i READ_FLT 8 1 H 1 H R 1 o IN Q 6RO0011 R00011 ETH_READY READ_REQ BLKMOV INT BLKMOV INT 9 d H 4H s IN1 R00301 5 IN1 Q Roo308 R00301 R00308 o IN2 4 IN2 s INa s INs 10 IN4 1 IN4 o INS 200 INS o INS 4 INe 3003 fIN7 1
202. h specifying a timeout is recommended When the number of time units Word 11 is zero so that a subsequent transfer will be issued as soon as the previous transfer completes and no period errors are reported In this case a timeout value can be specified so that timeout errors will be reported by the Channel Error bit When the send period is very long minutes or hours In this case a shorter timeout value can be specified so the application doesn t have to wait for the send period to expire before taking action Word 13 Local PLC Memory Type Words 13 14 specify the location in the local PLC from where the Ethernet Interface will get the data to be written to the remote SRTP server Valid values for Word 13 are listed for Establish Read Channel The amount of data to be transferred to the server is specified by the number of memory units Word 15 wwwigadfamily com Eltapcadsev2 hOHnalC lGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Word 14 Local PLC Memory Starting Address Word 14 determines the starting address in the local PLC from which the data is to be sent The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 13 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified for example if Word 13 16 and Word 14 2 then the starting address w
203. he communications request Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4 Word 5 Word 6 Word 7 Word 8 Word 9 Word 10 Word 11 Word 12 Word 13 Word 14 Word 15 Word 16 Word 17 Word 18 Word 19 Word 20 Word 21 Word 22 Word 23 Word 24 Word 25 Word 26 Word 27 Word 28 Word 29 Word 30 Word 31 Word 32 Word 33 Word 34 Word 35 Word 36 51 Word 52 55 Word 56 59 Dec Hex 00045 002D 00000 0000 00008 0008 00009 0009 00000 0000 00000 0000 02004 07D4 00006 0006 00000 0000 00003 0003 00007 0007 00050 0032 00008 0008 00050 0032 00008 0008 00100 0064 00008 0008 00003 0003 00032 0020 19536 4C50 24387 5F43 24881 6131 00097 0061 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 00000 0000 Length of Channel command Data Block 45 53 words Always 0 no wait mode request Memory type of CRS word R CRS word address minus 1 R10 Reserved Reserved Establish Write Channel command number Channel number 6 Number of write repetitions write indefinitely Time unit for write period 3 seconds Number of time units for write period every 7 seconds Timeout for each write 500 ms Local PLC Memory type from which to write data R Local PLC Starting address from which to write data R50 Remote PLC Memory type at which to store data R Remote PLC Starting addre
204. he Interface from a UNIX Host or a PC Running TCP IP Software A ping command can be executed from a UNIX host or PC running TCP IP since most TCP IP communications software provides a ping command or from another Ethernet Interface When using a PC or UNIX host the user can refer to the documentation for the ping command but in general all that is required is the IP address of the remote host as a parameter to the ping command For example at the command prompt type ping 10 0 0 1 Determining If an IP Address Has Already Been Used It is very important not to duplicate IP addresses To determine if you have configured your Ethernet Interface with the same IP address as another node 1 Disconnect your Interface from the LAN 2 Ping the disconnected Interface s IP address If you get an answer to the ping then the chosen IP address is already in use by another node You must correct this situation by assigning unique IP addresses To use another GE Fanuc Ethernet Interface refer to the PING command in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual UNIX is a registered trademark exclusively licensed through X Open Company LTD wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 29 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Installing an IC693 CPU374 with Embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface The CPU374 with Embedded Ethernet Interface is mounted o
205. he document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Consumed Data Exchange Definition The information to be received by the consumer and the exchange details are defined in the Consumed Exchanges tab of the Ethernet Global Data dialog box The consumed data exchange definition contains the following information Field Details Local Producer ID A value in the form of a dotted decimal IP address that uniquely identifies the Ethernet Global Data device across the network For Series 90 70 PLCs the default is the same as the IP address of the Ethernet Interface closest to the CPU in the main rack For Series 90 30 PLCs the default is the same as the IP address of the CPU364 or CPU374 Embedded Ethernet Interface The default value can be changed Adapter Name Identifies the adapter name of the Ethernet Interface within the consuming device For the CPU374 this field is not editable and displays the rack and slot of the CPU Exchange ID A numerical value assigned by the user to identify a specific data exchange to be received by the consuming device It must match the Exchange ID specified in the produced exchange Remote Producer ID Identifies the Producer ID of the PLC producing the exchange Group ID Used only if the same data is consumed by more than one consuming device the same group ID must also be assigned in the produced data exchange definition Consumer Period For the CPU374 this field is n
206. he proper values A typical SOSW command is shown below SOSW lt lt lt Soft Switch Data gt gt gt IP Address 10 0 0 1 TCP IP values from Soft Switches Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Name Server 0 0 0 0 Port 1 Station Manager Port 2 S W Loader Data Rate 9600 Data Rate 19200 Parity NONE Parity ODD Stop Bits 1 Stop Bits i Flow Control NONE Flow Control NONE TurnA Delay NONE TurnA Delay NONE Timeout LONG Timeout LONG Source of Soft Switches Internal Backup 11 When all configuration parameters have been correctly entered use the RESTART Station Manager command to restart the Ethernet Interface into normal operation The RESTART command is shown below restart Restarting module The Ethernet Interface is restarted into the Operational state After approximately 20 seconds another NODE output is automatically generated when the restart is complete The NODE output should indicate the IP Address configured in Step 9 above The Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address and Name Server IP Address can be displayed by the SOSW command as described in Step 10 above The Ethernet Interface is now properly configured and ready for use Please proceed to the Installation chapter to verify proper operation of the Ethernet Interface with the new configuration data wwwadiamily com EMaleadsenci pounei2QQ h PLC CPU Versions 4 12 5 50 D 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights
207. he requested period until the channel is aborted Word 10 Time Unit for Read Period Words 10 11 together define how often the read is to be performed read period Word 10 specifies the time unit such as seconds or minutes for the read period Word 11 specifies the number of those units The choices for the time units are shown below Value Meaning 1 hundredths of seconds 10 ms 2 tenths of seconds 100 ms 3 seconds 4 minutes 5 hours Note If Time Unit Value is 5 hours then the maximum usable value of Number of Time Units is 5965 Word 11 Number of Time Units for Read Period Word 11 specifies the number of time units for the read period The read period is in effect even when the Channel command is setup to issue a single read Example Read Period Calculation If Word 10 contains a value of 3 specifying seconds as the time unit and Word 11 contains a value of 20 then the read period is 20 seconds A read will normally be issued at the start of each read period If the pending read transfer has not completed during the read period the Channel Error bit and Detailed Channel Status words will be set to indicate a non fatal period error The pending transfer can still complete after the period error occurs For Channel commands set up to issue multiple reads the next read transfer will be issued only after the pending read transfer completes If the Number of Time Units is zero a subsequent transfe
208. he shaded columns identify the PLC in which a given exchange is to be configured and additionally for the variable list tables the exchange the variable is associated with wwweadiamily com Ebfaileadsenvd hotmail com 5 17 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Example 2 EGD Configuration Using a Group ID to Identify Consumers There are three PLCs in this EGD system using the Group ID feature PLC1 is the producer and PLC2 and PLC3 are the consumers of a single Ethernet Global Data exchange The consumers in this example are identified by Group ID Network synchronized time stamping is not used The identification of the PLCs and the details of the exchange are shown in the tables below PLC1 Producer PLC2 Consumer PLC3 Consumer Producer Consumer Information for Entire EGD System EXAMPLE 2 Your Name for P C Local Ethernet Interface s the PLC Producer ID Network CCU Device IP Address Equipment Adapter Name Name Folder Name PLC1 X 0 0 0 1 PLC1 PLC1 10 0 0 23 PLC2 X 0 0 0 2 PLC2 PLC2 10 0 0 41 PLC3 X 0 0 0 3 PLC3 PLC3 10 0 0 50 P Producer C Consumer Use your own IP addresses here Produced Exchange Information EXAMPLE 2 Local Exchange Local Adapter Name Consumer Consumer Send Producer Reply Status Producer ID ID Type Address Type Period Rate Word 0 0 0 1 PLCI Group ID 1000 0 Stani Variable List for Pr
209. hen you configure these names use a name similar to the adapter name of the Ethernet Interface When you assign names for these parameters use names that help to easily recognize their relationship to one another For example if you identify the PLCs in your system using an Equipment folder name such as PLC1 PLC2 and so on it will be easier to recognize these PLCs when configuring EGD if you configure Local Producer IDs with numbers such as 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 and so on Also it is recommended to use a similar name for both the adapter name and the Communication Configuration Utility CCU device name for an Ethernet Interface This will make it easier for you to recognize the PLC you want to connect to for configuring EGD If you configure the CCU device name while an Equipment folder is open the folder name will be suggested as the CCU device name Naming Conventions EXAMPLE Your Name Local Ethernet Interface s for the PLC Producer ID Network CCU Device IP Address Equipment Adapter Name Name Folder Name PLC1 0 0 0 1 PLC1_A PLC1_A 10 0 0 23 PLC1 0 0 0 1 PLC1_B PLC1_B 10 0 0 34 PLC2 0 0 0 2 PLC2 PLC2 10 0 0 41 PLC3 0 0 0 3 PLC3 PLC3 10 0 0 50 There can be more than one Ethernet Interface Type 2 in a Series 90 70 PLC wwweadiamily com Ebfaileadsenvd hotmail com 5 9 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Before You Configure EGD E
210. hernet Interface When using a PC or UNIX host the user can refer to the documentation for the ping command but in general all that is required is the IP address of the remote host as a parameter to the ping command For example at the command prompt type ping 10 0 0 1 Determining If an IP Address Has Already Been Used It is very important not to duplicate IP addresses To determine if you have configured your Ethernet Interface with the same IP address as another node 1 Disconnect your Interface from the LAN 2 Ping the disconnected Interface s IP address If you get an answer to the ping then the chosen IP address is already in use by another node You must correct this situation by assigning unique IP addresses To use another GE Fanuc Ethernet Interface refer to the PING command in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual UNIX is a registered trademark exclusively licensed through X Open Company LTD wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 15 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Installing an IC693CPU364 with Embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface The CPU364 with Embedded Ethernet Interface is mounted on the Series 90 30 PLC baseplate It is connected to an Ethernet network via a 10Base T port or a user provided transceiver cable and transceiver via an AAUI port IC693CPU364 Series 90 30 CPU Module with Ethernet Inter
211. hnique that allows delivery of a single packet of data to multiple nodes on the network Any node that joins a Multicast group will respond to the Multicast IP address assigned to that group Subsequently any data sent to that Multicast IP address may be received by all nodes which are members of that Multicast group Multicast Class D IP addresses 224 0 0 0 through 239 255 255 255 are reserved by the Internet authorities for multicasting Multicasting is a feature of Ethernet Global Data For more information on the use of multicasting in Ethernet Global Data see the topic Group Usage in the chapter Ethernet Global Data wwweasiamily com Ebfailcadsenred hotmaibegpr 6 3 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Gateways Gateways also known as routers connect individual physical networks into a system of networks When a node needs to communicate with a node on another physical network a gateway transfers the data between the two networks Networks Connected by a Gateway The following example shows Gateway G connecting Network 1 with Network 2 a45405 A 172 16 0 1 Network 1 172 16 0 2 G Gateway B c 172 17 0 3 172 17 0 1 172 17 0 2 Network 2 When host B with IP address 172 17 0 1 communicates with host C it knows from C s IP address that C is on the same network In an Ethernet environment B can then resolve C
212. i ONAE has The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 3 41 Section 1 Section 2 Minor Error Codes for Major Error Code 90H at Client PLC Continued 9690H Underlying TCP connection aborted reset by server end point 9790H Underlying TCP connection aborted by client end point 9890H The remote server has no Service Request Processor 9A90H Response to session request did not arrive in proper order 9B90H Session denied by server PLC 9C90H Data response did not arrive in proper order 9D90H Data response had unexpected size 9E90H Unrecognized COMMREQ command code A190H Invalid CRS word memory type A290H Failed an attempt to update the CRS word A490H Address length value invalid Must be 32 for Network Address name type BO90H Network Address name length error The name cannot exceed 31 ASCII characters and must be terminated with a NUL character zero B190H Specified Network Address name could not be resolved into an IP address B390H Internal name resolution error See PLC Fault Table or exception log for details B590H The channel the application is trying to access is owned by a different protocol www gadfamily com Eltancadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Controlling Communications in the Ladde
213. ill be 19 Valid ranges of values depend on the PLC s memory ranges Word 15 Local PLC Number of Memory Units Word 15 specifies the amount of data to be transferred The value entered is the number of memory units to be transferred where the size of a memory unit is either a bit byte or word as specified in Word 13 For example if Word 13 16 and Word 15 4 then 4 bytes 32 bits of I memory will be transferred For the Series 90 30 PLC a maximum of 8192 bits 1024 bytes or 512 words of data can be specified For the Series 90 70 PLC a maximum of 16384 bits 2048 bytes or 1024 words of data can be specified Word 16 Reserved Word 16 is reserved and should contain the value zero Word 17 Reserved Word 17 is reserved and should contain the value zero Word 18 Remote Host Network Address Type Word 18 specifies the format of the remote host s address In this release Word 18 must contain the value 1 or 3 A value of 1 indicates a dotted decimal IP address expressed using a separate register for each decimal digit A value of 3 indicates a Network Address name See Example 2 for information on using address type 3 Word 19 Remote Host Network Address Length Word 19 specifies the length in words of the remote host s IP address When an address type of 1 is specified in Word 18 Word 19 must contain 4 Words 20 23 Remote Host IP Address Words 20 23 specify the four integers one integer per word of the
214. ill delete Command 3003 Example 2 Read nine 9 Input Discretesfrom Address 10005 in the remote Modbus TCP server Store the registers at location T3 bit mode Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Dec Hex Word 1 00008 0008 Word 2 00000 0000 Word 3 00008 0008 Word 4 00009 0009 Word 5 00000 0000 Word 6 00000 0000 Word 7 03003 OBBB Word 8 00006 0006 Word 9 00002 0002 Word 10 00074 004A Word 11 00003 0003 Word 12 00005 0005 Word 13 00009 0009 Word 14 00001 0001 Length of Channel command Data Block 8 14 words Always 0 no wait mode request Memory type of CRS word R CRS word address minus 1 R10 Reserved Reserved Read from a Modbus TCP Device Channel number 6 Modbus Function Code Local PLC Memory Type Local PLC Starting Address Address in the Remote Device Number of Input Discretes to Read from the Remote Device Unit Identifier Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 identifies the COMMREQ as a Read Data from Modbus TCP Device command block Word 8 Channel Number Word 8 identifies the channel number previously allocated for communication with the remote Modbus TCP server Word 9 Modbus Function Code Word 9 specifies Modbus Function Code 2 Read Input Status Word 10 Local PLC Memory Type Words 10 11 specify
215. imeout errors will be reported by the Channel Error bit When the write period is very long minutes or hours In this case a shorter timeout value can be specified so the application doesn t have to wait for the write period to expire before taking action Word 13 Local PLC Memory Type Words 13 14 specify the location in the local PLC from where the Ethernet Interface will get the data to be written to the remote PLC Valid values for Word 13 are listed in the description of Establish Read Channel The amount of data to be www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete transferred is specified by the number of memory units of the data written to the remote PLC Word 17 Word 14 Local PLC Memory Starting Address Word 14 determines the starting address in the local PLC from which the data is to be written The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 13 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified for example if Word 13 16 and Word 14 2 then the starting address will be 19 Valid ranges of values depend on the PLC s memory ranges Word 15 Remote PLC Memory Type Words 15 16 specify the memory type and starting address in the remote PLC where the data is to be written Valid va
216. in rack installation in an expansion rack is not supported The Ethernet Interface will not operate properly if there are empty slots to the left of the slot you select 3 Connect one of the Ethernet ports on the Ethernet Interface to the network If you are using an external transceiver connect the transceiver cable to the AUI port on the Ethernet Interface The other end of the transceiver cable should be connected to an external IEEE 802 3 compatible transceiver that is attached to the Ethernet network SQE must be enabled on the transceiver Caution Do not connect or disconnect a transceiver or network cable to the AUI or BNC ports while power is applied to the PLC This may blow the port fuse and or cause permanent damage to the Ethernet Interface 4 Set the CPU Run Stop switch to STOP www gadfamily com Elacadsev2h hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete CMM742 Configuration Before you can use the Ethernet Interface with the Series 90 70 PLC you must configure the Interface using the PLC programming software The PLC configuration software allows you to specify the modules and I O that will reside in your Series 90 70 PLC rack s For the Ethernet Interface specifically the configuration software allows you to Define the Status address of the Ethernet Interface Assign the IP address for the Ethernet Interface and
217. in unison EOK ON E If the LAN LED is OFF Connect cable O LAN ON Traffic OFF the problem may be Examine PLC Fault Table to find out 0 STAT ON OFF E network cable not why the STAT LED is OFF Operational con ected If the STAT LED is OFF an exception condition has occurred wwwgadiamily com EMaikeadsened hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 2 39 Pinging TCP IP Ethernet Interfaces on the Network PING Packet InterNet Grouper is the name of a program used on TCP IP networks to test reachability of destinations by sending them an ICMP echo request message and waiting for a reply Most nodes on TCP IP networks including the Series 90 30 CPU374 implement a PING command You should ping each installed Ethernet Interface When the Ethernet Interface responds to the ping it verifies that the interface is operational and configured properly Specifically it verifies that acceptable TCP IP configuration information has been stored to the Interface Pinging the Interface from a UNIX Host or a PC Running TCP IP Software A ping command can be executed from a UNIX host or PC running TCP IP since most TCP IP communications software provides a ping command or from another Ethernet Interface When using a PC or UNIX host the user can refer to the documentation for the ping command but in general all that is required is the IP address of the remote host as
218. internal memory with a data sample after its own period timer expires affecting the length of the PLC sweep only for that particular exchange update Since an update occurs only once per period this mode has little effect on the average sweep time When the Ethernet Interface s period timer expires it produces the data sample from shared internal memory onto the network Since the CPU s period timer and the Ethernet Interface s period timer are asynchronous a produced data sample could lag somewhat behind the actual content of the CPU reference tables In a consuming PLC shared internal memory is updated as soon as the Ethernet Interface gets a data sample from the network After the CPU period timer expires the CPU updates its reference tables from shared internal memory Timing Considerations for the Series 90 30 CPU374 In the Series 90 30 CPU374 there is no asynchronous timer running in the CPU for either producer or consumer In a producing PLC the Ethernet Interface requests data from the CPU when the Ethernet Interface s timer expires The CPU updates the requested data in the shared memory on the next PLC sweep and that data is transferred on the network as soon as it is available In a consuming PLC the Ethernet Interface updates data in the shared memory as soon as it gets a data sample from the network then it notifies the CPU to transfer the data on its next sweep The data is transferred to the CPU referenc
219. irectly attach the Series 90 PLC to an Ethernet LAN via the built in network ports or via a user supplied transceiver and AUI or AAUI cable and to communicate with host computers and other Series 90 PLCs on the local network Ethernet Global Data Series 90 30 CPU364 and CPU374 and Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 only When used with the latest Series 90 CPUs the Ethernet Interface provides highly efficient periodic data transfer between PLCs using Ethernet Global Data exchanges Transfer data between PLCs The Ethernet Interface provides client capability the capability to initiate communications to other Series 90 Ethernet Interfaces using COMMREQ functions in the ladder program Access data using a Host computer Computer applications which use the SRTP protocol can access data within the Series 90 PLC through the server capability of the Ethernet Interface Communicate simultaneously to multiple devices The multiplexing capabilities of the Ethernet Interface along with Ethernet network s high capacity allow the PLC to communicate with several other devices at the same time Maintain compatibility with other GE Fanuc devices and devices from other vendors The Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface Series 90 30 CPU364 Embedded Ethernet Interface Series 90 30 CPU374 Embedded Ethernet Interface and Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 are compatible with each other They are also compatible with GE Fanuc programming packag
220. is exchange definition did not match the expected size 6 c Refresh timeout The exchange s timeout period is configured to a non zero value and the without data data has not been refreshed within the timeout period 7 c Data after The data has been refreshed since the previous consumption but was refresh timeout not refreshed within the timeout period IP Layer not This status can be set during exchange configuration if the Ethernet 10 PIC currently Interface detects that it cannot currently access a network cable not initialized connected hardware failure etc This is a temporary status that may change if successful network access becomes possible Lack of Local resources are not available to establish the exchange This error 12 PIC resource error can only occur during exchange configuration The PLC Fault Table should be examined to obtain more detail on the specific error Name A local produced exchange definition has specified a name for the Resolution in consumer address and the local Ethernet Interface is awaiting a response 16 p progress from a remote name server following exchange configuration This is a temporary status that will change when the name resolution completes If successful the status will become 0 No New Data if unsuccessful the status will become 4 Specification Error Loss of Ethernet This error can occur if the CPU no longer recognizes the Ethernet Interface error Interface within the PLC rack A loss
221. is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Example 2 Command Block Example using a Network Address Name This example is the same as Example except that the Network Address name of the Remote PLC PLC_laa is used instead of its IP address For more information on Network Address names see the chapter Network Administration Support Establish a channel Channel 5 to a remote PLC with a Network Address name of PLC_laa Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Read remote PLC registers R50 R57 to local PLC registers R100 R107 Repeat the read 10 times once every 7 seconds with a timeout of 500 ms for each read The term local PLC is used here to identify the client PLC the PLC that initiates the communications request The term remote PLC is used here to identify the server PLC the PLC that responds to the communications request Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4 Word 5 Word 6 Word 7 Word 8 Word 9 Word 10 Word 11 Word 12 Word 13 Word 14 Word 15 Word 16 Word 17 Word 18 Word 19 Word 20 Word 21 Word 22 Word 23 Word 24 Word 25 Word 26 Word 27 Word 28 Word 29 Word 30 Word 31 Word 32 Word 33 Word 34 Word 35 Word 36 51 Word 52 55 Word 56 59 Dec Hex 00045 002D 00000 0000 00008 0008 00009 0009 00000 0000 00000 0000 02003 07D3 00005 0005 00010 000A 00003 0003 00007 0007 00050 0032 00008 0008 0010
222. ith access to remote L memory These words are required only for access to such memory and will be ignored if the Memory Type field is not P or L Note The Program Name Words 24 27 and Program Block Name Words 28 31 must have each pair of ASCII characters reversed within the PLC memory For example the name MARY M 4DH A 41H R 52H Y 59H would have 414DH in the first word and 5952H in the second word wwwi gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Example 2 Command Block Example using a Network Address name This example is the same as Example except that the Network Address name of the Remote PLC PLC_1aa is used instead of its IP address For more information on Network Address names see the chapter Network Administration Support Establish a write channel Channel 6 to a remote PLC with a Network Address name of PLC_laa Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Write local PLC registers R50 RS7 to remote PLC registers R100 R107 Repeat the write indefinitely once every 7 seconds with a timeout of 500 ms for each write The term local PLC is used here to identify the client PLC the PLC that initiates the communications request The term remote PLC is used here to identify the server PLC the PLC that responds to t
223. ith that server is lost Then the server with the next lowest stratum number becomes the server of choice and the Ethernet Interface synchronizes to it if it receives two of its timing messages within a 150 second period A server is considered lost if more than 150 seconds elapse between timing messages The Station Manager command CHSN7P can be used to override the Ethernet Interface s automatic server selection strategy and identify specific server s to be used For more information on using the Station Manager refer to GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual Loss or Absence of SNTP Timing Signals If an Ethernet Interface is configured for SNTP but does not receive two timing messages from an SNTP network time server within a 150 second period the following will happen A fault entry will be placed in the PLC Fault Table A fault entry will be placed in the Ethernet Interface s exception log This log can be read by using the GE Fanuc Station Manager Details can be found in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual The Status word within a consumed exchange will indicate new data with a value of 3 instead of the normal 1 value indicating that SNTP is selected but the Ethernet Interface is not synchronized to an SNTP server This Status word value can be obtained from the PLC register configured for the particular exchange Note
224. its 2 for each channel Status Bits Brief Description 1 7 Reserved 8 AAUI 90 30 fuse blown 9 Any SRTP Channel Error 10 12 Reserved 13 LAN OK 14 Resource problem 15 Reserved 16 LAN Interface OK 17 Connection Open Channel 1 18 Reserved 47 Connection Open Channel 16 48 Reserved 49 80 Reserved for 90 30 Unless the LAN Interface OK bit is set Status Bit 16 the other status bits are invalid Note wwwgadiamily com EbMaieadserved holmailQmmnnel Commands The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Status Bit 8 AAUI 90 30 Fuse Blown This bit is set to 1 when a network port fuse is blown Otherwise it is set to zero This failure is also reported to the PLC Fault Table as LAN interface hardware failure switched off network Operation on other ports is not affected This problem can be caused by a defective transceiver shorted network or transceiver cable or a defective Ethernet Interface The fuse is not field replacable so the module must be returned to GE Fanuc for repair Status Bit 9 Any SRTP Channel Error This bit is set to 1 if there is presently an error on any of the established SRTP channels i e if the individual Channel Error bit is set for any SRTP channel This bit is not used by Modbus Channels Status Bit 13 LAN OK This input will be held at the value 1 as long as the Ethernet Interf
225. ized with this common SNTP timing message Timestamping EGD Exchanges Each EGD exchange contains a timestamp that pinpoints when the associated data was transferred from the producing PLC s CPU to its Ethernet Interface for transmission over the network The timestamp value is based on a built in clock in the Ethernet Interface It sends this value to the PLC CPU which uses it to timestamp its data exchanges Its time clock is synchronized to one of the following two sources PLC s Time Clock If the Network Time Sync parameter of the Ethernet Interface is set to None or DISABLED the Ethernet Interface s built in time clock is synchronized once at power up or restart to the clock in the local PLC CPU The disadvantage of this source is that the time clocks in the various PLCs on the network are not synchronized so timestamps produced by different PLCs cannot be compared accurately SNTP Server s Time Clock If the Ethernet Interface s Network Time Sync parameter is set to SNTP or ENABLED the Ethernet Interface s built in clock is periodically synchronized to the clock on the SNTP server This method has the advantage that all Ethernet Interfaces configured to use SNTP will have updated synchronized timestamps because they will all be synchronized to the SNTP server s clock Therefore accurate timing comparisons between exchanged data can be made For example if alarm data were sent over the network from several PLCs it might be adv
226. k Address Name The first method is a default mechanism for the Ethernet Interface to assign itself a network address name If the Ethernet Interface has no source for a network address name at startup it will generate a name in the form cemm321_xxxxxx for the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface cpu364_xxxxxx for the Series 90 30 CPU364 Embedded Ethernet Interface cmm742_xxxxxx for the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 where xxxxxx is the ASCII representation of the six rightmost hexadecimal digits of the MAC address used by this module This default mechanism will be used whenever no name is assigned to the Ethernet Interface in the module configuration using the PLC programming software if supported as described in the following section Assigned DDP Network Address Name The second method is assignment of a network address name to the Ethernet Interface by the PLC programming software if supported The network address name is assigned in module configuration as the Adapter Name for the Ethernet Interface and stored to the PLC This assigned DDP network address name will override the default DDP network address name See Online Help in the PLC programmer software for instructions For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface a network address name may only be assigned with the Station Manager command CHMYNAME This command is documented in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager M
227. k Address type are provided for all establish commands For further information on the use of Network Address names see the chapter Network Administration Support wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 9 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Establish Read Channel 2003 The Establish Read Channel command requests that a channel be associated with a remote PLC and that data from the remote PLC be transferred periodically to the local PLC The Command Block specifies the period the number of reads from the server remote PLC to perform and the timeout allowed in waiting for each transfer to complete The first read is performed immediately regardless of the period specified Example 1 Command Block Basic Example Establish a channel Channel 5 to a remote PLC at IP address 10 0 0 1 Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Read remote PLC registers R50 R57 to local PLC registers R100 R107 Repeat the read 10 times once every 7 seconds with a timeout of 500 ms for each read The term local PLC is used here to identify the client PLC the PLC that initiates the communications request The term remote PLC is used here to identify the server PLC the PLC that responds to the communications request Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4 Word 5 Word 6 Word 7 Word 8 Word 9 Word 10 Word 11 Word 12 Word 13 Word 14 Word 15 Word 16 Word 17 Word 18
228. l other bits can be set as desired as long as all stations on the network have unique addresses An example of a locally administered MAC address is shown below Byte 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hex 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Binary 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 Bit Order 8765 4321 ere MSB of the LSB of the MAC address first bit transmitted MAC address last bit transmitted If you must change the Station MAC address check with the person administering your network to make sure that you select an address that fits into your local administration scheme www eadfamily com Eltacadseve hoHnalC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Chapter Troubleshooting 7 This chapter is a guide to troubleshooting and problem isolation for the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface the Series 90 30 CPU364 the Series 90 30 CPU374 and the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 Diagnostic Tools Available for Troubleshooting What to do if you Cannot Solve the Problem PLC Fault Table GFK 1541B www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Diagnostic Tools Available for Troubleshooting There are several tools to assist you in diagnosing problems with the Series 90 Ethernet Interface and the network Use the Ethernet Interface LEDs to troub
229. lcadseniahi ONAE has 3 19 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Word 18 Remote PLC Network Address Type Word 18 specifies the format of the remote PLC address Currently Word 18 must contain the value 1 or 3 A value of 1 indicates a dotted decimal IP address expressed using a separate register for each decimal digit A value of 3 indicates a Network Address name See Example 2 for information on using address type 3 Word 19 Remote PLC Network Address Length Word 19 specifies the length in words of the remote PLC IP address When an address type of 1 is specified in Word 18 Word 19 must contain 4 Words 20 23 Remote PLC IP Address Words 20 23 specify the four integers one integer per word of the dotted decimal IP address of the remote PLC to be accessed Words 24 27 Remote PLC Program Name Words 24 27 specify the case sensitive zero terminated and padded program name also called task name which can be found through the PROG Station Manager command on the server Ethernet Interface to be used with access to remote P or L memory These words are required only for access to such memory and will be ignored if the Memory Type field is not P or L Words 28 31 Remote PLC Program Block Name Words 28 31 specify the case sensitive zero terminated and padded program block name which can be found in the program block declaration in the server ladder program to be used w
230. leshoot a problem on power up of the Ethernet Interface and for an immediate visual summary of the operational state of the Interface Use the Series 90 PLC Fault Table to troubleshoot a problem once the Interface is running It provides a record of exceptions logged by the PLC the Ethernet Interface and other Series 90 modules The PLC Fault Table may be accessed through the PLC programming software Look in the PLC Fault Table for a logged fault then refer to the PLC Fault Table section in this chapter for instructions on what action to take Use the Status Data to troubleshoot ladder programs containing COMMREQ functions that initiate communications The status data consists primarily of the Status bits and the Communications Status words For Ethernet Global Data operation Exchange Status words can be used to troubleshoot exchange operations Refer to the chapter Ethernet Global Data for more information Use the Station Manager software to troubleshoot a problem with the Ethernet Interface with the network with PLC backplane communication or with your application The LOG TALLY EXS CHANNEL and STAT Station Manager commands are especially useful The LOG command provides a complete record of exceptions occurring with the network and Interface The TALLY command provides statistics about operation and performance of the network and Interface The EXS command provides information about COMMREQs The CHANNEL comman
231. lly does not guarantee that the next transfer has not begun or completed Sequencing Communications Requests If the Ethernet Interface receives Command Blocks from the PLC CPU faster than the Interface can process them the Interface will log an exception event 08 Entry 2 0024H and will log the PLC Fault Table entry Backplane Communications with PLC Fault Lost Request Only one COMMREQ function per channel can be pending at one time A COMMREQ function is pending from the time it is initiated in the ladder program until its CRS word has been updated to a non zero value by the Ethernet Interface wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 47 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Managing Channels and TCP Connections In Certain Conditions TCP Connections Can Be Totally Consumed When you issue a COMMREQ to establish a read or write channel a TCP connection is created the transfer s are made then upon completion of all the transfers the TCP connection is terminated It takes time to create and to terminate these connections If an application is constructed so that it rapidly and repeatedly establishes a channel with only one repetition one transfer the available TCP connections for the Ethernet Interface may be totally consumed A snapshot of the state of the TCP connections would show some of them being created some being terminated and some active but none available
232. lock Move Functions are taken from the Establish Read Channel 2003 command Example in this chapter Nicknames are used in this example to make the ladder program easier to follow LANIFOK is bit 16 of the LAN Interface Status bits All other nicknames can be assigned as you desire wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 43 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete LANIFOK LAN_OK 1 H BEGREAD g g g i g READREQ tH LAN_OK READREO HOVE FAULT 1 1 rH i o jIN Qf xR00010 xR00010 LAN_OK READREO oem s 17 4IN1 Qf lt R00301 x INi Qf R00315 R00301 i R00308 2 RO0315 5 LAN_OK READREQ i xR00322 6 LAN_OK READREQ HK R00301 400301 4 a www gadfamily com Ehltaicadsev2 hQHnalbC nGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Rung 1 Input LANIFOK bit 16 of the LAN Interface Status bits monitors the health of the Ethernet Interface If it is OK to send a COMMREQ the LAN_OK coil is ON LAN_OK is used as an interlock for Rungs 3 6 Rung 2 Input BEGREAD triggers READREQ which enables execution of the MOVE and COMMREQ functions READREQ is a one shot Positive Transition coil activating once when BEGREAD transitions from OFF to ON Rung 3 The MOVE WORD function moves a zero to the CRS word
233. lso Hostid Network An arrangement of nodes and interconnecting branches Network Adapter The device such as the Ethernet Interface providing communications services for a particular network Network Address Name A character string that is used in lieu of an IP address The client and or server device uses Name Resolution to resolve this symbolic name into the actual IP address This name represents the address on the network of a particular network adapter Also referred to as Adapter Name Network Switch An Ethernet device that dynamically connects two communicating nodes without propagating the data to other Ethernet devices also connected to the switch Node The physical module that connects a node to the network The Ethernet Interface is an example of a node It connects a station PLC or CNC to a network Factory LAN A station may contain more than one Ethernet Interface and therefore contains more than one node Octet A group of 8 bits operated on as a single unit See also Byte One Way Propagation Time See Transmission Path Delay Path The sequence of segments and repeaters providing the connectivity between two DTEs In CSMA CD networks there is one and only one path between any two DTEs Peer Another entity at the same level layer in the communication hierarchy Peer Peer Communication between nodes at the same level or layer in the hierarchy Physical Address The unique physical layer address associated wi
234. lues for Word 15 are listed under Establish Read Channel If P memory is used you must specify a Program name in Words 24 27 If L memory is used you must specify a Program name in Words 24 27 and a Program Block name in Words 28 31 Word 16 Remote PLC Memory Starting Address Word 16 determines the starting address in the remote PLC where the data is to be written The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 15 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified for example if Word 15 16 and Word 16 9 then the starting address will be 165 Valid ranges of values depend on the remote PLC s memory ranges Word 17 Remote PLC Number of Memory Units Word 17 specifies the amount of data to be transferred The value entered is the number of memory units to be transferred where the size of a memory unit is either a bit byte or word as specified in Word 15 For example if Word 15 16 and Word 17 4 then 4 bytes 32 bits of I memory will be transferred The user is responsible for assuring that this area is large enough to contain the requested data without overwriting other application data For the Series 90 30 PLC a maximum of 8192 bits 1024 bytes or 512 words of data can be specified For the Series 90 70 PLC a maximum of 16384 bits 2048 bytes or 1024 words of data can be specified wwweasiamily com Ebhai
235. ly less than 5 seconds requests a restart of the Ethernet Interface When the Restart pushbutton is pressed all LEDs go out When it is released all LEDs flash ON then power up diagnostics run and the software on the Interface is restarted into the Operational state Restart and Enter Software Load State Pressing and holding the Restart pushbutton until the bottom LED STATUS turns ON between 5 and 10 seconds forces a restart and requests entrance to the Software Load state A reload is used to install a software update into the module and is not part of normal operation When the Restart pushbutton is pressed all LEDs go out After approximately 5 seconds have elapsed the STATUS LED bottom LED comes ON to indicate that the Ethernet Interface will request a reload After the Restart pushbutton is released all LEDs flash ON then power up diagnostics run and the Ethernet Interface waits for the software load with all LEDs blinking in unison Note Reloading the Ethernet Interface requires the attachment of the PC Software Loader to the Software Loader port and initiating a load with the PC Software Loader The PC Software Loader is a separate software utility that updates the communications software in the Ethernet Interface This utility is supplied with any updates to the Ethernet Interface software See Appendix C Upgrading the Ethernet Interface Firmware for more information Note At any time before you initiate a load
236. ly for access to such memory and will be ignored if the Memory Type field is not P or L See Note below Words 56 59 Remote PLC Program Block Name Words 56 59 specify the case sensitive zero terminated and padded program block name which can be found in the program block declaration in the server ladder program to be used with access to remote L memory These words are required only for access to such memory and will be ignored if the Memory Type field is not P or L Note The Program Name Words 52 55 and Program Block Name Words 56 59 must have each pair of ASCII characters reversed within the PLC memory For example the name MARY M 4DH A 41H R 52H Y 59H would have 414DH in the first word and 5952H in the second word www gadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Establish Write Channel 2004 The Establish Write Channel command requests that a channel be connected to a remote PLC and that data from the local PLC be transferred periodically to the remote PLC The Command Block specifies the period the number of writes to the server remote PLC to perform and the timeout allowed in waiting for each transfer to complete The first write is performed immediately regardless of the period specified Example 1 Command Block Basic Example Establish
237. m This section provides tips on how to control communications in your ladder program Only segments of actual ladder logic are included Topics discussed are Essential Elements of the Ladder Program Troubleshooting Your Ladder Program Monitoring the Communications Channel Essential Elements of the Ladder Program Every ladder program whether in the developmental phase or the operational phase should do the following before initiating a COMMREQ function 1 Initiate the COMMREQ function with a one shot transitional coil This prevents sending the same COMMREQ Command Block more than once 2 Include at least the LAN Interface OK bit in the LAN Interface Status Word as an interlock contact for the COMMREQ function You may choose to add more interlocks 3 Zero the word location you specify for the COMMREQ Status CRS word and the FT Outputs of the COMMREQ Function Block before the COMMREQ function is initiated 4 Move the command code and parameters for the Channel command into the memory location specified in IN input of the COMMREQ Function Block before the COMMREQ function is initiated The example ladder program segment starting on the next page illustrates how to incorporate these important points in your program www gadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnaC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete COMMREQ Example The input val
238. me resolution will be used See Name Resolution in the chapter Network Administration Support for more information Network synchronized time stamping is not used The identification of the PLCs and the details of the exchange are shown in the tables below PLC2 Exchange ID 3 Exchange ID 2 Exchange ID 1 Producer Consumer Information for Entire EGD System EXAMPLE 3 Your Name for P C Local Ethernet Interface s the PLC Producer ID Network CCU Device IP Address Equipment Adapter Name Name Folder Name PLC1 X X 0 0 0 1 PLC1_A PLC1_A 10 0 0 23 PLC1 X 0 0 0 1 PLC1_B PLC1_B 10 0 0 34 PLC2 X 0 0 0 2 PLC2 PLC2 10 0 0 41 PLC3 X X 0 0 0 3 PLC3 PLC3 10 0 0 50 P Producer C Consumer Use your own IP addresses here Produced Exchanges Information EXAMPLE 3 Local Exchange Local Adapter Name Consumer Consumer Send Producer Reply Status Producer ID ID Type Address Type Period Rate Word 0 0 01 1 PLCLA Name PLC3 Always 1000 0 Stai ooo 3 PiciB Name PLC2 Always 1000 0 Stats 0003 2 Pcs Name PLCT_A Always 1000 0 Star Variable List for Produced Exchanges EXAMPLE 3 Local Exchange Name Address Length Type Producer ID ID 0 0 0 1 17 coma R00100 5 WORD Conveyor in PLC 0 0 0 1 1 Conveyors R00105 WORD Conveyor2 i in PLC1 ooo o i vai Pool io WORD Vai PLCS Description
239. memory in word mode P C PAQ 12 Analog output memory in word mode P C l 16 Discrete input memory in byte mode P C PQ 18 Discrete output memory in byte mode P C T 20 Discrete temporary memory in byte mode P C M 22 Discrete momentary memory in byte mode P C PSA 24 Discrete system memory group A in byte mode P C PSB 26 Discrete system memory group B in byte mode P C PSC 28 Discrete system memory group C in byte mode P C PS 30 Discrete system memory in byte mode P G 56 Discrete global data table in byte mode P C I override 114 Discrete override input memory in byte mode P Q override 116 Discrete override output memory in byte mode P T override 118 Discrete override temporary memory in byte mode P M override 120 Discrete override momentary memory in byte mode P SA override 122 Discrete override system memory group A in byte mode P PSB override 124 Discrete override system memory group B in byte mode P SC override 126 Discrete override system memory group C in byte mode P S override 128 Discrete override system memory in byte mode P G override 130 Discrete override global data table in byte mode P Ignore bytes 255 Can be used to ignore produced data in a consumer C wwwigadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnaC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Adapter Names Aliases and Groups Setting Adapter Names and Aliases in the Windows Based Programming So
240. mmand Block consists of two parts Common Area includes the address of the COMMREQ Status word CRS word Data Block Area describes the Channel command to be executed When the COMMREQ function is initiated the Command Block is transferred to the Ethernet Interface for action Modbus TCP Channel Commands The Channel commands are a set of client PLC commands used to communicate with a server Up to 16 channels numbered 1 16 can be established by a Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface The channel number is specified in the Command Block for the Channel command The channel can be monitored using the Channel Status bits Status Data There are several types of status available to the client PLC logic program LAN Interface Status Bits LIS Bits The LIS bits comprise bits 1 16 of the 80 bit status area The location of this 80 bit status area is assigned using the Configuration software in the Status Address field The LIS bits contain information on the status of the Local Area Network LAN and the Ethernet Interface itself Channel Status Bits The Channel Status bits comprise bits 17 80 64 bits of the 80 bit status area When used for Modbus TCP channels these bits consist of a connection open bit and a unused bit reserved for future use for each of the 16 channels that can be established Status bits for unused channels are always set to zero COMMREQ Status Word CRS Word The 16 bit CRS word will receive the initial
241. mulator to the Station Manager RS 232 serial port on the Ethernet Interface Use the NODE Station Manager command to verify that the terminal or emulator is properly communicating with the Station Manager software in the Ethernet Interface A typical NODE command is shown below gt node IC697 PLC Factory LAN Ethernet Interface Type 2 Copyright c 1996 All rights reserved Version 1 10 25A1 TCP IP Version 1 00 12A1 Software Loader IP Address 0 0 0 0 MAC Address 080019010688 PLC CPU version 5 00 supports restricted LAN Interface operation kkk SRTP server only client operation is not permitted kkk LAN Interface cannot be configured with PLC Configurator kkk Use CHSOSW Station Manager cmd to enter module configuration ke PLC CPU version 6 00 or higher is required for full operation If the Ethernet Interface has not been previously configured the NODE output will also indicate that the Ethernet Interface is waiting for a valid IP address 7 Use the LOGIN Station Manager command to log in in order to access the Modify level commands needed later The LOGIN command is shown below gt login After entering the LOGIN command the Station Manager prompts for the Modify level password Password Enter your password which is not echoed The default password is system lower case If the password matches the current Modify level password a confirmation message is 66 displayed the Station
242. n User Action Check Ethernet Interface revision order upgrade kit for Ethernet Interface wwweadfamily com Eltaicadse ve hoHnaC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Appendix Glossary A This appendix contains a list of conventional communications terms Adapter Name A name assigned to locally identify a module e g an Ethernet Interface in the local station See also Network Address Name Address Administration The assignment of LAN addresses locally or on a universal basis Address Field The part of a Protocol Data Unit PDU that contains an address Address Resolution Protocol ARP The Internet Protocol that binds dynamically a high level Internet Address to a low level physical hardware address such as a MAC address Advanced User Parameters AUP Apple Attachment Unit Interface AAUD A lower power smaller connector adaptation of the IEEE 802 3 AUI Attachment Unit Interface AUI Ina network node on a Local Area Network the interface between the medium attachment unit MAU and the data terminal equipment Often called transceiver cable AUI AAUI Port A connector on the network interface AUI AAUI Cable The cable between the AUI AAUI port and the transceiver some transceivers plug directly into the AUI AAUI port thus requiring no separate cable AUP See Advance User Parameters BOOTP BOOTP i
243. n Address label lists the MAC address to be used by this Interface Serial Number Label The Serial Number Label indicates the serial number of this Interface wwwgadiamily com EMaieadsened hotmail com 2 31 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Installing the CPU374 in the PLC For general information about module and system installation refer to GFK 0356 Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual Equipment Required to Perform the Installation Procedures Make sure you have the items listed below before you begin A Series 90 30 PLC CPU baseplate with power supply The Series 90 30 CPU374 requires PLC power supply IC693PWR3721 Revision K or later IC693PWR322 or IC693PWR330 A high capacity Power Supply is recommended as the 374 uses about 60 of a standard Power Supply s capacity PLC programming software Logic Developer Version 2 60 or higher Control Version 2 01 or higher or VersaPro version 2 03 or higher And a compatible PC compatible personal computer Ethernet cables A serial cable for the Station Manager port on the Ethernet Interface see Appendix B Optional A terminal or IBM compatible personal computer equipped with terminal emulation software Optional Note If your installation requires CE Mark compliance please refer to GFK 1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards shipped with the PLC programming softwa
244. n IP address Dotted Decimal The notation for IP gateway and name server addresses as well as the subnet mask It consists of 4 decimal numbers 0 255 separated by periods Example IP address 10 0 0 1 Duplex The ability to send and receive data simultaneously full duplex or not half duplex Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP A superset of the BOOTP protocol See BOOTP Ethernet Global Data EGD A proprietary protocol that provides efficient connectionless periodic data transfer over an Ethernet network Operates over the UDP protocol Ethernet Interface The general term used in this manual to identify the GE Fanuc hardware module with or without software that connects a PLC or CNC to a network It may also appear in the shortened form Interface See also LAN Interface Exchange In Ethernet Global Data a set of variables or memory locations within the PLC or other device to be transferred from a Producer to a Consumer See also Producer Consumer Exchange ID In Ethernet Global Data a numerical value assigned by the user to identify a specific data exchange to be sent by the producing device See also Producer Consumer Exchange Exchange Status Word The 16 bit Exchange Status word continuously indicates the status of an Ethernet Global Data exchange Extended Netid See Subnet Id Flash Memory A type of read only memory that can be erased and reprogrammed under local software control It is used to s
245. n a Channel is in use as an SRTP Channel these bits are not used Note For Series 90 30 PLCs bits 49 80 are reserved for future use wwwigadfamily com Eltacadseve hoHnalC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Communications Status Words The COMMREQ Status word CRS word reports status in the format shown below The CRS word location is specified in Words 3 and 4 of the Command Block CRS Word in Hex Format High Low 00 00 Minor Error Codes high byte Success and Major Error Codes low byte There are several points to remember when interpreting the contents of the COMMREQ Status word 1 Display the Status Words in hexadecimal form to more easily differentiate the high and low bytes A good way to do this is to use a MOVE WORD function block to display the hexadecimal value within the ladder program The Ethernet Interface will never send a zero for the COMMREQ Status word to the PLC CPU The user program should zero the COMMREQ Status word before issuing the COMMREQ function and then check for a non zero value indicating that the Ethernet Interface is responding to the COMMREQ A good way to do this is to use a MOVE WORD function block to zero the CRS word A status code of 1 in the low byte and 0 in the high byte indicates that the request was successful All other non zero values indicate errors Refer to the tables
246. n a PLC with a low scan time can result in the Ethernet Interface being unable to produce all the required data Effect of Enabling User Interrupts If user interrupts are enabled applies to Series 90 70 only the data values of a variable greater than 256 bytes are not guaranteed to be atomic or coherent meaning their snapshot is taken at the same instant If atomic data transfer is desired for a variable within the exchange disable user interrupts or limit the size of the variable to 256 bytes or less Update Timeout Period Set the update timeout period for the consumer to twice the producer period and at least 20 milliseconds greater than the consumer period Otherwise the PLC may occasionally falsely report refreshment faults Use zero for the update timeout period of a consumed exchange to disable timeout detection wwweadiamily com Ebfaileadservd hotmail com 5 7 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete General PLC Timing Considerations when using EGD When designing applications using EGD it is important to understand that the Ethernet Interface and PLC CPU share internal memory for EGD operations This shared memory interface is represented by the diagram below CPU ETHERNET INTERFACE SHARED INTERNAL MEMORY MEMORY NETWORK Timing Considerations for the Series 90 30 CPU364 and Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface In a producing PLC the CPU updates shared
247. n the Series 90 30 PLC baseplate It is connected to an Ethernet network via either or both of its auto sensing 10Base T 100Base TX ports 1C693CPU374 Series 90 30 CPU Module with Ethernet Interface EOK O LAN O STAT O PS PORT CPU374 ON S H ETHERNET RESTART a STATION MGR LINKIACT 100Mbps DEFAULT SERIAL LINK ACT STATION NUMBER ADDRESS LABEL 100Mbps a z amp wi fi e s z D z amp E i e e z FRAME OSs The Series 90 30 CPU374 has several user accessible elements only the Ethernet Interface s applicable elements are discussed here Three Ethernet LEDs are located at the top left of the module The Ethernet Restart pushbutton is located below the LEDs The RS 232 serial port with the RJ 11 connector similar to a modular telephone connector is used to connect to Station Manager Below the serial port are twoRJ 45 ports either or both of which can be used to connect to the Ethernet network The default station address MAC address label is located on the outside of the module LEDs There are eight LEDs on the CPU374 Four of these LEDs EOK LAN STAT and PS PORT give module status information Four LEDS are associated with the two RJ 45 ports The PS Power Supply PORT LED is not Ethernet related it indicates the presence of serial traffic through the serial port of the PLC s power supply Each of the three Ethernet LEDs EOK LAN and STAT can be ON OFF BLINKING
248. n to the PLC so these settings can take effect Refer to GFK 0466 Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual for more information on configuring the Ethernet Interface using Logicmaster 90 30 software CMM321 Configuration Parameters Ethernet Parameters Configuration Mode This is fixed as TCP IP Status Address The Status address is the location of the LAN Interface Status LIS bits 16 bits and the Channel Status bits 64 bits The Channel Status bits are always located immediately following the LAN Interface Status bits The Status address must be assigned to I memory only The default value is the next available I address Note Do not use the 80 bits assigned to the LIS bits and Channel Status bits for other purposes or your data will be overwritten Status Length This is fixed at 80 bits the sum of the LIS bits and the Channel Status bits IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address and Name Server IP Address These values should be assigned by the person in charge of your network the network administrator TCP IP network administrators are familiar with these parameters It is important that these parameters are correct otherwise the Ethernet Interface may be unable to communicate on the network and or network operation may be corrupted It is especially important that each node on the network is assigned a unique IP address However if you have no network administrator and are configurin
249. nabled on transceiver If the STAT LED is OFF an exception condition has occurred Connect cable and transceiver properly Replace transceiver Terminate network cable properly Set SQE ON on transceiver in accord with manufacturer s instructions Examine PLC Fault Table to find out why the STAT LED is OFF Identify the PLC fault message using the PLC Programmer then refer to Table 8 1 in Chapter 8 for corrective actions www gadfamily com Eltapcadse v2 hoHnalC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B Pinging TCP IP Ethernet Interfaces on the Network PING Packet InterNet Grouper is the name of a program used on TCP IP networks to test reachability of destinations by sending them an ICMP echo request message and waiting for a reply Most nodes on TCP IP networks including the CMM321 implement a PING command You should ping each installed Ethernet Interface When the Ethernet Interface responds to the ping it verifies that the interface is operational and configured properly Specifically it verifies that acceptable TCP IP configuration information has been stored to the Interface Pinging the Interface from a UNIX host or a PC Running TCP IP Software A ping command can be executed from a UNIX host or PC running TCP IP since most TCP IP communications software provides a ping command or from another Et
250. nal AUI transceiver connected to the AUI port that is externally powered This jumper is normally not installed Replaceable 12VDC Fuse A user replaceable fuse FU3 is provided on the 12VDC power that is supplied by the Ethernet Interface to the AUI network port for use by an external transceiver Replace only with a 5 x 20mm 250V 1 A fast acting fuse www gadfamily com Elacadse veh hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Installing the CMM742 in the PLC For general information about module and system installation refer to GFK 0262 Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Installation Manual Equipment Required to Perform the Installation Procedures Make sure you have the items listed below before you begin Series 90 70 PLC rack Series 90 70 power supply To use the AUI port the power supply must be one of the following types which provide 12 Vdc for an external transceiver on the AUI port IC697PWR711 IC697PWR724 or IC697PWR748 Ifthe AUI port will not be used 5 Vdc is all that is required Under these conditions power supply IC697PWR710 is sufficient A Series 90 70 CPU PLC programming software Logicmaster 90 70 version 6 02 or higher or Control version 1 0 or higher runs on a personal computer Ethernet cables and if using the AUI port an Ethernet compatible AUI transceiver See Appendix B
251. names are configured If using DNS names make a list of them Note that DNS names must be different than the adapter name configured for the Ethernet Interface and must be defined at the remote DNS name server before use See Name Resolution in the chapter Network Administration Support for more information Define the exchanges of data you want to configure Make a list of the CCU device names used to connect to the producer and consumer PLCs See the topic Naming Conventions if these names have not already been configured CCU device names are the names used to identify the Ethernet Interface as configured in the Communication Configuration Utility Use tables similar to the following to record this information Producer Consumer Information for Entire EGD System EXAMPLE Your Name P C Local Ethernet Interface s for the PLC Producer Network CCU Device IP Address Equipment ID Adapter Name Name Folder Name PLC1 X X 0 0 0 1 PLCI_A PLCI1_A 10 0 0 23 PLC1 X 0 0 0 1 PLC1_B PLC1_B 10 0 0 34 PLC2 X 0 0 0 2 PLC2 PLC2 10 0 0 41 PLC3 X X 0 0 0 3 PLC3 PLC3 10 0 0 50 P Producer C Consumer www gadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Recording Exchange Information The produced consumed exchanges tables below were designed with columns that m
252. ncadseveh hoHnaC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Appendix PC Software Loader C Note For the IC693CPU374 operating firmware for both the PLC CPU and the Embedded Ethernet Interface are upgraded via the power supply serial port This appendix does not apply to the CPU374 See lt reference CPU manual here gt for CPU374 upgrade instructions The GE Fanuc Series 90 Ethernet Interface has its operating firmware stored in FLASH memory as opposed to EPROMS You can perform a firmware upgrade for your Ethernet Interface while the PLC remains powered on and running However Ethernet communication through your Interface will be interrupted until the upgrade has completed successfully A firmware upgrade for the Ethernet Interface is provided on a floppy diskette A Firmware Update Utility provided on the floppy diskette in both a Windows based and a DOS based version controls the download of new firmware from the floppy diskette to the FLASH memory To perform the upgrade using a personal computer PC running Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT 4 0 refer to the section Updating Firmware Under Windows below for instructions to use the WinLoader program To perform the upgrade using a PC running MS DOS Revision 3 3 or higher Windows 3 11 or Windows NT 3 51 refer to the section Updating Firmware Under DOS and Windows 3 xx
253. ndicators of a communications channel are the Channel Status bits Channel Error bit and Data Transfer bit In addition the CRS word and the DCS words can be used to more precisely troubleshoot any problems that may occur Monitoring the COMMREQ Status Word It is critical to monitor the CRS word for each COMMREQ function you initiate First zero the associated CRS word before executing the COMMREQ function Then when the CRS word becomes non zero you know the Ethernet Interface has updated it If the CRS word is updated to a one 1 then the Command Block was processed successfully by the Ethernet Interface If the CRS word is updated to a value other than 1 then an error has occurred in processing the Command Block Do not use data received from a server until the CRS word for that channel is 1 or the Data Transfer bit goes to 1 www gadfamily com Eltacadseve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Monitoring the Channel Error Bit This bit normally 0 is the primary indicator for an error on a channel It indicates any channel error fatal or non fatal It does not necessarily indicate that the channel is down idle If this bit indicates an error Initiate the Abort command and then reinitiate the Read or Write command or if the error persists Initiate the Retrieve Detailed Channel Status command to find out if the channel
254. net Interface 10Base T Type CMM321 versions EF or earlier do not have a 10Base T port CMM321 k O oK ETHERNET an O LAN INTERFACE Frox O staTO STAT ETHERNET 4 T RESTART RESTART PUSHBUTTON pent i oa _ STATION ie St Serial Number MGR lt lt gt oa RS 232 RS 232 STATION Label Internal rt ok oe MANAGER PORT RJ 11 Default Station Address Label 10BASE T lt lt 10BASE T Internal PORT RJ 45 AAUI PORT This module has several user accessible features Four LEDs are located at the top of the board The Restart pushbutton is located immediately below the LEDs The Station Manager port RS 232 serial port with an RJ 11 connector is located on the front of the module The 10Base T Ethernet port RJ 45 connector is located on the front of the module It does not require an external transceiver The AAUI port 14 pin AAUI connector is accessible through an opening in the bottom of the module It requires an external transceiver The Default Station Address label lists the MAC address to be used by this Interface It is located by removing the module s front cover and looking on the circuit board The module s serial number is on the silver label on the left side of the module www cadfamily com Eltaicadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete LE
255. net Interface will get the data to be written to the remote PLC Valid values for Word 10 are listed on page 4 14 Word 11 Local PLC Starting Address Word 11 determines the starting address in the local PLC from which the data is to be written The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 10 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified Valid ranges of values depend on the PLC s memory ranges Word 12 Remote Device Address Word 12 specifies the destination coil address in the Modbus TCP device Word 13 Number Coils in Remote Device Words 13 specifies the quantity of coils to write to the remote device For Modbus Function Code 5 Force Single Coil this must be set to 1 Word 14 Unit Identifier Default is 1 This field is typically used by Ethernet to Serial bridges to specify the address of a Modbus Slave on a multidrop link The Modbus TCP Unit Identifier is a special control code used in a Modbus TCP message block This value is 1 for most Modbus TCP messages www gadfamily com Eltapcadsev2 hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Command 3004 Example 3 Set Multiple Registers Write the four registers from Discrete Input Memory 140 to address 40200 in the remote Modbus TCP server Return the COMM
256. nformation on these fields We recommend leaving the serial port parameters at default settings 7 If you want to view the power consumption of this module click the Power Consumption tab After you have configured all of the module s applicable parameters click the OK button The module will now appear in the selected slot 8 Store the configuration to the PLC so these settings can take effect For more information refer to Online Help in the PLC programming software wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 47 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Configuring the Interface Using Logicmaster 90 70 Configuration Software To configure the Ethernet Interface access the I O Configuration rack screen in the Logicmaster 90 70 Configuration Package and do the following 1 Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured 2 Press the Communications softkey i e Comm F6 3 Press ethnet F2 4 Press L down arrow to highlight IC697CMM742 then press Enter to select the Ethernet Interface 5 Configure the Ethernet parameters Refer to the topic Configuration Parameters that follows for more information on these fields 6 Optionally after you have assigned the Ethernet parameters press Page Down to display the serial port parameters You can then change the default settings of the serial
257. nly if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Command 3004 Example 1 Set Single Register Write one register from AI10 to address 40200 in the remote Modbus TCP server Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Use channel 6 a channel previously opened with the Open Modbus TCP Client Connection COMMREQ Dec Hex Word 1 00008 0008 Length of Channel command Data Block Word 2 00000 0000 Always 0 no wait mode request Word 3 00008 0008 Memory type of CRS word R Word 4 00009 0009 CRS word address minus 1 R10 Word 5 00000 0000 Reserved Word 6 00000 0000 Reserved Word 7 03004 OBBC Write to a Modbus TCP Device Word 8 00006 0006 Channel number 6 Word 9 00006 0006 Modbus Function Code Preset Single Register Word 10 00010 000A Local PLC Memory Type Word 11 00010 000A Local PLC Starting Address Word 12 00200 00C8 Address in the Remote Device Word 13 00001 0001 Number of Registers in the Remote Device Word 14 00001 0001 Unit Identifier Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 identifies the COMMREQ as a Write Data to remote Modbus TCP device Word 8 Channel Number Word 8 identifies the channel number previously allocated for communication with the remote Modbus TCP server Word 9 Modbus Function Code Word 9 specifies Modbus Function Code 6 P
258. nly if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Commreq CLOSE_REQ is a one shot Positive Transition coil activating once when READ_SUCCESS transitions from OFF to ON Rung 13 The MOVE WORD function moves a zero to the CRS word referenced in the Command Block see rung 9 This clears the CRS word This rung also resets the CLOSE_FLT output coil of the COMMREQ Function Block in rung 15 ETH_READY CLOSE_REQ i BLKMOVINT BLKMOV INT 14 1 I 1 2 IN Q RO0301 5 IN1 ROO308 R00301 R00308 o IN2 o N2 s INs o iN3 11 ING o IN4 o iNs o INS o INE o ine 3001 INF o INF 1 5 ETH_READY CLOSE_REQ 1 1 1 F CLOSE_FLT s 1 R00301 R00301 1 6 ETH_READY CLOSE_SUCCESS s 1 RO00012 R00012 Rung 14 The BLKMV INT functions set up the COMMREQ Command Block contents When this rung is activated the constant operands are moved into the memory beginning at the address indicated in the instruction The constant operands in this example are defined in the Close Modbus TCP Connection Example in this chapter Rung 15 The COMMREQ Function Block has three input parameters and one output parameter wwweasiamily com Elhaileagser vehi MORNE Mne Commands 4 31 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete The IN field points to the starting location of the Command Block parameters RO00301 in this exam
259. nt Connection COMMREQ Registers Coils or Exception Status data may be read from the remote Modbus TCP device The Modbus Function Code specifies the data type Valid Function Codes for the Read Data COMMREQ are presented in the following table Function Description Base Address Data Unit Size Maximum Data Code Units 2 Read Input Discretes Read Input Discretes Discretes 10001 2000 Multiple 1 S gister Registers 16 bit Word Register 16 bit Word An Address and Length specify the location of the data in the remote device and the number of data units to transfer The Length is the number of Registers or Coils to transfer Modbus Function Code 7 Read Exception Status does not require the address as the remove device retrieves the exception status from an internal location Coil data is always padded with zeros when less than an even multiple of 16 bits of coil data is returned to the PLC Data returned from the remote device is stored in the PLC data area specified in the Read Modbus TCP Device COMMREQ Data can be stored in any of the PLC data areas Refer to page 4 14 for the list of data areas and identification codes for the PLC Note that the first item referred to in each data area is item not item 0 The COMMREQ Status Word CSR indicates the success or failure of the Read Data COMMREQ If the COMMREQ requests an invalid channel number or any other field is invalid the COMMREQ fails and the CSR is s
260. nt PLC 3 10 3 15 3 17 4 9 4 10 4 12 4 14 4 15 4 17 4 18 4 19 Client Server Capability 1 2 Command Block 3 2 3 3 3 7 4 2 4 3 4 6 COMMREQ Function Block 3 2 3 3 3 6 4 2 4 5 COMMREQ functions maximum pending 3 47 4 34 COMMREQ Status word 3 2 3 4 3 46 4 2 4 3 4 34 Minor Error Codes 3 38 4 24 Pointer 3 8 4 7 Communications Ports Characteristics B 1 Communications Request 4 2 Communications Status words 3 31 3 36 4 20 4 23 Configuration Parameters new style IC693CMM321 2 9 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 23 2 34 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 49 Configuration Planning 5 6 Configuring with Windows based software 2 22 with Windows based software 2 33 new style IC693CMM321 2 8 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 22 2 33 2 47 Configuring Ethernet Global Data 5 16 Configuring Multiple Gateways 6 7 Consumed Data Exchange Definition 5 14 Index 1 Index Consumer 5 3 Control software 2 22 2 33 Converter RS 232 to RS 485 adapter B 5 CRS word 3 4 3 46 4 3 4 34 D Data Block 3 3 3 8 4 3 4 7 Length 3 7 4 6 Data Transfer bit 3 35 3 47 4 22 Data Transfers with One Repetition 3 48 DCS words 3 4 3 36 DDP Name Resolution 6 11 Default Station Address Label Series 90 30 CPU364 2 5 2 20 2 31 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 44 Detailed Channel Status words 3 4 3 29 3 36 Determining if an IP address has been used 2 15 2 29 2 40 2 54 DNS Name Resolu
261. nt Unit Interface is standard across a variety of different physical media Compatible transceivers can be purchased that support 10Base5 and 10Base2 coaxial cables as well as twisted pair and fiber optic cables The standard AUI makes your selection of transceiver and trunk cable medium transparent to the Ethernet Interface Your cables must meet the applicable IEEE 802 3 standards This section presents the information you need to specify the cables and related components required for Ethernet Communications including Attachment Unit Interface AUI port pinouts and AUI cable diagrams Pinouts of the AUI Port The AUI port is a 15 pin D type female connector It is used to connect the Ethernet Interface to an external transceiver Pin Number Signal Description 1 GND Signal Ground CP Collision Presence 3 Tx Transmit 4 GND Signal Ground 5 RX Receive 6 GND Signal Ground 7 NC Not Connected 8 GND Signal Ground 9 CP Collision Presence 10 Tx Transmit 11 GND Signal Ground 12 RX Receive 13 12 12 Volts 14 GND Signal Ground 15 NC Not Connected SHELL Chassis Ground Note Pinouts are provided for troubleshooting purposes only Cables are readily available from commercial distributors GE Fanuc recommends purchasing rather than making transceiver cables wwwgadiapmily com EMaileassermedl OBAMALE Meristics The document is for study only if tort
262. nt is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete L Configuring Multiple Gateways Multiple Gateways are supported on the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 and the Series 90 30 CPU364 and CPU374 only An Ethernet Interface with the Multiple Gateways feature has the ability to route packets not only through a single default gateway but also through additional gateways located on the local subnet The gateway that is configured in the Ethernet Interface s hardware configuration using the PLC programming software is defined as the default gateway If supported in the Windows based PLC programming software additional gateways can also be configured to define alternate routes to remote subnets in the Routing tab of the Name Resolution and Routing Table Rack Operation One routing table may be defined for a PLC system which is made available to all the Ethernet Interfaces in that PLC Example Configuring Multiple Gateways This example is an extension of the example in Subnets and Multiple Gateways Refer to that example to understand how subnets are created and the subnet mask 255 255 192 0 was determined This example adds Subnet 2 3 A 172 16 0 1 Network 1 172 16 0 2 G1 Gateway B C 172 17 64 3 172 17 64 1 172 17 64 2 Local Sub Network 2 1 172 17 64 4 172 17 64 5 G2 Gateway G3 Gateway a E 172 17
263. ntenance Request Caused by Restart pushbutton pushed until bottom two LEDs tum ON Station Manager MAINT command issued Fatal System Error while in Operational State forced a restart Symbols The LEDs are labeled from top to bottom as follows EOK LAN STAT The symbols used for the LEDs are defined as follows Q OFF oN ve Slow Blink multiple slow blinking LEDs blink in unison K Fast Blink Traffic blinks when there is traffic on the line The process symbols are defined as follows LO Temporary condition requires no intervention lt gt Decision point during power up O Interface State normally the Interface remains in a State unless there is user intervention 2 27 LED Pattern Where Stopped Possible Cause Corrective Actions O EOK OFF A Fatal Hardware Error Make sure the PLC has power O LAN OFF Examine PLC Fault Table for clues PEEN Hardware Recheck PLC Programmer Failure configuration Power off baseplate inspect the Interface for loose components reseat the module and Restart If the problem persists replace the PLC hardware EOK Slowblink LAN Slowblink STAT Slowblink All LEDs blink in unison B Software Loader Restart pushbutton until the bottom LED turns ON Station Manager LOAD command issued Software corrupt Connect a PC Software Loader and load new software See Appendix C Cycle power or press Restart pushbutton a
264. nterface will automatically restart itself Disconnect the serial cable Place the label accompanying the floppy diskette marked UPDATED TO FIRMWARE VERSION x xx adjacent to existing product label Restarting an Interrupted Firmware Upgrade 1 Carefully check the cables the RS 232 RS 485 converter if used and all connections It is important to use the recommended cable assembly or equivalent Use of non standard cables especially cables that are very long can inhibit the Firmware Update Utility from successfully communicating with the Ethernet Interface 2 Briefly press and release the Ethernet Interface Restart button Depending on how far the previous upgrade progressed before it failed your Ethernet Interface may restart in either operational mode or firmware load mode If all LEDs are blinking simultaneously skip to step 3 now If your Interface is in operational mode press and hold the Restart button for five seconds until the lower LED lights Release the button and verify that all LEDs are blinking simultaneously If all LEDs are off replace your Interface Otherwise proceed to step 3 Note If you hold the restart button down too long the Ethernet Interface will enter maintenance mode To return to operational mode press and hold the restart button briefly less than 5 seconds Then re execute the instructions in this step 3 You must exit the Firmware Update Utility on the PC and start it again then repeat the
265. oader is a separate software utility that updates the communications software in the Ethernet Interface This utility is supplied with any updates to the Ethernet Interface software See Appendix C Upgrading the Ethernet Interface Firmware for more information At any time before you initiate a load with the PC Software Loader when the Ethernet Interface is in the Software Load State you can restart the Ethernet Interface by pressing the Restart pushbutton Pressing this pushbutton will immediately cause the board to restart If the reload has been initiated see Appendix C Upgrading the Ethernet Interface Firmware for more information Restart and Enter Maintenance State Pressing and holding the Restart pushbutton until the bottom two LEDs turn ON approximately 10 seconds forces a restart and requests entrance to the Maintenance state Maintenance state must be invoked to change Advanced Parameters While in Maintenance state all Advanced Parameters revert to their default value When the Restart pushbutton is pressed all LEDs go out After approximately 5 seconds the STAT LED comes ON then after approximately a total of 10 seconds have elapsed the LAN LED also comes ON to indicate that the Ethernet Interface will request entry to the Maintenance state After the Restart pushbutton is released the three Ethernet LEDs flash ON then power up diagnostics run and the Ethernet Interface enters the Maintenance state Notes In
266. ocal PLC Memory Starting Address Word 10 determines the starting address to store the Detailed Channel Status data The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 9 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified for example if Word 9 16 and Word 10 2 then the starting address will be 19 Valid ranges of values depend on the PLC s memory ranges The user is responsible for assuring that this area is large enough to contain the 2 words of data without overwriting other application data Note For the Abort Channel and Retrieve Detailed Channel Status commands no actual data is transmitted on the network Communication occurs between the client PLC CPU and the local Ethernet Interface only For these commands known as local commands the actual function is performed locally within the Ethernet Interface and then the COMMREQ Status word is sent immediately to the CPU www gadfamily com Eltancadsev2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Status Data This section describes all the status data that is available to the ladder program to determine the state of the Ethernet Interface and its channels Types of Status Data There are four main types of status data available to your ladder program 1 OK Output of the
267. odbus TCP device using the value at Q4 Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Use channel 6 a channel previously opened with the Open Modbus TCP Client Connection COMMREQ Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4 Word 5 Word 6 Word 7 Word 8 Word 9 Word 10 Word 11 Word 12 Word 13 Word 14 Dec Hex 00008 0008 00000 0000 00008 0008 00009 0009 00000 0000 00000 0000 03004 OBBC 00006 0006 00005 0005 00072 0048 00004 0004 00501 01F5 00001 0001 00001 0001 Length of Channel command Data Block Always 0 no wait mode request Memory type of CRS word R CRS word address minus 1 R10 Reserved Reserved Write to a Modbus TCP Device Channel number 6 Modbus Function Code Force Single Coil Local PLC Memory Type Local PLC Starting Address Address in the Remote Device Number of Coils in the Remote Device Unit Identifier Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 identifies the COMMREQ as a Write Data to Modbus TCP device Word 8 Channel Number Word 8 identifies the channel number previously allocated for communication with the remote Modbus TCP server Word 9 Modbus Function Code Word 9 specifies Modbus Function Code 5 Force Single Coil Word 10 Local PLC Memory Type Words 10 11 specify the location in the local PLC from where the Ether
268. ode indicating what error occurred wwweasiamily com Elhaileagsenvah MORNE Mne Commands 4 33 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Monitoring the Communications Channel Once you have a working ladder program you can use the status data to monitor your communications activity and take the desired action upon certain events Monitoring the COMMREQ Status Word It is critical to monitor the CRS word for each COMMREQ function you initiate First zero the associated CRS word before executing the COMMREQ function Then when the CRS word becomes non zero you know the Ethernet Interface has updated it If the CRS word is updated to a one 1 then the Command Block was processed successfully by the Ethernet Interface If the CRS word is updated to a value other than 1 then an error has occurred in processing the Command Block Do not use data received from a server until the CRS word for that channel is 1 or the Data Transfer bit goes to 1 Monitoring the Channel Open Bit This bit is 1 when a Channel has successfully established a connection with a remote server and is 0 when a Channel has been closed The Channel Open Bit is meaningful whenever the PLC CPU is in run mode and the particular channel is being used by Modbus TCP The Channel Open Bit is set at the same time the successful status is returned to the CRS word for the Open Modbus TCP Connection COMMREQ Sequencing Communications
269. ode request Word 3 00008 0008 Memory type of CRS word R Word 4 00009 0009 CRS word address minus 1 R10 Word 5 00000 0000 Reserved Word 6 00000 0000 Reserved Word 7 02001 07D1 Abort Channel command number Word 8 00005 0005 Channel number 5 Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number This command parameter requests that a channel be aborted If the command is processed successfully it will terminate the processing on the channel by the time success is indicated in the COMMREQ Status word Word 8 Channel Number The channel number specifies the channel to be disconnected 1 32 for Series 90 70 PLCs and 1 16 for Series 90 30 PLCs As a convenient way to abort all channels if the channel number parameter is 1 FFFFH all channels in use will be aborted It is not an error to abort all channels when there are none in use Neither is it an error to abort an idle channel Note For the Abort Channel and Retrieve Detailed Channel Status commands no actual data is transmitted on the network Communication occurs between the client PLC CPU and the local Ethernet Interface only For these commands the actual function is performed locally within the Ethernet Interface and then the COMMREQ Status word is sent immediately to the CPU wwwigadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnalC eGeries 90 PLC Use
270. oduced Exchange EXAMPLE 2 Local Exchange Var Name Address Length Type Description Producer ID ID 0 0 0 1 FROOIOO Conveyor in PLCI Consumed Exchanges Information EXAMPLE 2 Local Exchange Local Adapter Name Remote Group Consumer Update Status Time Producer ID ID Producer ID ID Period Timeout Word Stamp 0 0 0 2 PLC2 0 0 0 1 1000 2000 0 0 0 3 PLC3 0 0 0 1 1000 2000 Variable List for Consumed Exchanges EXAMPLE 2 Local Remote Exchange Var Name Address Length Type Description Producer ID Producer ID ID Note These tables contain definitions of ALL the exchanges in the entire EGD system The shaded columns identify the PLC in which a given exchange is to be configured and additionally for the variable list tables the exchange the variable is associated with www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Example 3 EGD Configuration Using a Symbolic Name to Identify Consumers There are three PLCs in this more complex EGD system using three Ethernet Global Data exchanges PLC1 contains two Ethernet Interfaces designated A and B one of which is both a producer and a consumer PLC2 is a consumer only And PLC3 is both a producer and a consumer The Adapter Names are used as the symbolic names to identify the consumer PLCs No aliases have been configured so DDP na
271. ogic Developer Control or VersaPro programming software do the following 1 8 In Control and VersaPro from the Browser double click Hardware Configuration icon The Local Rack Window will appear In Logic Developer expand the hardware configuration and the main rack in the browser In Control and VersaPro click the Main tab Click the CPU slot press the right mouse button and choose Replace Module The Module Catalog dialog box will appear In the Module Catalog dialog box select CPU model IC693CPU364 then click the OK button Follow the instructions on the screen until the Parameters dialog box appears The Parameters dialog box will allow you to edit the module s parameters To edit a parameter value click the desired tab then click in the appropriate Values field The Settings Scan and Memory tabs contain parameters that pertain directly to CPU operation Refer to Online Help for more information The Ethernet and RS 232 tabs contain parameters directly related to the embedded Ethernet Interface s functionality Some fields in the Ethernet tab must be filled in The default settings for the RS 232 tabs can be used Refer to the topic Configuration Parameters that follows for information on these fields We recommend leaving the serial port parameters at default settings If you want to view the power consumption of this module click the Power Consumption tab After you have configured all of the mo
272. ollowing steps 1 Connect either the COM1 or COM port on your PC to the Software Loader Port on your Ethernet Interface For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface and the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 use cable assembly IC690ACC901 For the Series 90 30 CPU364 Embedded Ethernet Interface use serial cable IC693CBL316A If you also use your PC to run Logicmaster 90 through COM1 or COM2 simply move the cable connector from the PLC CPU to your Interface The Firmware Update Utility is unable to use COM3 or COM4 2 Insert the update diskette into the A or B floppy diskette drive of your PC 3 Atthe C gt prompt type a install orb insta11 if the diskette is in drive B followed by the Enter key The install program will copy several files to your hard drive and then run the Firmware Update Utility program These files will be removed upon completion of the update Install can also run from the floppy drive directly if there is no hard drive or not enough space on the hard drive To run from the floppy type install at the A gt or B gt prompt followed by the Enter key 4 The Firmware Update Utility uses the COM1 port of your PC by default If you connected your cable to COM1 skip the rest of this step If you connected your cable to COM2 press the F3 key from the Firmware Update Utility main menu Then use Tab to select COM2 and Enter to accept the new setting 5 Do not press any function keys in the Firm
273. omation NA LAN system software fault resuming Internal system error User Action If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA LAN transceiver fault OFF network until Transceiver or transceiver cable failed or became fixed disconnected User Action Reattach the cable or replace the transceiver cable Check SQE test switch if present on transceiver Local request to send was rejected discarded Internal error Check that the Ethernet Interface is online request User Action If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA Memory backup fault may lose config log on Internal error accessing FLASH device restart User Action If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA Replace Ethernet Interface Module software corrupted requesting reload Catastrophic internal system error Contact GE Fanuc Automation NA Module state doesn t permit Comm_Req COMMREQ received when Ethernet Interface cannot discarded process COMMREQ User Action Make sure Ethernet Interface is configured and online Unsupported feature in configuration PLC firmware does not support Ethernet communications software or attempt has been made to configure a feature not supported by the Ethernet Interface User Action Check CPU and Ethernet Interface revisions order upgrade kit for CPU and or Ethernet Interface Network Adapter does not support Ethernet Ethernet Interface does not support Ethernet Global Data Global Data operatio
274. onfiguration Software wwwi cadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete COMMREQ Function Block The COMMREQ Function Block is the ladder instruction that triggers the execution of the Channel command In the COMMREQ Function Block you specify the rack and slot location of the Ethernet Interface a task value and the address of a location in memory that contains the Command Block There is also a fault output on the COMMREQ Function Block that indicates certain programming errors COMMREQ Command Block The COMMREQ Command Block is a structure that contains information about the Channel command to be executed The Command Block consists of two parts Common Area includes the address of the COMMREQ Status word CRS word Data Block Area describes the Channel command to be executed When the COMMREQ function is initiated the Command Block is transferred to the Ethernet Interface for action SRTP Channel Commands The Channel commands are a set of client PLC commands used to communicate with a server PLC Advantages of Channel Commands The advantage of Channel commands is their ability to establish a channel to execute multiple periodic reads or writes with a single initiation of aCOMMREQ function A Channel command can also be used to execute a single read or write Up to 32 channels numbered 1 32
275. or Series 90 30 PLCs If the channel number is out of range a command error indication will be placed in the COMMREQ Status word If the channel number is the same as a channel already in use the channel will be re tasked to perform this new command Word 9 Number of Send Repetitions Word 9 specifies the number of transfers to be performed before automatically completing the communications request and closing the channel wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 23 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete A Channel command set up to issue a single send can have only one pending send transfer If this value is set to 1 only a single transfer will be issued If this value is set to 0 transfers will be issued on the requested period until the channel is aborted Word 10 Time Unit for Send Period Words 10 11 together define how often the transfer is to be performed transfer period Word 10 specifies the time unit such as seconds or minutes for the send period Word 11 specifies the number of those units The choices for the time units are shown below Value Meaning 1 hundredths of seconds 10 ms 2 tenths of seconds 100 ms 3 seconds 4 minutes 5 hours Word 11 Number of Time Units for Send Period Word 11 specifies the number of time units for the send period The send period is in effect even when the Channel command is setup to issue a single s
276. or example if you want R1 as the location of the CRS word you must specify a zero for the offset The offset for R100 would be 99 decimal Note however that this is the only zero based field in the Channel commands Word 5 Reserved Set to zero Word 6 Reserved Set to zero Words 7 and up Data Block The Data Block defines the Channel command to be performed wwwieadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnaC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Channel Commands There are five Channel commands Establish Read Channel Establish Write Channel Send Information Report Abort Channel Retrieve Detailed Channel Status Establishing a Channel The Ethernet Interface transfers data to or from another PLC using a channel There are two channel commands for transferring data between PLCs Establish Read Channel Establish Write Channel The Ethernet Interface also transfers data to a host another computer on the network which is running Host Communications Toolkit HCT software There is one channel command for transferring data to a host computer Send Information Report These Channel commands are based on the concept of periodic data transfers The client local PLC uses a single COMMREQ function to establish a channel connection to a server remote PLC and to request that specific data be periodically transferr
277. ord is not updated in the CPU each scan as are the status bits They are generally used to determine the cause of a communication error after the COMMREQ function is initiated The cause is reported in the form of an error code described later in this section The COMMREQ Status word CRS word is returned from the Ethernet Interface to the PLC CPU immediately if the Command Block contains a syntax error or if the command is local The location of the CRS word is defined in the Command Block for the COMMREQ function wwwi gadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnaiC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Description of the Status Data The errors and status reported in each type of status data are described below FT Output of the COMMREQ Function Block The FT Output passes power upon the following errors Invalid rack slot specified The module at this rack slot is unable to receive a COMMREQ Invalid Task ID Invalid Data Block length zero or greater than 128 Too many simultaneous active COMMREQs overloading either the PLC CPU or the Ethernet Interface LAN Interface Status LIS Bits The status bits occupy a single block of memory The location of this block is specified during configuration of the Ethernet Interface The first 16 bits of the block are the LAN Interface Status LIS bits The next 64 bits are the Channel Status b
278. ort parameters You can then change the default settings of the serial ports optional Refer to the topic Configuration Parameters that follows for more information on these fields We recommend leaving the serial port parameters at default settings 6 After you have completed the configuration press the Escape key to return to the rack display Press Escape again to save the configuration to disk 7 Store the configuration to the PLC so these settings can take effect Refer to GFK 0466 Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software User s Manual for more information on configuring the Ethernet Interface using Logicmaster 90 30 software CPU364 Configuration Parameters Ethernet Parameters Configuration Mode This is fixed as TCP IP Adapter Name A symbolic name representation of the associated IP address The character set is listed in Chapter 6 Network Administration Support The Adapter Name is associated with the IP address used in Ethernet Global Data If supported in the PLC programming software view all adapter names in Hardware Configuration by going to the Edit menu choosing Rack Operations and selecting Name Resolution Adapter names are listed in the Adapter Names tab Status Address The Status Reference Type is the location of the LAN Interface Status LIS bits 16 bits and the Channel Status bits 64 bits The Channel Status bits are always located immediately following the LAN Interface Stat
279. ort to your rights please inform us we will delete PLC Fault Table The PLC Fault Table can be accessed in PLC programming software If you are experiencing a problem with the Ethernet Interface check the PLC Fault Table for a fault message then refer to the table that follows in this chapter for instructions on what to do about the problem To access the details of a PLC Fault Table entry For Windows based PLC programming software double click the Fault Table entry and the details are displayed as fault extra data Refer to Online Help in the PLC programming software for more information For Logicmaster 90 programming software select the Fault Table entry and press lt CTRL F gt to view the fault details The fault extra data are the long strings of digits on the right half of the message line Refer to GFK 0265 Logicmaster 90 70 Programming Software Reference Manual or GFK 0467 Series 90 30 20 Micro Programming Software Reference Manual for more information An example of the fault extra data is shown below 160006000300050000000000000000000000000000000000 U J For Ethernet Interfaces the leftmost 14 digits of fault extra data underlined in the example above show the corresponding log Events 2 digits and Entries 2 3 and 4 in that order 4 digits each The example above is reporting an Event 16 Entry 2 6 Entry 3 3 and Entry 4 5 This information can be used to refer directly to detailed fault descrip
280. orts on the Ethernet Interface must not be connected either directly or indirectly to the same device The hub or switch connections in an Ethernet network must form a tree otherwise duplication of packets may result wwwgadfamily com EMajhCRaSRANRAONANAbEReries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete The Station Manager Software The built in Station Manager software provides on line supervisory access to the Ethernet Interface through either the Station Manager port or over the Ethernet cable The Station Manager services on the Ethernet Interface include An interactive set of commands for interrogating and controlling the station Unrestricted access to observe internal statistics an exception log and configuration parameters Password security for commands that change station parameters or operation Access to the Station Manager is attained through a user provided computer terminal or terminal emulator See GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual for more information on the Station Manager The PC Software Loader The PC Software Loader is a separate software utility which runs on a PC in order to update the communications software stored in flash memory in the Ethernet Interface This utility is supplied with any updates to the Ethernet Interface software How to Make the System Work
281. ost Group A group IP address used to receive multicast IP messages from the network Host Group addresses must be valid Class D multicast IP addresses Hostid The hostid is the part of the IP address identifying the host on the network See also Netid Hub See Repeater IEEE 802 The IEEE 802 LAN series of standards are as follows IEEE 802 Overview and Architecture IEEE 802 2 The Logical Link Control LLC sublayer of OSI Data Link Layer common above all IEEE 802 Medium Access Control MAC sublayers IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD Ethernet MAC and Physical Layer standard IEEE 802 4 Token Bus MAP LANs MAC and Physical Layer standard IEEE 802 5 Token Ring IBM MAC and Physical Layer standard Information Field That part of a protocol data unit PDU that contains data as opposed to the address field and command field Initiating Station The station from which an instance of communication a transaction originates Also referred to as client Interface Shortened form for Ethernet Interface The general term used in this manual to identify the GE Fanuc hardware module with or without software that connects a PLC or CNC to a network See also LAN Interface Internet Address A unique Internet address identifies each node on an IP network or system of connected networks The Internet address is assigned to the node by the user Also known as an IP address See also Physical Address Internet Control Message Protocol
282. ot editable as there is no consumer period A value with a possible range of 10 3 600 000 milliseconds 10 milliseconds to hour that specifies how often the consuming device should scan the local Ethernet Interface for new data and or status updates The actual scan time may be affected by the logic sweep time Scanning the data will not interrupt normal logic sweep execution For peak efficiency the consumer period should be set to the same value as the Producer period in the corresponding produced data exchange definition The default is 200 milliseconds Round this value to the nearest 10 milliseconds before you enter it The consumer period has a resolution of 10 milliseconds If you enter a value such as 12 milliseconds the actual consumer period will be rounded up to 20 milliseconds Update Timeout A value with a possible range of 0 10 3 600 000 milliseconds that specifies how often the Ethernet Interface should declare the occurrence of a refresh error The error signals when a first or subsequent packet of data does not arrive within the specified time It is recommended that the value be at least double the producer s producer period value and 20 milliseconds greater than the consumer period to allow for transient network delays The default is 0 indicating no timeout is used Round this value to the nearest 10 milliseconds before you enter it The update timeout has a resolution of 10 milliseconds If you enter a value such a
283. oves a zero to the CRS word referenced in the Command Block see rung 4 This clears the CRS word This rung also resets the OPEN_FLT output coil of the COMMREQ Function Block in rung 5 It is vital that the CRS Status Word be cleared and the COMMREQ fault output coil be cleared each time before initiating a COMMREQ function wwweasiamily com Ebhaileagsenvahh MORNE Mne Commands 4 27 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Rung 4 The BLKMV INT functions set up the COMMREQ Command Block contents When this rung is activated the constant operands are moved into the memory beginning at the address indicated in the instruction The constant operands in this example are defined in the Open Modbus TCP Connection Example in this chapter ETH_READY 5 1 H OPEN_REQ a REG 1 6 i ETH_READY RO0010 R00010 OPEN_FLT s 4 R00301 R00301 OPEN_SUCCESS s 1 Rung 5 The COMMREQ Function Block has three input parameters and one output parameter The IN field points to the starting location of the Command Block parameters R00301 in this example The SYSID field of the COMMREQ Function Block defines the target rack and slot of the Ethernet Interface to receive the command data This is a hexadecimal word value that gives the rack high byte and slot low byte location of the Ethernet Interface module In the example ladder diagram shown whic
284. ovided IEEE 802 3 transceiver cable which connects the AAUI Port to an external Ethernet compatible transceiver see Appendix B Communications Ports Characteristics for the characteristics of the AAUI Port and suggested transceivers The external transceiver is directly connected to the Ethernet cable Caution Do not connect or disconnect a transceiver cable to the AAUI port while power is applied to the PLC This may blow the AAUI port fuse and or cause permanent damage to the Ethernet Interface 10Base T RJ 45 Port This 8 pin RJ 45 port provides a direct connection to a 10Base T twisted pair Ethernet network without an external transceiver wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 19 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete CPU364 Labels Default Station Address Label The Default Station Address label lists the MAC address to be used by this Interface Serial Number Label The Serial Number Label indicates the serial number of this Interface Replaceable Surface Mount Fuse A user replaceable fuse is provided on the DC power that is supplied by the Ethernet Interface to the AAUI network port for use by an external transceiver Replace only with a surface mount 2 69x2 69x6 1mm 125V 1A fast acting fuse such as catalog number R454 001 made by LittelFuse http www littelfuse com You may order this fuse from GE Fanuc The part number is 44A4725214 001 Removing and
285. pe RS 485 port on the Ethernet Interface Use the 9 pin to 25 pin adapter to connect to the 25 pin serial port on the personal computer TO THE 15 PIN D TYPE RS 485 PORT a45484c ON THE ETHERNET INTERFACE a A o A V w Sob O ise Bro uo st IG 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Connector Male ddvLxX amp 694H TO THE 9 PIN SERIAL PORT NOTE ON THE PERSONAL COMPUTER Use the 9 pin to 25 pin adapter to connect to D the 25 pin serial port on the personal computer wwwgadiapmily com EMaileassermedl OBAMALE Meristics B 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 10Base T Port The Series 90 30 CPU364 Embedded Ethernet Interface the IC693CMM321 FG and later versions and the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 are equipped with a 10Base T port for direct connection to a 10Base T twisted pair network without addition of an external transceiver The 10Base T port on the Ethernet Interface is connected to an external 10Base T hub or repeater by a twisted pair cable Your 10Base T twisted pair cables must meet the applicable IEEE 802 standards This section provides the information you need to specify the 10Base T twisted pair cables including 10Base T port pinouts and cable diagrams 10Base T Port Pinouts The 10Base T port is located on the front of the Ethernet Interface This port is an 8 pin RJ 45 modular phone jack connector It is used to connect the Ethernet Interface to a
286. ple The SYSID field of the COMMREQ Function Block defines the target rack and slot of the Ethernet Interface to receive the command data This is a hexadecimal word value that gives the rack high byte and slot low byte location of the Ethernet Interface module In the example ladder diagram shown which is taken from a VersaPro screen the first three number places from left to right are zeros and are not displayed only the last number 4 appears This indicates rack 0 slot 4 The TASK field of the COMMREQ Function Block indicates which mailbox task ID to use for the specified rack and slot For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface this value should always be zero The FT output energizes the CLOSE_FLT coil in this example is turned ON set to 1 if there were problems preventing the delivery of the Command Block to the Ethernet Interface In this case the other status indicators are not updated for this COMMREQ Rung 16 When ETH_READY is set the CRS word for the Close Modbus TCP Connection commreq is monitored for a status of 1 indicating that the Close commreq completed successfully The CRS word change to sets coil CLOSE_SUCCESS www gadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Troubleshooting a Ladder Program As mentioned there are several forms of status data which can be used in your lad
287. ports optional Refer to the topic Configuration Parameters that follows for more information on these fields We recommend leaving the serial port parameters at default settings 7 After you have completed the configuration press the Escape key to return to the rack display Press Escape again to save the configuration to disk 8 Store the configuration to the PLC so these settings can take effect Refer to GFK 0263 Logicmaster 90 70 Programming Software User s Manual for more information on using Logicmaster 90 70 software www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete CMM742 Configuration Parameters Ethernet Parameters Configuration Mode This is fixed as TCP IP Adapter Name A symbolic name representation of the associated IP Address The character set is listed in Chapter 6 Network Administration Support The Adapter Name is associated with the IP address used in Ethernet Global Data If supported in the PLC programming software view all adapter names in Hardware Configuration by going to the Edit menu choosing Rack Operations and selecting Name Resolution Adapter names are listed in the Adapter Names tab IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address and Name Server IP Address These values should be assigned by the person in charge of your network the network administrator TCP
288. r Description Hexadecimal 0190H Timeout expired before transfer completed still waiting on transfer 0290H Period expired before transfer completed still waiting on transfer 8190H COMMREQ data block too short for the command 8290H COMMREQ data block too short for server PLC node address 8390H Invalid server memory type 8490H Invalid Program Name 8590H Invalid Program Block Name 8690H Zero server unit length is not allowed 8790H Server unit length is too large 8890H Invalid channel number 8990H Invalid time unit for period Maximum permitted 3965 hours 8A90H Period value is too large 8B90H Zero server memory starting address is not allowed 8C90H Invalid client memory type 8D90H Invalid server host address type 8E90H Invalid IP address integer value Must be 0 255 8F90H Invalid IP address class 9090H Insufficient TCP connection resources to do request 9190H Zero local starting address is not allowed 9290H Address length value invalid Must be 4 for address type 9390H COMMREQ data block too short for Program Block name including 0 pad 9490H COMMREQ data block too short for Program name including 0 pad 9590H Internal API error See PLC Fault Table or exception log for details This problem may occur due to the Ethernet Interface being asked to perform beyond its capacity Try transferring less data per message or establishing fewer simultaneous connections wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniah
289. r Program This section provides tips on how to control communications in your ladder program Only segments of actual ladder logic are included Topics discussed are Essential Elements of the Ladder Program Troubleshooting Your Ladder Program Monitoring the Communications Channel Managing Channels and TCP Connections Essential Elements of the Ladder Program Every ladder program whether in the developmental phase or the operational phase should do the following before initiating a COMMREQ function 1 Initiate the COMMREQ function with a one shot transitional coil or transitional contact for Series 90 70 PLCs This prevents sending the same COMMREQ Command Block more than once 2 Include at least the LAN Interface OK bit in the LAN Interface Status Word as an interlock contact for the COMMREQ function You may choose to add more interlocks 3 Zero the word location you specify for the COMMREQ Status CRS word and the OK Series 90 70 PLCs only and FT Outputs of the COMMREQ Function Block before the COMMREQ function is initiated 4 Move the command code and parameters for the Channel command into the memory location specified in IN input of the COMMREQ Function Block before the COMMREQ function is initiated The example ladder program segment starting on the next page illustrates how to incorporate these important points in your program COMMREQ Example In the example logic that follows the input values for the B
290. r disconnect a transceiver cable to the AAUI port while power is applied to the PLC This may blow the AAUI port fuse and or cause permanent damage to the Ethernet Interface 6 Use the PLC programming software or a Hand Held Programmer to make sure the PLC CPU is in Stop mode wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 7 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete CMM321 Configuration Before you can use the Ethernet Interface you must configure the module using the PLC programming software The PLC programming software allows you to specify the modules and T O that will reside in your Series 90 30 PLC rack s The Hand Held Programmer can not be used to configure the Ethernet Interface For the Ethernet Interface specifically the configuration software allows you to Define the Status address of the Ethernet Interface Assign the IP address for the Ethernet Interface and optionally the subnet mask and the gateway address Configure the serial ports optional Configuring the Interface Using Windows Based Programming Software To configure theCMM321 using Control VersaPro or Logic Developer programming software do the following 1 9 In Control and VersaPro from the Browser double click the 90 30 Rack System Local Rack icon The Local Rack Window will appear In Logic Developer expand the hardware configuration and the desired rack in the browser In Control and Ve
291. r network the IP addresses 10 0 0 1 through 10 0 0 255 must not be used and the subnet mask and gateway IP address must be assigned by the network administrator The IP addresses must be assigned so that they are compatible with the connected network Refer to Chapter 6 Network Administration Support for more information on addressing See also Determining If an IP Address Has Already Been Used Network Time Sync Selection of the method used to synchronize the real time clocks over the network Currently the choices are None DISABLED for no network time synchronization and SNTP ENABLED for synchronization to remote SNTP servers on the network Serial Port Parameters These parameters are for the RS 232 RJ 11 serial port on the Ethernet Interface This port is used for the Station Manager connection Data Rate bps Data rate bits per second for the port Choices are 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 Parity Type of parity to be used for the port Choices are None Even or Odd Flow Control Type of flow control to be used for the port Choices are Hardware Software or None The Software selection has no effect wwwgadiamily com EMaieadsened hotmail com 2 35 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Advanced User Parameters Advanced User Parameters may be set for the Ethernet Interface by creating an AUP file and putting it into the folder for the PLC application
292. r s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Retrieve Detailed Channel Status 2002 The Retrieve Detailed Channel Status command requests that the current Detailed Channel Status words be returned for a channel The Detailed Channel Status words contain an active inactive channel indicator and the last channel error codes seen These two words of detailed status supplement the information available in the COMMREQ Status word and the Channel Status bits The command has no effect on the value of the Channel Status bits Be aware that the Detailed Channel Status words are updated every time the status of the channel changes If for example the channel is operating with a fast repetition period the status words may change faster than the ladder executes the COMMREQ to retrieve them Therefore some status values might be missed from the ladder s point of view Example Command Block Retrieve detailed channel status for Channel 5 Store the Detailed Channel Status words to Registers R100 R101 Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Dec Hex Word 1 00004 0004 Length of Channel command Data Block 4 words Word 2 00000 0000 Always 0 no wait mode request Word 3 00008 0008 Memory Type of CRS word R Word 4 00009 0009 CRS word address minus 1 R10 Word 5 00000 0000 Reserved The term local PLC is Word 6 00000 0000 Reserved used here to identify the Wor
293. r will be issued as soon as the previous transfer completes In this case no period errors can occur wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 11 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Word 12 Timeout for Each Read Word 12 specifies the time in hundredths of a second the Ethernet Interface will wait for a read transfer to complete before setting the Channel Error bit and Detailed Channel Status words to indicate a non fatal timeout error The transfer can still complete even after a timeout occurs As a result an application can choose what to do if one occurs If the timeout value is specified as zero no timeout errors will be reported For most applications a timeout need not be specified because the read period in effect acts as a timeout Word 12 should be zero for no timeout However there are two special circumstances in which specifying a timeout is recommended When the number of time units Word 11 is zero so that a subsequent transfer will be issued as soon as the previous transfer completes and no period errors are reported In this case a timeout value can be specified so that timeout errors will be reported by the Channel Error bit When the read period is very long minutes or hours In this case a shorter timeout value can be specified so the application doesn t have to wait for the read period to expire before taking action Word 13 Local PLC Memory Type
294. rameters R00301 in this example The SYSID field of the COMMREQ Function Block defines the target rack and slot of the Ethernet Interface to receive the command data This is a hexadecimal word value that gives the rack high byte and slot low byte location of the Ethernet Interface module In the example ladder diagram shown which is taken from a VersaPro screen the first three number places from left to right are zeros and are not displayed only the last number 4 appears This indicates rack 0 slot 4 The TASK field of the COMMREQ Function Block indicates which mailbox task ID to use for the specified rack and slot For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface this value should always be zero The FT output energizes the READ_FLT coil in this example is turned ON set to 1 if there were problems preventing the delivery of the Command Block to the Ethernet Interface In this case the other status indicators are not updated for this COMMREQ Rung 11 When ETH_READY is set the CRS word for the Modbus TCP Read commreq is monitored for a status of 1 indicating that the Read commreq completed successfully The CRS word change to sets coil READ_SUCCESS Rung 12 When READ_SUCCESS is set it triggers CLOSE_REQ which enables execution of the BLKMOV MOVE and COMMREQ functions for the Close Modbus TCP Connection wwwigadfamily com Elancadsev2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study o
295. ransceiver Network Network Connection Connection LLL tS PL er LE Series 30 30 X Series 90 30 PLC Ethernet PLC Interface CPU 364 or 374 Series 90 70 with Embedded PLC PEH net Ethernet Interface nterface gt ee ee ee p T a ae Host Computer or Programmer Control Device Running an SRTP Application Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation www cadfamily com Eltaicadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Capabilities of the Ethernet Interface The Ethernet Interface brings to your PLC a great deal of capability It will allow you to Become operational quickly The Ethernet Interface is made operational with very little effort You need only install the Interface in the PLC rack or baseplate and use the PLC programming software to store basic configuration information to the module to make the basic SRTP server capability functional SRTP Client capability the capability to initiate communications can be added using the COMMREQ function in the ladder program For Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface IC693CMM321 FH and later basic Modbus TCP server capability is available as soon you supply basic configuration information to the module and you can use COMMREQs to initiate Modbus TCP communications Directly attach your PLC to an Ethernet network The Ethernet Interface allows you to d
296. re for additional guidelines CPU374 Installation Use the following instructions as a guide when inserting a module into a slot in a baseplate These instructions assume that the power supply on the baseplate is to your left Do not insert or remove modules with power applied This could cause the PLC to Stop damage the module or result in personal injury 1 Be sure the Series 90 30 PLC baseplate power is OFF 2 Align the module with the CPU s base slot slot 1 and connector Tilt the module upwards so that the top rear hook of the module engages the slot on baseplate 3 Swing the module downward until the connectors mate and the lock lever on the bottom of the module snaps into place engaging the baseplate notch 4 Visually inspect the module to be sure that it is properly seated 5 Connect one or both of the Ethernet ports on the Ethernet Interface to the network 6 Restore power to the baseplate 7 Use the PLC programming software or a Hand Held Programmer to make sure the PLC CPU is in Stop mode www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete CPU374 Configuration Before you can use the Ethernet Interface with the Series 90 30 PLC you must configure the Interface using the PLC programming software The PLC programming software allows you to specify the modules and I O that will reside in
297. re the configuration to the PLC so these settings can take effect For more information refer to Online Help in the PLC programming software www eadfamily com Eltaicadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Configuring the Interface Using the Logicmaster 90 30 Configuration Software To configure the CMM321 access the I O Configuration rack screen in the Logicmaster 90 30 Configuration Package and do the following 1 Move the cursor to the desired rack and slot location The slot may be either unconfigured or previously configured 2 Press the Communications softkey i e Comm F6 3 Press Ethernet F2 4 Press Enter to select the Ethernet Interface 5 Configure the Ethernet parameters Refer to the topic Configuration Parameters that follows for more information on these fields 6 Optionally after you have assigned the Ethernet parameters press Page Down to display the serial port parameters You can then change the default settings of the serial ports optional Refer to the topic Configuration Parameters that follows for more information on these fields We recommend leaving the serial port parameters at default settings 7 After you have completed the configuration press the Escape key to return to the rack display Press Escape again to save the configuration to disk 8 Store the configuratio
298. reset Single Register Word 10 Local PLC Memory Type Words 10 11 specify the location in the local PLC from where the Ethernet Interface will get the data to be written to the remote PLC Valid values for Word 10 are listed on page 4 14 Word 11 Local PLC Starting Address Word 11 determines the starting address in the local PLC from which the data is to be written The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 10 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified Valid ranges of values depend on the PLC s memory ranges Word 12 Remote Device Address Word 12 specifies the destination register in the remote device Word 13 Number Registers in Remote Device Word 13 specifies the quantity of registers to write to the remote device For Modbus Function Code 6 Preset Single Register this must be set to 1 Word 14 Unit Identifier Default is 1 This field is typically used by Ethernet to Serial bridges to specify the address of a Modbus Slave on a multidrop link The Modbus TCP Unit Identifier is a special control code used in a Modbus TCP message block This value is 1 for most Modbus TCP messages wwweasiamily com Elhaileagsenvehh MORNE Manne Commands 4 17 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Command 3004 Example 2 Force Single Coil Set coil 10501 ON in the remote M
299. ressed the seven Ethernet LEDs flash ON The operator should visually verify that the LEDs go OFF and then ON at this time Then the Interface performs a restart Restart Pressing the Ethernet Restart pushbutton requests a restart of the Ethernet Interface When the Restart pushbutton is pressed the seven Ethernet LEDs go out then flash ON then power up diagnostics run and the software on the Interface is restarted into the Operational state Ports on the CPU374 RS 232 RJ 11 Port Station Manager Port The RS 232 6 pin RJ 11 phone jack port is used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface A cable is needed to connect the terminal emulator or Software Loader to the Ethernet Interface see Appendix B Communications Ports Characteristics Ethernet Ports There are two RJ 45 Ethernet ports on the Ethernet Interface Either or both of these ports may be attached to other Ethernet devices Each port automatically senses the data rate 1OMbps or 100Mbps duplex half duplex or full duplex and cabling arrangement straight through or crossover of the attached link Caution The two ports on the Ethernet Interface must not be connected directly or indirectly to the same device The hub or switch connections in an Ethernet network must form a tree otherwise duplication of packets may result CPU374 Labels Default Station Address Label The Default Statio
300. rformed any data being transferred by the Ethernet Interface at that time will be lost The Restart pushbutton is not operable during the diagnostic phase of power up The Ethernet Interface is in diagnostic phase when the OK LED is BLINKING fast and other LEDs are OFF www cadfamily com Eltaicadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Ports on the CMM321 RS 232 RJ 11 Port Station Manager Port The RS 232 6 pin RJ 11 phone jack port is used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface A cable is needed to connect the terminal or emulator to the Ethernet Interface see Appendix B Communications Ports Characteristics This port is also used to update the module s firmware Ethernet Ports The CMM321 has just one Ethernet interface Connection to the Ethernet network can be made either through the 10Base T connector or the AAUI connector You must connect to just one or the other connector you cannot use both at the same time Note that module versions EF and earlier do not have a 10Base T port and can only be connected through their AAUI port 10Base T Port This port is located on the front of the module and it can be directly connected to a 10Base T network no external transceiver is needed It uses a standard RJ 45 jack See Appendix B for po
301. rk See also Time Synchronization Slot Time in a CSMA CD network Minimum bitrate dependent unit of time which in case of collision is used to determine the delay after which network nodes may attempt to retransmit Slot time for all IEEE 802 3 10 Mbps implementations is 51 2 usec 512 bit times Soft Switches Basic system information set up by the PLC programming software and transferred to the LAN Interface upon powerup or restart Station A computer PLC or other device that connects to one or more networks See also Node Station Address Each node on an Ethernet network must have a unique MAC address which is different from all other nodes on the network This is a 12 digit hexadecimal MAC address See also MAC Address Station Manager A part of the basic Ethernet Interface communications software that executes as a background activity on the Ethernet Interface The Station Manager provides interactive wwwgadiamily com EMaleadservet hotmail com A 7 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete supervisory access to the Ethernet Interface The Station Manager may be accessed locally via the serial port or remotely over the LAN 3 Stratum The number provided by an SNTP server that indicates the server s relation to a true time source The lower the stratum number the closer that particular SNTP server is to a true time source A true time source is usually ba
302. rn power OFF to the PLC for 3 5 seconds then turn the power back ON This will initiate a series of diagnostic tests The EOK LED will blink indicating the progress of power up 2 The Ethernet LEDs will have the following pattern upon successful power up At this time the Ethernet Interface is fully operational and on line LED Ethernet Interface Online EOK ON LAN ON Traffic STAT ON If the STAT LED is OFF check the PLC Fault Table Alternatively use the Station Manager LOG command as explained in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual Problems During Power up If a problem is detected during power up the Ethernet Interface may not transition directly to the Operational State If the Interface does not transition to Operational check the LED pattern on the Interface and refer to the following chart and table for corrective actions www gadfamily com Eltaicadsev2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B States of the Series 90 30 CPU364 with Embedded TCP IP Ethernet Interface 1 The Ethernet Interface is initialized by Powering up the PLC Storing a new configuration to the PLC with changes for the Ethernet Interface Pressing the Restart pushbutton Issuing a Station Manager RESTART LOAD or MAINT command Internal System Er
303. ror occurring when Interface is Operational Ethernet Interface O Initializingl approx 2 6 seconds A Q o Hardware Failure No Diagnostics Pass Yes Load Request or Software Corrupted ve yx Software jx Load Yes No C Waiting for Configuration from PLC CPU max 2 seconds Done D Waiting for IP Address IP address _YeS ok 0 0 0 0 ve No IP Address Received Maintenance Request or Fatal System No Maintenance Client and server capability disabled Uses default Advanced Parameters 2 Operational e o Operational Full support for client and server capability Uses user defined Advanced Parameters wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Permits changes to Advanced Parameters Software Load Caused by Restart pushbutton pushed until bottom LED turns ON Station Manager LOAD command issued Detection of corrupt software Waiting for IP Address Caused by Not configuring Interface using configuration software Configuring Interface with IP address 0 0 0 0 New CPU with no configuration CPU failure to communicate with Interface Continue to Maintenance or Operational Caused by IP address received from network BOOTP server IP address entered by BOOTP Station Manager command Mai
304. rrors Refer to the tables below for a complete listing of major and minor error codes The following tables list the error codes that are reported in the COMMREQ Status word after the execution of aCOMMREQ function These codes also may appear in Word 1 of the Detailed Channel Status words Major Error Codes Error Status Major Error Description Hexadecimal 01H Successful Completion This is the expected completion value in the COMMREQ Status word 02H Insufficient Privilege at server PLC For a Series 90 70 server PLC the minor error code contains the privilege level required for the service request 04H Protocol Sequence Error The server CPU has received a message that is out of order Call GE Fanuc Automation NA for assistance 05H Service Request Error at server PLC The minor error code contains the specific error code See the following table of Minor Error codes 06H Illegal Mailbox Type at server PLC Service request mailbox type is either undefined or unexpected Call GE Fanuc Automation NA for assistance 07H The server PLC CPU s Service Request Queue is full usually due to heavy CPU loading The client should retry later It is recommended that the client wait a minimum of 10 milliseconds before sending another service request OBH Illegal Service Request The requested service is either not defined or not supported at the server PLC This value is returned in lieu of the actual service request error
305. rsaPro click the tab corresponding to the desired rack Click the desired slot press the right mouse button and choose Add Module from the menu If the slot already contains a module choose Replace Module The Module Catalog dialog box will then appear In the Module Catalog dialog box click the Communications tab select IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface and then click the OK button The Parameters dialog box will then appear This dialog box will allow you to edit the module s Ethernet parameters To edit a parameter value click in the appropriate Values field Refer to the topic Configuration Parameters that follows for more information on these fields Optionally after you have completed the Settings tab you can then change the default settings of the Station Manager and Software Loader ports by clicking the appropriate tab We recommend leaving the serial port parameters at default settings If you want to assign variable names to specific status points on the Ethernet card click the Point Reference tab To assign a variable to a point double click the reference address you want The Insert Variable dialog box will appear which will allow you to fill in a variable name and description If you want to view the power consumption of this module click the Power Consumption tab After you have configured all of the module s applicable parameters click the OK button The module will now appear in the selected slot Sto
306. rt details AAUI Transceiver Port This port uses a standard 14 pin AAUI connector to provide the electrical and mechanical interface to a user provided IEEE 802 3 transceiver See Appendix B for Port details Do not connect or disconnect a transceiver cable at the AAUI port while power is applied to the PLC This may blow the AAUI port fuse and or cause permanent damage to the Ethernet Interface CMM321 Labels Default Station Address Label The Default Station Address label lists the MAC address to be used by this Interface Serial Number Label The Serial Number Label indicates the serial number of this Interface Non Replaceable AAUI Fuse A non replaceable fuse is provided on the DC power that is supplied by the Ethernet Interface to the AAUI network port for use by an external transceiver If this fuse blows you must return the Ethernet Interface to GE Fanuc for repair wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Installing the CMM321 in the PLC For general information about module and system installation refer to GFK 0356 Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual Equipment Required to Perform the Installation Procedures Make sure you have the items listed below before you begin A Series 90 30 PLC CPU baseplate or any Series 90 30 baseplate and a Series 90 30 CPU with power supply The CMM321 requires CPU version 6 5
307. s 22 milliseconds the actual update timeout will be rounded up to 30 milliseconds www gadfamily com Eltacadseveh hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Status Word A variable that identifies the memory location where the status value for the consumed exchange will be placed Valid memory types are listed later in this chapter Time Stamp A variable that identifies the memory location where the timestamp of the last data packet will be placed The timestamp is not an actual date it is an 8 byte value representing the time elapsed since midnight January 1 1970 The first four bytes contain a signed integer representing seconds and the next four bytes contain a signed integer representing nanoseconds This value represents the time in the producer when the data sample originated It can be examined to determine if a new packet received from the network has a new data sample or if it is the same data received previously The timestamp information produced by the PLC currently has a resolution of 100 microseconds if no network synchronization is used If SNTP is used to perform network time synchronization the timestamp information has a resolution of 1 millisecond and has 10 millisecond accuracy between PLCs on the same LAN SNTP is enabled in Module Configuration for the Ethernet Interface Once SNTP time synchronization is configured
308. s a bootstrap protocol that allows a TCP IP network node such as a Series 90 PLC with Ethernet Interface to discover its own IP address and other configuration information This information is supplied from a BOOTP Server device on the network Bridge A functional unit that interconnects two Local Area Networks LANs that use the same logical link control protocol but may use different medium access control protocols A bridge connects network nodes at the Data Link Layer ISO layer 2 Broadcast Sending of a frame that is intended to be accepted by all other nodes on the same Local Area Network Broadcast Address A LAN group address that identifies the set of all nodes on a Local Area Network Bus Network A Local Area Network in which there is only one path between any two network nodes and in which data transmitted by any node is available to all other nodes connected to the same transmission medium NOTE A bus network may be linear star or tree topology GFK 1541B A 1 www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Carrier Sense Ina Local Area Network an ongoing activity of a network node to detect whether another node is transmitting Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD A bus network in which the medium access control protocol requires carrier sense and in which exception conditions caused by collisions are resolve
309. s commonly called thin wire The maximum length of a cable segment is 185 meters A maximum of 30 stations is allowed on a 10Base2 Ethernet segment AUI Port Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 and AAUI Port Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface AAUI only Type and Series 90 30 CPU364 The AUI and AAUI ports provide the electrical and mechanical interface to the user provided Ethernet transceiver cable which connects the AUI or AAUI port to an external user provided transceiver The transceiver cable may be separate or built in to the transceiver The external transceiver is directly connected to the Ethernet cable www cadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Ethernet Media Various Ethernet baseband media 10Base can be interconnected by appropriate hubs or repeaters Capabilities and limitations are defined in IEEE 802 3 Chapter 13 System Considerations for Multi Segment Networks This document is published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc 345 East 47th Street New York NY 10017 2394 USA The Ethernet Interface can operate on any of the following media with the appropriate user supplied transceiver cable and transceiver IEEE 802 3 specifies the definitive requirements of each medium 10Base5 Coax 10Base5 uses a 0 4 inch diameter 50 ohm coaxial cable and
310. sed on an atomic clock such as the broadcast signal transmitted by the Naval Observatory or GPS Global Positioning System satellite signals If configured for SNTP synchronization Series 90 Ethernet Interfaces automatically synchronize to the SNTP server with the lowest stratum number Subnet Subnet Id Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a mechanism to logically divide a large network into smaller subnets according to your local assignment of IP addresses to nodes on the network Nodes on the network which have their IP addresses alike for the bits specified in the subnet mask can talk to each other directly nodes whose IP addresses are not alike in these same bits must talk indirectly via an intermediate gateway or router The 32 bits of an IP address are divided between a net id part and a host id part The class of the IP address determines how many bits are in the net id and how many are in the host id In general the net id portion of the IP address on the left is assigned by the Internet authorities The host id portion on the right is assigned by your local network administrator Subnetting is locally optional and consists of designating some any number of the host id bits as an extended net id or subnet id The added subnet id bits are normally taken from the host id bits adjacent to the net id and the subnet mask identifies these bits In your Ethernet module configuration you specify these bits as one 1 and the remaining host id
311. slow or BLINKING fast They indicate the state of the Ethernet Interface traffic at the Ethernet Interface LAN LED and that an exception event has occurred www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnaiC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete The seven Ethernet LEDs are briefly turned ON whenever a restart is performed in the Operational state by pressing and releasing the Restart pushbutton described below This allows you to verify that the Ethernet LEDs are operational Each RJ 45 port has two green LED indicators on it The upper indicator labeled LINK ACT lights when the link is physically present and blinks when traffic is detected on the port Traffic at the port does not necessarily mean that traffic is present at the Ethernet Interface because the traffic can be going between the two ports of the switch The lower indicator labeled 1OOMBPS lights if the network connection is 100Mbps See Verifying Proper Power Up of the Ethernet Interface for more LED information Ethernet Restart Pushbutton The Ethernet Restart pushbutton serves two functions LED test and Restart These functions behave similarly in all states Pressing the Ethernet Restart pushbutton will disrupt Ethernet communications including any communications to other devices attached to the embedded switch LED Test Any time the Ethernet Restart pushbutton is p
312. ss at which to store data R100 Remote PLC Number of memory units 8 registers Remote PLC Network Address type 3 Symbolic Name Remote PLC Network Address length in words 32 Remote PLC Network Address name char 1 2 PL Remote PLC Network Address name char 3 4 C_ Remote PLC Network Address name char 5 6 1a Remote PLC Network Address name char 7 8 a Remote PLC Network Address name char 9 10 Remote PLC Network Address name char 11 12 Remote PLC Network Address name char 13 14 Remote PLC Network Address name char 15 16 Remote PLC Network Address name char 17 18 Remote PLC Network Address name char 19 20 Remote PLC Network Address name char 21 22 Remote PLC Network Address name char 23 23 Remote PLC Network Address name char 24 25 Remote PLC Network Address name char 26 27 Remote PLC Network Address name char 28 29 Remote PLC Network Address name char 30 31 Reserved set to zero Remote PLC Program Name needed for access to remote P or L zero terminated and padded Remote PLC Program Block needed for access to remote L zero terminated and padded u Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting 1 from the intended address wwwgadiapily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete 3 21
313. status of the communication request The location of the CRS word is assigned for each COMMREQ function in the COMMREQ Command Block FT Output of the COMMREQ Function Block This output indicates that the PLC CPU detected errors in the COMMREQ Function Block and or Command Block and did not pass the Command Block to the Ethernet Interface The Logic Program Controlling Execution of the COMMREQ Function Block Care must be taken in developing the logic that controls the execution of the COMMREQ function The COMMREQ function must be initiated by a one shot to prevent the COMMREQ from being executed repeatedly each CPU scan as this will overrun the capability of the Ethernet Interface and possibly require a manual restart Checking certain status bits before initiating a COMMREQ function is also important In particular the LAN Interface OK bit should be used as an interlock to prevent execution of the COMMREQ function when the Ethernet Interface is not operational Following initiation of aCOMMREQ on a channel no further COMMREQs should be issued to that channel until a non zero CRS word has been returned to the program from the Ethernet Interface wwweasiamily com Elhaileagservahh MORNE Mne Commands 4 3 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Operation of the Communications Request The figure and text below explains how Communications Requests are executed to complete a data read from the r
314. t They indicate the state of the Ethernet Interface traffic on the network port LAN LED and that an exception event has occurred The three Ethernet LEDs are briefly turned ON whenever a restart is performed in the Operational state by pressing and releasing the Restart pushbutton described below This allows you to verify that the Ethernet LEDs are operational Ethernet Restart Pushbutton The Ethernet Restart pushbutton serves four functions LED test Restart Restart and enter Software Load state and Restart and enter Maintenance state These four functions behave similarly in all states except for the Software Load state While in this state pressing the pushbutton will cause an immediate restart into the Operational state without performing the LED test if the software in the Ethernet Interface has not been corrupted or erased If the software has been corrupted or erased pressing the pushbutton will cause an immediate restart back into the Software Load state The following text describes Restart pushbutton behavior while not in the Software Load state Pressing the Ethernet Restart pushbutton will disrupt Ethernet communications LED Test Any time the Ethernet Restart pushbutton is released the three Ethernet LEDs flash ON The operator should visually verify that the three LEDs go OFF and then ON at this time Then the Interface performs either a restart a restart and enter Software Load state or a restart and enter Mainten
315. t PLCs to initiate SRTP TCP IP communications No programming is required for SRTP server operations GFK 1541B 3 1 www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete The Communications Request This section describes the elements of the Communications Request No programming of Communications Requests is required for PLCs acting as servers which are merely targets of other systems requests but do not themselves initiate requests Structure of the Communications Request The Communications Request is made up of the following elements The COMMREQ Function Block ladder instruction The COMMREQ Command Block The Channel Command Status Data COMMREQ Status word LAN Interface Statusand Channel Status bits The logic program controlling execution of the COMMREQ Function Block Elements of the Communications Request The figure below illustrates the relationship of these elements CONTROL COMMREQ a44916c LOGIC FUNCTION BLOCK INITIATES COMMREQ FUNCTION INPUTS BLOCK COMMREQ OUTPUTS COMMAND BLOCK OR COMMREQ COMMREQ FUNCTION STATUS WORD COMMREQ STATUS COMMAND gt WORD 7 ol CODES BLOCK ADDRESS ADDRESS DETAILS STATUS BITS OF THE LAN INTERFACE STATUS Beata AND CHANNEL STATUS BITS Location in PLC memory specified when configuring the Interface using C
316. t is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete LED Pattern Where Stopped Possible Cause Corrective Actions O MODULE OK OFF A Fatal Hardware Error Make sure the PLC has power O LAN ONLINE OFF 7 ae PLC Fault Table for clues Cee Hardware Recheck PLC Programmer 2 STATUS ORR Failure configuration Power off the PLC rack inspect the Interface for loose components reseat the Interface and Restart Try a different slot Ifthe problem persists replace the Interface or PLC hardware 3x MODULE OK Slowblink B Restart pushbutton until the Connect a PC Software Loader and X LAN ONLINE Slowblink bottom LED turns ON load new software See Appendix C SERIAL ACT Slowblink Station Manager LOAD Cycle power or press Restart Z STATUS Slowblink Software command issued pushbutton again for less than 5 Loader Software corrupt seconds to restart the Interface and All LEDs blink in unison clear the load request MODULE OK Slowblink C Did not configure slot using Use configuration software to O LAN ONLINE OFF PLC Programmer configure the Interface then store O SERIAL ACT OFF a New CPU with no the configuration to the PLC CPU O Status OFF l Waiting for configuration Make sure Interface is in the correct Configuration a CPU not communicating slot on the in the PLC rack from PLC with Ethernet Interface Power cycle the PLC Condition can last a
317. t location of your Interface You can also check the text displayed by the Ethernet Interface s local station manager NODE command for a Power up diagnostics result message about the Software Loader port See TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual GFK 1186 for details The Firmware Update Utility will not function if there is a hardware failure of the Ethernet Interface Software Loader port The Interface will be inoperative until it is power cycled It should be replaced 7 Click the Update button to begin loading the new firmware A progress bar is displayed across the bottom of the window The firmware load will take approximately 3 4 minutes to complete at 38 400 baud rate 8 Upon completion of the update a dialog box will appear indicating the completion status of the update If the load completed successfully the Firmware Update Utility asks you if you want to update another Interface Click No if this is the last update If there are more click Yes move the serial cable to the next Interface adjust the serial settings if necessary prepare the Interface to receive a load and click Update again 9 Ifthe firmware load fails a window appears indicating the specific error condition that occurred Take appropriate steps to correct the error and retry the update Refer to Restarting An Interrupted Firmware Upgrade below 10 When the firmware load has completed the Ethernet I
318. t to 0001 to specify rack 0 slot 1 The TASK field of the COMMREQ Function Block indicates which mailbox task ID to use for the specified rack and slot For the Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface and the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 this value should always be zero For the Series 90 30 CPU364 this value should always be 21 decimal 0015H The FT output energizes the FAULT coil in this example is turned ON set to 1 if there were problems preventing the delivery of the Command Block to the Ethernet Interface In this case the other status indicators are not updated for this COMMREQ For Series 90 70 PLCs only the OK output may also be monitored to verify the COMMREQ was successfully sent to the Ethernet Interface Troubleshooting Your Ladder Program There are several forms of status data which can be used in your ladder program The use of the LAN Interface OK bit in the LAN Interface Status Word was described in the ladder program fragment above Some of the status data can be used to troubleshoot your program in its developmental stage The two primary sources of this data are the FT Output on the COMMREQ Function Block and the COMMREQ Status word CRS word wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 45 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete FT Output is ON If after executing a COMMREQ Function the FT Output is ON then there is a programming error in one or more o
319. tart Interface x OK Slowblink O LAN ON Traffic OFF O FDX OFF Slowblink x STAT Slowblink OK and STAT blink in unison D Waiting for IP Address Interface s IP address has not been configured or has been configured as 0 0 0 0 Use PLC Programmer to configure the Interface with a non zero IP address Use a BOOTP server to provide Interface with a non zero IP address x OK Slowblink O LAN ON Traffic OFF FDX Slowblink O STAT ON OFF OK and SER blink in unison E Maintenance Restart pushbutton pressed until bottom two LEDs turn ON Station Manager MAINT command issued Internal System Error when Interface was Operational caused a restart and entrance into Maintenance If you did not intend to enter Maintenance press the Restart pushbutton for less than 5 seconds This clears the Maintenance request Examine PLC Fault Table for clues If you need to use the Station Manager to troubleshoot a problem see GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual OK ON O LAN ON Traffic OFF O FDX ON OFF O STAT ON OFF FDX should be ON if Full Duplex mode is activated otherwise it should be OFF F Operational If the LAN LED is OFF the problem may be Network cable or transceiver not connected to Interface or bad transceiver Network cable not terminated properly SQE not e
320. tate unless there is user intervention 2 13 us we will delete All LEDs blink in unison LED Pattern Where Stopped Possible Cause Corrective Actions O OK OFF A Fatal Hardware Error Make sure the PLC has power O LAN OFF cannes PLC Fault Table for clues Recheck PLC Programmer psi one Hardware configuration i O STAT OFF Failure aitu Power off baseplate inspect the Interface for loose components reseat the Interface and Restart Try a different slot If the problem persists replace the Interface or PLC hardware OK Slowblink B Restart pushbutton until Connect a PC Software Loader and bottom LED turns ON load new software See Appendix C LAN Slowblink FDX Slowblink Station Manager LOAD Cycle power or press Restart Slow oa Software command issued pushbutton again for less than 5 STAT Slowblink Loader Software corrupt seconds to restart the Interface and clear the load request x OK Slowblink O LAN OFF O FDX OFF O STAT OFF C Waiting for Configuration from PLC Did not configure slot using PLC Programmer New CPU with no configuration CPU not communicating with Ethernet Interface Condition can last a maximum of 2 minutes Use PLC Programmer configuration software to configure the Interface then store the configuration to the PLC CPU Make sure Interface is in the correct slot on the baseplate Power cycle the PLC Clear faults and Res
321. terface Status bits and the Channel Status bits The starting location of these bits is user configurable The LAN Interface Status bits monitor the health of the Ethernet Interface itself such as the LAN Interface OK bit and the AUI BNC Fuse Blown bit for Series 90 70 PLCs AAUI Fuse Blown bit for Series 90 30 PLCs The Channel Status bits monitor the health and progress of a channel established using the Establish Read Write Channel commands 4 Communications Status Words There are two types of words that provide detailed information The COMMREQ Status word CRS word and the Detailed Channel Status words DCS words The communications status words are not updated in the CPU each scan as are the status bits They are generally used to determine the cause of a communications error after the COMMREQ function is initiated The cause is reported in the form of an error code described later in this section wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 31 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete The COMMREQ Status word CRS word is returned from the Ethernet Interface to the PLC CPU immediately if the Command Block contains a syntax error or if the command is local For remote commands with no syntax error it is returned either after the channel is established successfully and the first transfer has completed or if there is an error establishing the channel The location of the CRS word is defined in
322. th a particular node on the Local Area Network LAN Ethernet physical addresses are typically assigned by the manufacturer See for comparison Internet Address Producer In Ethernet Global Data a device such as a PLC that periodically produces new samples of data data exchange See also Consumer Exchange Producer ID In Ethernet Global Data a dotted decimal number used to uniquely identify a Producer device such as an entire PLC system on the network See also Producer Consumer and Exchange www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnalC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Protocol A set of rules for exchanging messages between two communicating processes Protocol Data Unit PDU Information that is delivered as a unit between peer entities of a Local Area Network LAN and that contains control information address information and may contain data Remote Station A station located elsewhere on the network See also Local Station Repeater Ina Local Area Network LAN a device that amplifies and regenerates signals to extend the range of transmission between network nodes or to interconnect two or more segments A repeater connects network nodes at the Physical Layer ISO layer 1 Responding Station A station which generates a message in response to a command that was directed to the station Round Trip Propagation Time
323. the Command Block for the COMMREQ function The Detailed Channel Status words DCS words are returned from the Ethernet Interface to the CPU only by executing the Retrieve Detailed Channel Status Command If a channel error is indicated by the Channel Error bit after the channel is established the first word of the DCS words will contain an error code indicating the cause of the error The second word of the DCS words indicates whether the channel is active or idle Be aware that the Detailed Channel Status words are updated every time the status of the channel changes If for example the channel is operating with a fast repetition period the status words may change faster than the ladder executes the COMMREQ to retrieve them Therefore some status values may be missed from the ladder s point of view Description of the Status Data The errors and status reported in each type of status data are described below OK Output of the COMMREQ Function Block Series 90 70 PLCs Only The OK output is set if the PLC CPU has successfully delivered the COMMREQ to the Ethernet Interface FT Output of the COMMREQ Function Block The FT Output passes power upon the following errors Invalid rack slot specified The module at this rack slot is unable to receive a COMMREQ Invalid Task ID Invalid Data Block length zero or greater than 128 Too many simultaneous active COMMREQs overloading either the PLC CPU or the Ethernet Interface
324. the IC693CMM321 Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface 10Base T Type and for the 1C693CPU364 Embedded Ethernet Interface use serial cable IC693CBL316A Exit any application that is using this PC serial port such as PLC programming software Connect the proper serial cable to the Ethernet Interface and to the PC See Appendix B Communications Ports Characteristics for more information Insert the update diskette into the diskette drive of your PC Invoke the WinLoader Utility by either double clicking its icon displayed by Windows Explorer or use the Run selection of the Start menu and specify the location of the WinLoader Utility e g a winloader The WinLoader Utility uses the COM1 port of your PC by default If you connected your cable to COM1 skip the rest of this step If you connected your cable to a different com port use WinLoader s COM Port drop down box to select the proper com port In most cases you should not need to adjust the serial port settings that the WinLoader Utility uses No adjustment is necessary if your Ethernet Interface s Software Loader port configuration is set for 19 200 baud ODD parity 8 data bits 0 modem turnaround time If other settings are used you must modify the serial port configuration used by the Firmware Update Utility to use the same serial configuration as your Interface each time you run the Firmware Update Utility To do this click the Settings
325. the location in the local PLC where the Ethernet Interface will store data received from the remote device Valid values for Word 10 are listed on page 4 14 Word 11 Local PLC Memory Address Word 11 determines the starting address in the local PLC in which the data from the remote device is to be stored The value entered is the offset 1 based from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type and mode specified in Word 10 This offset will be either in bits bytes or words depending on the mode specified Valid ranges of values depend on the PLC s memory ranges The user is responsible for assuring that this area is large enough to contain the requested data without overwriting other application data Word 12 Remote Device Address Word 12 specifies the address in the remote Modbus TCP device Word 13 Number Registers in Remote Device Words 13 specifies the quantity of input discretes to read from the remote device Word 14 Unit Identifier Default is 1 This field is typically used by Ethernet to Serial bridges to specify the address of a Modbus Slave on a multidrop link The Modbus TCP Unit Identifier is a special control code used in a Modbus TCP message block This value is 1 for most Modbus TCP messages www gadfamily com Eltancadseve hoHnaiC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete GFK 1541B Command 3003 Example 3 Read Excep
326. this Ethernet Interface or be defined as the Network Address name of the remote PLC or else be defined at a reachable DNS Name Server See Chapter 7 Network Administration Support for more information Words 36 51 Reserved set to 0 Words 52 55 Remote PLC Program Name Words 52 55 specify the case sensitive zero terminated and padded program name also called task name which can be found through the PROG Station Manager command on the server Ethernet Interface to be used with access to remote P or L memory These words are required only for access to such memory and will be ignored if the Memory Type field is not P or L See Note below Words 56 59 Remote PLC Program Block Name Words 56 59 specify the case sensitive zero terminated and padded program block name which can be found in the program block declaration in the server ladder program to be used with access to remote L memory These words are required only for access to such memory and will be ignored if the Memory Type field is not P or L Note The Program Name Words 52 55 and Program Block Name Words 56 59 must have each pair of ASCII characters reversed within the PLC memory For example the name MARY M 4DH A 41H R 52H Y 59H would have 414DH in the first word and 5952H in the second word www gadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for s
327. through 5 50 Do not attempt to do so the operation will fail Move the Interface to a Series 90 70 PLC CPU system running firmware Release 6 00 or higher to perform the firmware load www adfamily com Eltapcadse v2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Appendix Translating PLC CPU Reference Addresses to E Modbus Register Addresses for the IC693CMM321 The Modbus TCP protocol defines operations on a set of reference tables Register Input Register Input Discrete and Coil these Modbus tables differ from the PLC reference tables within the PLC CPU I AI Q WAQ M and R To implement the Modbus TCP protocol the I1C693CMM321 maps each of the Modbus tables into one or more PLC CPU tables see Table below The IC693CMM321 makes no distinction between the Register and Input Register tables 1C693CMM321 Modbus Register Modbus Input Modbus Input Modbus Coil Internal Tables Table Register Table Discrete Table Table 4xxxxx 3XXXXX 1xxxx Oxxxx 11 4096 1 256 1 256 1 4096 pS bits 16 bit words 16 bit words bits AI 16384 257 16640 257 16640 desiw desevet Q1 4096 16641 16896 16641 16896 1 4096 e ee AQI 12288 16897 29184 16897 29184 Sivoo Geanvony Geneve R1 32640 29185 61824 29185 61824 Geneve enews Geawom M1
328. tically when the Ethernet Interface enters the Software Load state For all other states the Station Manager settings take effect Refer to Verifying Proper Power Up of the Ethernet Interface for more information on states of the Ethernet Interface Data Rate bps Data rate bits per second for the port Choices are 300 600 1200 2400 4800 96004 or 19200 Parity Type of parity to be used for the port Choices are None Even or Odd Stop Bits Enter the number of stop bits Choices are 1 or 2 Flow Control Type of flow control to be used for the port Choices are Hardware Software or None The Software selection has no effect Modem TT Turnaround Delay Turnaround delay time to be used for the port The value entered is the number of 10 ms increments for the Turnaround delay Choices are 0 255 e g a value of 100 will provide a 1000 ms or 1 second Turnaround delay Timeout This parameter is currently not used by the Ethernet Interface Changing this parameter has no effect Default selection for the Software Loader Port Default selection for the Station Manager Port wwwgadiamily com EMaieadsened hotmail com 2 25 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Verifying Proper Power Up of the CPU364 Ethernet Interface After configuring the Ethernet Interface follow the procedure below to verify that the Ethernet Interface is operating correctly 1 Tu
329. tion 6 11 E Error Codes COMMREQ Minor Error Codes 3 38 4 24 Establish Read Channel command 2003 3 10 Establish Write Channel command 2004 3 17 4 11 4 16 Establishing a channel 3 9 4 8 4 10 Ethernet Global Data Configuration Planning 5 6 Configuration Based 5 12 Configuring 5 16 Consumed Data Exchange Definition 5 14 Consumer 5 3 Effect of PLC modes and actions on 5 5 Examples 5 17 Exchange 5 2 Exchange Status Word 5 23 Group Usage 5 22 Maximum data size 5 6 Maximum Number of Exchanges 5 6 Number of Variables 5 6 Operation 5 4 PLC Timing Considerations 5 8 Produced Data Exchange Definition 5 12 Producer 5 3 Timestamping 5 25 Ethernet Global Data EGD 5 1 Ethernet Interface 1 2 Capabilities 1 3 Ethernet module Series 90 70 Installation 2 46 Ethernet Ports Series 90 30 CPU364 2 19 2 31 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 44 www gadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hQnalC nGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Ethernet Software 1 7 Ethernet transceiver IC649AEA102 B 15 IC649AEA103 B 17 Exchange 5 2 Exchange ID 5 2 Exchange Status Word Ethernet Global Data 5 23 F Fault table 7 4 Fiber optic cable 1 5 Flash memory 1 7 FT Output of the COMMREQ Function Block 3 4 3 31 3 32 4 3 4 20 4 21 Full duplex configuring 2 11 Fuse IC697CMM742 2 44 Series 90 30 CPU364 2 5 2 20 F
330. tion Status Read the Exception Status from the remote Modbus TCP server Store the ExceptionData at location Q4 bit mode Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4 Word 5 Word 6 Word 7 Word 8 Word 9 Word 10 Word 11 Word 12 Word 13 Word 14 Dec Hex 00008 0008 00000 0000 00008 0008 00009 0009 00000 0000 00000 0000 03003 OBBB 00006 0006 00007 0007 00072 0048 00004 0004 00000 0000 00001 0001 00001 0001 Length of Channel command Data Block Always 0 no wait mode request Memory type of CRS word R CRS word address minus 1 R10 Reserved Reserved Read from a Modbus TCP Device Channel number 6 Modbus Function Code Local PLC Memory Type Local PLC Starting Address Reserved Data Size Unit Identifier Word 4 CRS word address is the only zero based address in the Command Block Only this value requires subtracting from the intended address Word 7 Channel Command Number Word 7 identifies the COMMREQ as a Read Exception Status from the Modbus TCP device Word 8 Channel Number Word 8 identifies the channel number previously allocated for communication with the remote Modbus TCP server Word 9 Modbus Function Code Word 9 specifies Modbus Function Code 7 Read Exception Status Word 10 Local PLC Memory Type Words 10 11 specify the location in the local PLC where the Ethernet Interface will store data received from the remote device
331. tions included in the Log event table under the LOG command in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual www cadfamily com Eltacadsev2h hoHnalC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete PLC Fault Table Descriptions Backplane communications with PLC fault User Action Check to make sure you are not sending lost request COMMREQs faster than the Ethernet Interface can process them If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA Bad local application request discarded User Action Check for valid COMMREQ command request code If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA Bad remote application request discarded User Action Try to validate the operation of the remote request node If problem persists contact GE Fanuc Automation NA Can t locate remote node discarded request Error reported when message received where IP MAC address cannot be resolved Error may indicate that remote host is not operational on the network User Action Check that remote host is operational on network and its addresses are correct Comm_req Bad task ID programmed Message from PLC for unknown Ethernet Interface task User Action Check COMMREQ function block Comm_ req Wait mode not allowed User Action Check COMMREQ to make sure sent in no wait mode Config d gateway addr bad can t t
332. to your rights please inform us we will delete AUI Transceiver Cable Connection The figure below shows a typical cable configuration to connect the AUI port of the Ethernet Interface to an external transceiver a44668c ecco CCD OC OC oO OC Ce o Transceiver Ethernet Interface CONDON EWD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 eooc ooo ce oC OCo Cc ecoocooCcC OCC COCO OC CO o eooeoooo COO oC Ct o 15 Pin Female 15 Pin Male Note Pinouts are provided for troubleshooting purposes only Cables are readily available from commercial distributors GE Fanuc recommends purchasing rather than making transceiver cables 10Base2 Transceiver Description Depending on your particular application any of several types of user supplied transceivers may be used The two most commonly used in industrial environments are 10Base5 and 10Base2 A typical 10Base2 configuration is shown below Bie le Terminator or to 10Base2 BN eck BNC other devices Coaxial Cable 15 Pin 15 Pir Transceiver Cable to Female Male Ethernet Interface Connector Connector H f PWR NOTE SQE soe OGRA 3g zr O We O N rev O A H cp O Ethernet Interface Transceivers must be compatible with the IEEE 802 3 standard and must have the SQE option Enabled Caution PLC power must be OFF when connecting or disconnecting the transceiver www gadfamily com Elta
333. tomation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master Genius PowerTRAC Series Six CIMPLICITY Helpmate ProLoop Series Three CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Logicmaster PROMACRO VersaMax CIMSTAR Modelmaster Series Five VersaPoint Field Control Motion Mate Series 90 VersaPro GEnet PowerMotion Series One VuMaster Workmaster Copyright 2002 GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc All Rights Reserved www cadfamily com EMail cadserv21 hotmail com The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 GFK 1541B Contents Introduction 6s csseasssscessvensatessssdasssonasncnssnad seen snaveusesacionanossesnnass edacestnessenssbadonastudetans 1 1 The Ethernet Interlace resres ieee ies eases e TEE EE EAEE NE AEE 1 2 Ethernet Interface Ports cissssssetecsoscdessnaaseteeanncctdassaveteasascentesnsaventecsareteasns avaasosabetsesaneceieboes 1 4 The Station Manager Software 00 cceeeeceeseeesceeseeeeecsaecsseecsaecaecsaecsaecsaeesseeseeesseeseneesaee 1 7 Installation cision saenssinsonssunvassies cadvesussnacenssesiions savevsscodsosveban
334. topological aspects of the network in order to enable the exchange of data between network nodes The MAC layer is the lower sublayer of the Data Link Layer ISO layer 2 Medium Attachment Unit MAU Ina network node on a Local Area Network LAN a device used to couple the data terminal equipment DTE to the transmission medium Often wwwgadiamily com EMaleadservet hotmail com A 5 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete called transceiver The MAU may be built into the DTE or it may be a separate unit that attaches to the DTE through an AUI Modbus A data transfer protocol Called Modbus TCP when Ethernet media is used called Modbus RTU or simply Modbus when serial media is used Multicast The transmission scheme in which a limited group of multiple receivers are the intended target of a transmission Multicast Address A LAN group address that identifies a subset of the network nodes on a Local Area Network Multiple Gateway Routing The capability of an Ethernet Interface to route a received message to either the default gateway or one of additional gateways configured at the Ethernet Interface Name Resolution A hidden process that permits application programs to address network nodes using a symbolic name Network Address Name in lieu of a numeric IP address Netid The netid is the part of the IP address identifying the network on which the node resides See a
335. tore data that must be preserved when power is off wwwgadiamily com EMaleadservet hotmail com A 3 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Frame A data structure that consists of fields predetermined by a protocol for the transmission of user data and control data Gateway A special purpose dedicated computer that attaches to two or more sub networks and routes packets from one to the other In particular an Internet gateway routes IP datagrams among the networks to which it connects Gateways route packets to other gateways until they can be delivered to the final destination directly across the physical sub network Also sometimes referred to as a router A gateway or router connects network nodes at the Network Layer ISO layer 3 Global Address Administration Address administration in which all LAN individual addresses are unique within the same or other Local Area Networks See also Local Address Administration Global Data See Ethernet Global Data Group Address An IP multicast address that identifies a group of network nodes on a Local Area Network Host A computer or workstation that communicates with stations such as PLCs or CNCs across a network especially one that performs supervisory or control functions Note that this same term is widely used in TCP IP literature to refer to any network node that can be a source or destination for network messages See also Hostid H
336. try LAN controller fuse blown off network Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 AUI port fuse FU3 user replaceable or BNC port fuse FU1 NOT user replaceable PLC Fault Table entry LAN controller fuse blown off network Operation on other ports is not affected This problem can be caused by a defective transceiver shorted network or transceiver cable or a defective Ethernet Interface Isolate and correct the cause of the problem and then replace the fuse or the Ethernet Interface Status Bit 9 Any SRTP Channel Error This bit is set to 1 if there is presently an error on any of the established SRTP channels i e if the individual Channel Error bit is set for any channel This bit does not apply to Modbus TCP Channels Status Bit 13 LAN OK This input will be held at the value 1 as long as the Ethernet Interface software is able to communicate on the network If the network should become inaccessible from this Interface due either to local or network problems this bit will be set to 0 If LAN communication becomes possible it is set to 1 Status Bit 14 Resource Problem This input is set to 1 whenever the Ethernet Interface software experiences a resource problem i e lack of data memory The bit is reset to 0 ona subsequent PLC sweep The Ethernet Interface may or may not be able to continue functioning depending on the severity of the problem Use the PLC Fault Table to understand the problem
337. tudy only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Send Information Report 2010 The Send Information Report COMMREQ requests that a particular block of memory within the PLC CPU reference tables be transferred periodically from an Ethernet Interface SRTP Client to a Host Application SRTP Server The Command Block specifies the repetition period the number of transfers to the server to perform and the timeout allowed in waiting for each transfer to complete The first send is performed immediately regardless of the period specified Example1 Command Block Basic Example Establish a channel Channel 7 to a remote Host application server at IP address 10 0 0 1 Return the COMMREQ Status word to R10 Send local PLC registers R50 R57 to remote host Repeat the send 10 times once every 7 seconds with a timeout of 500 ms for each transfer Dec Hex Word1 00017 0011 Word2 00000 Word3 00008 Length of Send Information Report Data Block 17 words Always 0 no wait mode request Memory type of CRS word R Word4 00009 0009 CRS word address minus 1 R10 Word5 00000 0000 Reserved Word6 00000 0000 Reserved Word7 02010 Word8 00007 Word9 00010 07DA Send Information Report Channel command number 0007 Channel number 7 000A Number of repetitions send 10 times Word 10 00003 0003 Time unit for send period 8 seconds Word 11 00007 0007 Minimum interval between host accesses every 7 seconds Word 12 00050
338. u must define them as Byte Array Word Array or Dword Atrray variables This implies that a variable consisting of discrete point references must be defined in blocks of 8 points if it is defined as a Byte Array 16 points if Word Array and 32 points if DWord Array Discrete memory must be byte aligned Valid memory types are listed later in this chapter Producer and Consumer Period Ranges Producer and consumer periods may be configured to be between 10 milliseconds 2 milliseconds for the Series 90 30 CPU374 and one hour inclusively They should be configured in increments of 10 milliseconds 2 milliseconds for the Series 90 30 CPU374 If not they are rounded to the next highest 10 millisecond increment during operation 2 milliseconds for the Series 90 30 CPU374 For example a configuration value of 11 intended to be 11 milliseconds will be treated the same as 20 ms by the Ethernet Interface 12 milliseconds for the Series 90 30 CPU374 For the Series 90 30 CPU374 you may also configure the producer period with the value of zero A zero period is interpreted as producing the data as fast as possible For the CPU374 zero period production is scheduled every scan or every 2ms whichever is slower In a PLC with rapid scan times scheduling a produced exchange at zero results in a very high load on the network and on the Ethernet Interface which may degrade overall Ethernet performance Scheduling multiple exchanges for a zero period i
339. ues for the Block Move Functions in this example are taken from the Open Modbus TCP Connection 3000 Modbus TCP Read 3003 and Close Modbus TCP Connection 3001 Examples in this chapter Nicknames are used in this example to make the ladder program easier to follow LANIFOK is bit 16 of the LAN Interface Status bits LAN_OK is bit 13 of the LAN Interface Status bits All other nicknames can be assigned as you choose LANIFOK LAN_OK ETH_READY 1 1 1 4 ETH_READY DO_OPEN OPEN_REQ H 1 1 ETH_READY i OPEN_REQ MOVE WORD i OPEN_FLT H R 1 o IN Q R00010 RO0010 ETH_READY OPEN_REQ BLKMOY INT ji 1 1 BLKMOWV INT a INt Q R00301 6 RO0301 INA Q R00308 R00308 3000 IN7 1 Rung 1 Input LANIFOK bit 16 of the LAN Interface Status bits monitors the health of the Ethernet Interface Input LAN_OK bit 13 of the LAN Interface Status bits monitors the online offline status of the Ethernet Interface If both bits are set it is OK to send a COMMREQ and the ETH_READY coil is ON ETH_READY is used as an interlock for Rungs 2 16 Rung 2 When ETH_READY is set Input DO_OPEN triggers OPEN_REQ which enables execution of the MOVE and COMMREQ functions for the Open Modbus TCP Connection Commreq OPEN_REQ is a one shot Positive Transition coil activating once when both ETH_READY and DO_OPEN have transitioned from OFF to ON Rung 3 The MOVE WORD function m
340. ule that does not incorporate a embedded switch is set to full duplex Not implemented on the CMM321 Status Bit 2 Port 1 100Mbps This bit is set to 1 when Port 1 or the only port on a module that does not incorporate a embedded switch is operating at 1OOMbps Status Bit 3 Port 2 Full Duplex This bit is set to 1 when Port 2 is set to full duplex Status Bit 4 Port 2 100Mbps This bit is set to 1 when Port 2 is operating at 100Mbps wwweasiamily com Ebhailcadseniahi ONAE has 3 33 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Status Bit 7 RS 485 Port Fuse Blown Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface and Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 only This bit is set to 1 when the RS 485 Port fuse is blown Otherwise it is set to 0 Operation is affected only if the Interface is in the Software Load state This fuse is not field replaceable Status Bit 8 AAUI 90 30 or AUI BNC 90 70 Fuse Blown This bit is set to 1 when a network port fuse is blown Otherwise it is set to zero This failure is also reported to the PLC Fault Table The applicable network port fuses and PLC Fault Table entries for each of the Ethernet Interfaces are listed below Series 90 30 Ethernet Interface AAUI port fuse FUL NOT user replaceable PLC Fault Table entry LAN interface hardware failure switched off network Series 90 30 CPU364 AAUI port fuse FU1 user replaceable PLC Fault Table en
341. up to issue a single write can have only one pending write transfer Status word If the channel number is the same as a channel already in use the channel will be re tasked to perform this new command Word 9 Number of Write Repetitions Word 9 specifies the number of writes to be performed before automatically completing the communications request and closing the channel If this value is set to 1 only a single write will be issued If this value is set to 0 writes will be issued on the requested period until the channel is aborted Word 10 Time Units for Write Period Words 10 11 together define how often the write is to be performed write period Word 10 specifies the time unit such as seconds or minutes for the write period Word 11 specifies the number of those units The choices for the time units are Value Meaning 1 hundredths of seconds 10 ms 2 tenths of seconds 100 ms 3 seconds 4 minutes 5 hours Word 11 Number of Time Units for Write Period Word 11 specifies the number of time units for the write period The write period is in effect even when the Channel command is setup to issue a single write Example Write Period Calculation If Word 10 contains a value of 3 specifying seconds as the time unit and Word 11 contains a value of 20 then the write period is 20 seconds A write will normally be issued at the start of each write period If the pending write transfer has not complet
342. us bits The Status address can be assigned to l PQ WR WAI or WAQ memory The default value is the next available I address Note Do not use the 80 bits assigned to the LIS bits and Channel Status bits for other purposes or your data will be overwritten wwwgadiamily com EWMaieadsened hotmail com 2 23 The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Status Length This is the sum of the LIS bits and the Channel Status bits This value is automatically set to either 80 bits for I and Q Status address locations or 5 words for R AI and AQ Status address locations IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address and Name Server IP Address These values should be assigned by the person in charge of your network the network administrator TCP IP network administrators are familiar with these parameters It is important that these parameters are correct otherwise the Ethernet Interface may be unable to communicate on the network and or network operation may be corrupted It is especially important that each node on the network is assigned a unique IP address However if you have no network administrator and are using a simple isolated network with no gateways you can use the following range of values for the assignment of local IP addresses 10 0 0 1 First PLC 10 0 0 2 Second PLC 10 0 0 3 Third PLC 10 0 0 255 PLC Programmer TCP or host Also in this case set the subnet mask gateway IP a
343. use status bits 3 34 4 21 G Gateway address 2 9 2 24 2 34 2 49 Gateways 6 4 Group Usage 5 22 H Hardware failure 2 14 2 28 2 39 2 53 Host Communications Toolkit 1 2 1 3 How to Make it Work 1 7 IC649AEA101 Obsolete Ethernet transceiver B 17 IC649AEA 102 Ethernet transceiver B 15 IC649AEA103 Ethernet transceiver B 17 IC690ACC901 cable B 5 IC693CBL316A cable B 3 1C693CMM321 1 1 1C693CMM321 Modbus references E 1 1C693CPU364 1 1 1C697CMM742 1 1 Installation requirements 1C693CPU364 2 21 2 32 new style IC693CMM321 2 6 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 45 Installing GFK 1541B 1C693CPU364 2 21 2 32 new style IC693CMM321 2 6 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 45 IP address 2 9 2 24 2 34 2 49 Configuration 2 24 2 34 2 49 Determining if it has been used 2 15 2 29 2 40 2 54 Isolated network 2 24 2 34 2 49 IP Addresses Reserved for Private Networks 6 3 IP Addresses Multicast 6 3 IP addressing 6 2 Jumper 10Base2 Port Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Type 2 2 44 L Ladder programming 3 43 4 26 LAN Interface OK bit 3 34 4 22 LAN Interface Status bits 3 2 3 4 3 33 4 2 4 3 4 21 LAN OK bit 3 34 4 22 LED test 2 17 2 31 2 42 LED test 2 3 LEDs 2 3 2 12 2 17 2 26 2 30 2 37 2 41 2 51 LIS LAN Interface Status bits 3 33 4 21 LIS bits 3 4 4 3 Loading Ethernet Interface software 2 4 2 18 2 42 Local Channel comman
344. venseeevesees 7 1 Diagnostic Tools Available for Troubleshooting ccccecceeecceeseeceeneeceeneeeesaeceeaeeeeeneees 7 2 What to do if you Cannot Solve the Problem oe ee eecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeeeeaaeeeaee 7 3 PLC Parl Tale serieren iaraa aeren eE EE S ESEE EN EE S EE Pa CEAR E 7 4 Appendix A Glossary nniniinnieniaionmcminminarinumalnennnminGanmaminicaiennat A 1 Appendix B Communications Port Characteristics cccssccssssccssssscssssccsssscssssssssssssseess B 1 RS 232 RJ LI Serial Port ccc tees sssececectucke ce stesaees seve dae EEEE inten E tied B 2 RS 485 15 Pin D Type Ports occsctssccesseis cs need a asetaioiieee sisceeeeis td wentiaceteleenieeliae tees tures B 4 VOB ASE T Pottsin arriten eo er eR E R ERAS EEEE B 6 10Base T 100Base Tx Port sssssssesenssesssesssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssesesssrsssessseesseesseessresseessrest B 8 URENA L i A A E A A B 11 AAU POT A A E B 13 A WEP OF bios sic adac ce canes banner aa E da tbe ecu Ea a eA E EEEE R Ea ERTE EEEE EA B 19 Appendix C PC Software Loader e sseessocesooescocesoeessecscooesoosssocessecssocesocesoossssesssecssocesoosssssssse C 1 Updating Firmware Under WindoWsS seeeeseeeeeseereeseseeesrerissrrrrsstesrestessesrrssrrreesreseseesses C 2 Updating Firmware Under DOS and Windows 3 XX sssssessesesrsssssressesressisrissrrrieseeseesreeses C 4 Appendix D Using the IC697CMM742 with PLC CPU Versions 4 12 5 50 sccsesees D 1 Ethernet Interface
345. ware Update Utility main menu until your Ethernet Interface is ready to receive a firmware load Follow these steps www adfamily com Ehltacadsev2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete With your Ethernet Interface installed in a PLC powered on and functioning press the restart button near the top of your Interface and hold it down for five seconds When the button is first pressed all LED indicators will go out After five seconds the bottom LED will go on indicating that your Interface will enter the load state when the button is released Release the button All LEDs will flash briefly and then begin to blink simultaneously At this point your Interface is ready to accept a firmware load Note If you hold the restart button down too long the Ethernet Interface will enter maintenance mode To return to operational mode press and hold the restart button briefly less than 5 seconds Then re execute the instructions in this step If all LEDs are not blinking after this step but your Interface seems to operate normally when first powered on there may be a hardware failure of the Software Loader port Use the PLC programming software to check the PLC fault table for a Module hardware fault message from the rack and slot location of your Interface You can also check the text displayed by the Ethernet Interface s local station manag
346. ware load will take approximately 3 4 minutes at 38 400 baud 5 6 minutes at 19 200 baud or 9 10 minutes at 9 600 baud Upon successful completion the files that were added to your hard drive are removed If the firmware load fails please refer to Restarting An Interrupted Firmware Upgrade in the previous section 10 When the firmware load has completed the Ethernet Interface will automatically restart itself Disconnect the serial cable The Firmware Update Utility will remind you to attach a product upgrade identification label to your Interface Place the label accompanying the floppy diskette marked UPDATED TO FIRMWARE VERSION x xx adjacent to existing product label www sadfamily com Eltacadse v2 hoHnaC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Appendix Using the IC697CMM742 with PLC CPU D Versions 4 12 5 50 The IC697CMM742 Ethernet Interface Type 2 is designed for high performance operation and convenient installation with IC697 PLC CPU versions 6 00 and later These PLC CPUs recognize and support the Ethernet Interface Type 2 and provide the high throughput demanded by this product GE Fanuc recommends use of IC697 PLC CPUs with version 6 00 and later firmware to obtain the full capabilities of the Ethernet Interface Type 2 Versions 1 10 and later of the Ethernet Interface Type 2 also provide restricted operation wit
347. with the PC Software Loader when the Ethernet Interface is in the Software Load state you can restart the Ethernet Interface by pressing the Restart pushbutton Pressing this pushbutton will immediately cause the board to restart If the reload has been initiated see Appendix C Upgrading the Ethernet Interface Firmware for more information www padfamily com Eltacadseve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Restart and Enter Maintenance State Pressing and holding the Restart pushbutton until the bottom two LEDs turn ON approximately 10 seconds forces a restart and requests entrance to the Maintenance state Maintenance state must be invoked to change Advanced Parameters While in Maintenance state all Advanced Parameters revert to their default value When the Restart pushbutton is pressed all LEDs go out After approximately 5 seconds the STATUS LED comes ON then after approximately a total of 10 seconds have elapsed the SERIAL ACTIVE LED also comes ON to indicate that the Ethernet Interface will request entry to the Maintenance state After the Restart pushbutton is released all LEDs flash ON then power up diagnostics run and the Ethernet Interface enters the Maintenance state Notes In any case any data being transferred by the Ethernet Interface at the time of the Restart will be lost The Restart pushbutton is not
348. x of the PLC programming software for both the producer PLC and consumer PLC and then storing each configuration to its associated PLC These parameters define the content of an exchange as well as its operational characteristics A variable that has already been created in hardware configuration the program editors or the Variable Declaration Editor window can be used in an exchange Or you can create new variables in the Ethernet Global Data dialog box wwwicadfamily com Eltaicadseve hoHnaiC eGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Producer The producer is the device that will periodically produce new samples of data from its local internal memory The producer is uniquely identified by the Producer ID The Producer ID is a dotted decimal number for example 0 0 0 1 Although this number is in IP address form it is not used as an IP address it is used simply to uniquely identify a particular PLC on the network Note that in the case where a Producer ID identifies a PLC producing the exchange it doesn t matter how many Ethernet Interfaces may be installed in that PLC For example a Series 90 70 PLC only has one Producer ID even if it has two or more Ethernet modules installed Configuring the Producer ID The Producer ID is configured via the Local Producer ID field in the Ethernet Global Data Rack Operation of the PLC programming software
349. xchanges Before you begin configuring EGD exchanges you will need to collect a considerable amount of information about the PLCs in your system It is a good idea to record this data so that when you are ready to configure the exchanges in the PLC programming software all pertinent information will be easily found The tables that follow represent one way of recording this information Use these tables or design your own method for recording the information outlined below Record Your EGD System Information Determine for each PLC what data needs to be produced and consumed Make a list of the adapter names and IP addresses of the Ethernet Interfaces in the PLCs that are being used to produce or consume the exchanges See the topic Naming Conventions if these names have not already been configured Determine whether you will identify EGD consumers using a Group ID IP address or symbolic name If you choose to use symbolic names you can use either local name table DDP or DNS name resolution Local name table name resolution uses aliases configured locally in each producer PLC in the Name Resolution and Routing Table Rack Operation in the PLC programming software if supported If using aliases make a list of them DDP uses the adapter name of the remote Ethernet Interface for name resolution The adapter name of an Ethernet Interface is assigned in Module Configuration DNS name resolution uses a DNS server at which DNS
350. xt available I address Note Do not use the 80 bits assigned to the LIS bits and Channel Status bits for other purposes or your data will be overwritten Status Length This is the sum of the LIS bits and the Channel Status bits This value is automatically set to either 80 bits for I and Q Status address locations or 5 words for R AI and AQ Status address locations IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway IP Address These values should be assigned by the person in charge of your network the network administrator TCP IP network administrators are familiar with these parameters It is important that these parameters are correct otherwise the Ethernet Interface may be unable to communicate on the network and or network operation may be corrupted It is especially important that each node on the network is assigned a unique IP address However if you have no network administrator and are using a simple isolated network with no gateways you can use the following range of values for the assignment of local IP addresses 10 0 0 1 First PLC 10 0 0 2 Second PLC 10 0 0 3 Third PLC 10 0 0 255 PLC Programmer TCP or host www gadfamily com Eltacadse ve hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Also in this case set the subnet mask and gateway IP address to 0 0 0 0 Note If the isolated network is ever connected to anothe
351. y the Ethernet Interface Changing this parameter has no effect Turnaround Delay Turnaround delay time in milliseconds to be used for the port Choices are None 10 ms 100 ms or 500 ms Timeout This parameter is currently not used by the Ethernet Interface Changing this parameter has no effect Default selection for the Software Loader Port Default selection for the Station Manager Port www gadfamily com Eltacadsev2 hoHnalC rGeries 90 PLC User s Manual May 2002 GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Verifying Proper Power Up of the CMM742 After configuring the Interface follow the procedure below to verify that the Ethernet Interface is operating correctly 1 Turn power OFF to the PLC for 3 5 seconds then turn the power back ON This will initiate a series of diagnostic tests The MODULE OK LED will blink indicating the progress of power up 2 The LEDs will have the following pattern upon successful power up At this time the Ethernet Interface is fully operational and on line LED Ethernet Interface Online MODULE OK ON LAN ONLINE ON Traffic SERIAL ACTIVE Oo OFF STATUS ON If the STATUS LED is OFF check the PLC Fault Table Alternatively use the Station Manager LOG command as explained in GFK 1186 TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual Problems During Power up
352. ynchronous aspect of EGD in all Ethernet Interfaces except the Series 90 30 CPU374 In the Series 90 30 CPU374 there is no consumer period When data is received it is made available to the application on the next PLC sweep PLC Consuming EGD EGD Consumption is Initiated e Consumer period timer starts xz e Exchange Status word is set to 0 Consumer period EGD Consumption Repeats e Consumer period timer expires and ft is restarted e Exchange data sample received from the network is updated in consumer PLC memory iad e Exchange Status word is set to 1 or 3 if SNTP timestamping is used e Consumer period timer expires and v is restarted e Exchange data sample received from the network is updated in consumer PLC memory e Exchange Status word is set to 1 or 3 if SNTP timestamping is used Does not apply to CPU374 The figure presents a simplified overview of EGD There are other timing issues regarding data transferred from the Ethernet Interface to the PLC CPU that could be an issue depending on your application See the topic Configuration Planning for more information GFK 1541B The document is for study only if tort to your rights please inform us we will delete Effect of PLC Modes and Actions on EGD Operations The table below indicates what happens to the configuration and operation of EGD when in different PLC modes and when certain PLC actions take plac

FANUC Robotics America GFK-1541B User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents